JP6507571B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, data relating to the game may be output to the outside (for example, see Patent Document 1 etc.).

JP, 2008-264280, A

  In recent years, it has been desired to perform more convenient external output.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an external output which is more convenient.

In order to achieve the above objective, the present invention is
A game area in which game balls fired by a predetermined launch means are guided;
A first start winning (entering) means capable of entering game balls in the game area;
The game area is provided separately from the first start winning means in the game area, and it is possible to switch between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or unable to enter the ball and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. 2 start winning combination (entry) means,
First start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the first start winning means;
Second start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the second start winning means;
Based on the detection of the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means, perform a lottery of whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, based on the result of the lottery Main control means for generating the special game state;
Special symbol display means for performing final display of the special symbol in a mode based on the lottery result of the acceptance lottery after the variation display of the predetermined special symbol is performed;
Special symbol display control means for controlling the special symbol display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
While having a second finalized signal output means for externally outputting a second finalized signal indicating that a variable display associated with the entry of the gaming ball to the second starting winning means has been finalized ,
Triggered by entering the game ball to the first start winning means or the second start winning means, a high entering ball that the game ball can enter the second start winning means more easily than a predetermined low entering state It has ball entry state switching means that can be switched to the state,
The second finalized signal output means includes, as the second finalized signal, a low final entering second finalized signal indicating that the variable display has been established in the low entering state, and a variable display in the high entering state. The gist is that it is possible to externally output the second decision signal at the time of entering the high pitch indicating the decision .

  Further, the gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is an effect that usability can be improved.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the main electric composition of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning a prize processing. It is a flowchart which shows success / failure determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows classification judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st reach judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd reach judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows through gate passage processing. It is a flow chart which shows special display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows change display setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a discrimination | determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. It is a flow chart which shows end setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a common drawing fluctuation setting process. It is a flow chart which shows common drawing distinction information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning a prize device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of a payment control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for determination etc. of a decorative symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flow chart which shows pending information storage processing. It is a flow chart which shows suspension processing. It is a flowchart which shows a hit display process. It is a flow chart which shows pending icon setting processing. It is explanatory drawing of a pending | holding icon pattern storage table. It is a flow chart which shows false holding icon setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows false blade opening control processing. It is a flow chart which shows false feather production processing. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of a decoration symbol display apparatus (pending display area). It is a front view of a starting winning combination, and (a) shows a state where a false blade member is in a standby position, and (b) shows a state where a false blade member is in a functional position. (A) is a front view of a base board, (b) is a rear view of a front decoration part (cover unit). It is a perspective view which shows a blade member, a pseudo blade member, etc. It is a partial expanded sectional view of a starting winning a prize unit. It is a perspective view which shows the blade member and pseudo-wing member in another embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the blade member etc. in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows the starting winning combination in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the starting winning combination of another embodiment, Comprising: (a) is a front schematic diagram of a blade member and a base plate, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a base plate, (C) is a perspective view of a blade member. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the front decoration part etc. in another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of the decorative symbol display apparatus (pending display area) in another embodiment. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of the decorative symbol display apparatus (pending display area) in another embodiment. It is a schematic cross section for demonstrating the delivery passage (delivery time adjustment means) in another embodiment. It is the schematic of the various terminals provided in the external terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows a lower ball entry time signal setting process. It is a flow chart which shows upper entry time signal setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows decision signal setting processing. It is a figure showing electric composition, such as a hole computer. It is a figure which shows the display content in a display output device. It is a flow chart which shows reception processing of a hole computer. It is a flowchart which shows an error check process. It is a flow chart which shows fixed number check processing. It is a flow chart which shows ball number check processing. It is a flow chart which shows change rate check processing. It is a flowchart which shows a ball entering ratio check process. It is a flowchart which shows a total count check process. It is a figure which shows the display content in a display output device. It is a figure which shows the display content in a display output device. It is a flowchart which shows frequency signal setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing of the main control apparatus in another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process in another embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special display control processing in another embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the definite signal setting process in another embodiment.

  Hereinafter, one embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") will be described in detail based on the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 etc., the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and one side of the outer frame 11 is an inside as a game board attachment frame. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. In FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, the game members (nails, characters, etc.) disposed on the surface of the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as a front frame are omitted.

  In the outer frame 11, as shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the upper side frame forming portion 11a and the lower side frame forming portion 11b are formed of wooden plate members, and the left side frame forming portion 11c and the right side frame forming portion 11d are formed by extrusion of aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are made of a material, and are assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower end portions of the left side frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are accommodated in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

  Further, an extending wall portion 83 is formed on the right side frame forming portion 11d so as to protrude toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction. The extended wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided so as to protrude toward the inside of the outer frame 11.

  Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening and closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set along the upper and lower sides on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening and closing axis as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 mainly includes a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The front frame set 14 may be configured to be directly releasably supported by the outer frame 11 instead of the inner frame 12.

  Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the lower plate 15 is provided on the front side of the front frame set 14 as a ball tray at the center of the lower portion, and the gaming balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are the lower plate 15 It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removing lever 25 for discharging game balls from the lower plate 15 is provided.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball emission handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") projecting to the front side is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is turned clockwise, the game ball is fired by the launch device 60 as launch means described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of turn operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a release prohibiting button 18 a which can be pressed and operated by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the launch prohibition button 18a is pressed, the launch of the gaming ball by the launch device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to turn the handle 18 while prohibiting the game ball from being fired, or to temporarily stop the game ball from being fired while holding the handle 18.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball tray for temporarily storing game balls and guiding the game balls toward a launcher 60 described later while aligning the game balls in a line. When the upper tray 19 is full of gaming balls, the gaming balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16 described later.

  A ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. Thereby, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a state where a bill, a card or the like is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) disposed to the side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall etc. Loan balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, a pachinko machine in which a game ball is directly lent out to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are unnecessary.

  Furthermore, a ball removing button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. When the ball release button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicated with the lower plate 15 is opened, and stored in the upper plate 19. The gaming balls are guided to the lower plate 15 (fall). That is, the player can transfer the game balls on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball release button 123.

  In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 19, a presentation button 125 and a cross button 126 having an LED built therein are provided, and a decorative symbol display device 42 described later is described by pressing the presentation button 125 or the cross button 126. The corresponding effect is performed in the case of or the content of the effect is changed.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front of the front frame set 14. These light emission means are controlled to change the light emission mode according to the change of the game state and the like, and play a role in enhancing the rendering effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Further, on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102, error indication lamps 104 are provided which are lighted at the time of a predetermined error. In the upper part of each error display lamp 104 in the annular illumination part 102, a large number of fine through holes are formed corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. In the glass unit 137, a pair of conventional front and back rectangular glass plates are not separately attached in a front and back pair but are assembled in a round shape as a whole.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 in the state of being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Accordingly, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  Further, at the lower front of the inner frame 12 (the resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39, a launcher 60 and a launch rail 61 for guiding gaming balls immediately after being launched by the launcher 60 are attached. There is. In the present embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is employed as the launcher 60. Further, a ball feeding device for guiding the gaming balls guided from the upper tray 19 above the launcher 60 to the launch position of the launcher 60 one by one by driving of a built-in drive means (e.g. solenoid) 63 are provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a first start winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, and a first special display device as variable display means. A 43L, a second special display device 43R, a fluctuation identification lamp 40 and the like are provided. As is well known, when the game ball enters the various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning devices 33a, 33b, etc., they are detected by various detecting switches, and the upper tray 19 or lower tray 15 A predetermined number of winning balls are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, three balls are entered when the first start winning device 33a is entered, two pieces when the second starting winning device 33b is entered, and the general winning hole 31. When there are balls, 10 game balls are paid out, and when there are balls entered into the variable winning device 32, 12 game balls are paid out. In addition, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 which does not enter the ball only by passing the game ball (does not discharge on the back side of the game board 30), the payout of the game ball is not performed . In addition, in the first start winning device 33a, the general winning opening 31, and the through gate 34, the game ball moving the game area is configured to be always enterable or passable, while The start winning device 33b and the variable winning device 32 are configured to change state to an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and the game ball that did not win in various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 etc. It is discharged through the game area. Further, on the game board 30, a large number of nails (game nails) are implanted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed. ing.

  A variable display unit 35 is disposed substantially in the center of the game area. A center frame 47 is disposed on the variable display unit 35 so as to surround a decorative symbol display unit 42 described later.

  A pair of left and right entrance holes 151 are provided in the upper portion of the center frame 47, and the gaming balls entered into the entrance hole 151 are formed via the warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47, It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42. The game balls guided on the stage 153 roll on the stage 153 and fall from the top of the stage 153 to the front game area, or extend back and forth formed in the center of the stage 153 to play the game balls. It falls into the lead-out groove 154 which guides to the front.

  At a lower position of the variable display unit 35, a first start winning device 33a having a start winning opening where the game ball can always win is disposed. Further, the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is located immediately above the first start-up winning device 33a, and the gaming ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 enters the first start-up winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. It is configured to be a ball. The first start winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an open / close member for changing the ease of entering the game ball into the first start winning device 33a.

  A second start winning device 33b is disposed below the first start winning device 33a. The second start-up winning device 33b is provided with a pair of rotatably movable wing members 37 adjacent to the left and right sides of the start-up winning opening of the second start-up winning device 33b. In the present embodiment, when the blade members 37 of the second start winning device 33b are in the closed position extending vertically, the tip end of the blade members 37 is adjacent to the first start winning device 33a. Thus, there is no room for the game ball to pass between the second start winning device 33b and the first start winning device 33a, and the second start winning device 33b is closed when the game ball can not enter the start winning opening. It is in the state. On the other hand, when the wing member 37 changes to the open position where it is opened outward, the second start winning device 33b is in an open state where the game ball can enter the start winning opening.

  In addition, although it will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, as the first start winning device, the first start winning device 33a as the always-start winning device, the second start winning device, and the opening and closing start winning device The second start winning device 33 b is unitized and attached to the game board 30. Hereinafter, what the 1st start winning a prize device 33a and the 2nd start winning a prize device 33b unitized is called "start winning a prize unit 401".

  At the lower position of the start winning unit 401, a variable winning device 32 is disposed. The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state where the gaming ball can not win a prize, and in the case of a jackpot state etc., the gaming ball is in an open state where a prize can be won. Although not shown, the variable winning device 32 has a large winning opening leading to the rear of the gaming board 30, a high winning shutter for opening and closing the high winning opening, and a high winning opening for operating the high winning shutter. A variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is provided with a solenoid and a count switch 223 for detecting gaming balls entering the special winning opening, and driving control of the special winning opening solenoid to open and close the special winning shutter. Is switched between the closed state and the open state.

  Through gates 34 are disposed at the left and right sides of the variable display unit 35 in the game area. The through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. Although described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34.

  Further, when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, an entrance support lottery (open lottery) as to whether or not the second start winning device 33b is opened is performed, and the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. And a variable display for teaching the result of the entry support lottery. Then, when winning in the entry support lottery, the second starting winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variable display.

  In addition, although it will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b respectively have a first start winning switch 224a as a first start winning detecting means for detecting a game ball that has won each and a second start. A second start winning switch as a winning detection means 224b is provided, when the game ball is detected by the start winning switches 224a, 224b, a lottery whether or not to generate a jackpot state etc. Is performed, and variable display is performed on special display devices 43L and 43R and a decorative symbol display device 42 described later. Then, when the player wins by a lottery, a jackpot state or the like in which the variable winning device 32 is opened is given.

  In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which a jackpot is won at a predetermined probability in a success lottery, and a "high probability state" in which a jackpot is won at a higher probability than a low probability state in a winning lottery. Furthermore, the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, and it becomes easy to make the game ball enter the second start winning device 33b. There is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the second starting winning device 33b. Hereinafter, a state in which the low probability state and the low ball entry state are referred to as a "normal mode", a state in which the low probability state and the high ball entry state are referred to as a "time shortening mode", a high probability state and a high ball entry state A certain state is called "probability change mode". In the present embodiment, the ball entering state switching means is configured by the main control device 261 that switches between the “high ball entering state” and the “low ball entering state”.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal mode and the definite variation mode are continued until the jackpot state occurs, while the time reduction mode is the special display device 43L, 43R and the decoration pattern even if the jackpot state does not occur. When the variable display on the display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times set in advance, the process is ended, and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  In the present embodiment, a winning lottery performed when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a (so-called "navel") and a second start winning device 33b (so-called "electronic tulip") The type of pers awarded does not change when winning in the lottery for winning if the game ball enters the electric ball ")" (type determination referred to when determining the type of pervious state) The table is configured the same).

  More specifically, as the jackpot type, 15 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15 RS"), 15 round regular jackpot (hereinafter "15 RN"), and 2 round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "2 RS") There is. With regard to “15 RS” and “15 RN”, it is 1 that the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or that eight gaming balls enter the variable winning device 32 after the variable winning device 32 is opened. As a round, with regard to “15 RS”, it is repeated 15 times and then the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, regarding "2RS", the jackpot state ends after the variable winning device 32 is opened twice for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. That is, although "15 RS" and "15 RN" are big hits (so-called, "with out balls with big hits") that significant increase in game balls can be expected during the big hit state, "2 RS" significantly increases the game balls. It is a jackpot that can not be expected (so-called, "No jackpot jackpot").

  In addition, after the jackpot state of “15 RS” ends, “Probability change mode” is given, and after the jackpot state of “2 RS” ends, “(special) probability change mode” is given, and after the jackpot state of “15 RN” ends The shortening mode "(in this example, 100 variable displays) is given. In the present embodiment, if the player wins a big hit in the winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, it will be "15 RS" at a 50% rate, "15 RN" at a 40% rate, and a 10% rate It becomes "2 RS".

  In addition, the first special display device 43L that teaches the result of the winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, and the first teaching the result of the winning lottery based on entering the second start winning device 33b The 2 special display devices 43R are respectively configured by two segment display devices, and are configured to be able to display symbols, characters, numbers, and the like as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are installed at positions which can be viewed by the player (in this example, positions where the game balls in the lower right portion of the game area can not pass).

  Then, in response to the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a, the switching display (variation display) of the special symbol is performed on the first special display device 43L, and the game ball to the second start winning device 33b The switch display (variation display) of the special symbol is performed on the second special display device 43R upon entering the ball. The special display devices 43L and 43R correspond to special symbol display means, and the display contents are directly controlled by the main control unit 261 described later. That is, the main control device 261 constitutes the special symbol display control means in the present embodiment.

  Moreover, after the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the result of the winning or losing lottery, that is, the "big hit", or the special symbol when the variation display is stopped. , “Off” is definitely displayed. For example, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a, the special symbol (combination of segments to be lit) is switched at high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variation display) And, when a predetermined time has passed, any special symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, for example, in the case of winning the "big hit" in the lottery, the corresponding special symbol is displayed when the change is stopped, and a big hit state occurs.

  Furthermore, in the special display devices 43L and 43R, it is also taught by the special symbol to be stopped whether the jackpot type, that is, "15 RS", "15 RN", or "2 RS". In addition, there are a plurality of stop modes of the special display devices 43L and 43R that teach one jackpot type, not one, and any one of them is selected and the stop display is performed. When one of the first special display device 43L and the second special display device 43R is performing variable display or decision display, the other is turned off (“-” is displayed. If neither the variable display nor the determination display is performed, “−” is displayed on both of them.

  In addition, the variable display unit 35 includes the normal symbol display device 41 (upper position of the stage 153 of the center frame 47) and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R which are variably displayed triggered by the passage of the through gate 34. A decorative symbol display device 42 is provided which is variably displayed in accordance with the variably display.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be able to variably display a decorative symbol as identification information. The display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are controlled by a sub control device 262 and a display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 performs an auxiliary operation based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R. The display content is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  For example, the upper, middle, lower three symbol display areas are provided in the decorative symbol display device 42, and in each of the symbol display areas, a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numeric symbols with numbers 1 to 9 attached) The decorative symbols are displayed in sequence (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display region → the lower symbol display region → the middle symbol display region) in a sequential order (variation display) and then stopped. . For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is determined in main controller 261, the display corresponding to the jackpot is made on first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the decoration symbol is displayed on jackpot in decoration symbol display device 42. The stop display is displayed in a combination corresponding to (for example, upper symbol display region, middle symbol line up on a virtual effective line extending so as to pass through upper symbol display region, middle symbol display region, and lower symbol display region) The same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display region and the symbol display region in the lower figure), and the jackpot state is started. In addition, of the upper symbol display region, the middle symbol display region, and the lower symbol display region, basically, the upper symbol display region in which the decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed first will be referred to as “first symbol display region The second symbol display area where the decorative symbol will be stopped and displayed will also be referred to as the "second symbol display area", and the middle symbol display area where the decorative symbol will be stopped and displayed last Is also referred to as "the third symbol display area".

  When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination corresponding to the big hit, for example, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower pattern display region as the previous step. Thus, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the state in which the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. Of course, just because a reach condition occurs does not necessarily lead to a big hit, but it may go off.

  In this embodiment, after the reach state occurs, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region in the middle symbol display region is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. If it is (when Zoro eyes are stopped and displayed), a jackpot state is given. Further, in the case of the odd number Zorozu, "15 RS" occurs, and in the case of the even number Zorozu "15 RN" occurs.

  Moreover, although the combination of decorative designs other than Zorozu basically teaches "disengagement", when it becomes a big hit of "2RS", it is not Zorozu but the decorative designs are specified on the effective line The stop display is made with the combination (combination of chance symbols, so-called chance eyes). In this embodiment, a mode in which “3”, “4” and “1” are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle and lower pattern display regions is a combination of chance symbols.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect stages are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as effects to teach or suggest the game mode in which the user is staying. More specifically, a "probable change stage" which determines that the user is staying in the positive change mode, a "normal stage" which determines that the user is staying in the normal mode, and a "pull back" which is staying in the time reduction mode There is a stage. That is, when the "15 RS" is won, the process shifts to the "probable change stage" after the end of the jackpot state. When the player wins the "15 RN", the game shifts to the "pull back stage" after the end of the jackpot state, and further shifts to the "normal stage" when the variable display is performed 100 times in the pull back stage. In addition, in the present embodiment, there is a “special probability change stage” that shifts after the end of the “2 RN” jackpot state as a kind of “probability change stage”. In the “special odds change stage”, the background slightly changes as compared with the normal stage and the like, and the effect balance changes (for example, the effect pattern which is hard to be selected usually becomes easy to be selected).

  Also, when the game ball newly enters the first or second start winning device 33a, 33b during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the variable display of that amount is It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display performed at the time. That is, the variable display is put on hold (pending). The maximum number of times of the suspended variable display is determined for each type of pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b In response to the game balls, up to 4 variable displays (a total of 8 variable displays) are suspended.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display based on the entry of the game ball to the first start winning device 33a (hereinafter referred to as "first change display") and the game ball to the second start winning device 33b Regardless of which of the variable display (hereinafter referred to as the “second variable display”) based on the ball entry, it is to be digested in the order of being held. In other words, for example, the second change display, which is suspended after the first change display, which has already been suspended, can be arranged in order so as to be stored earlier than the first change display. Therefore, it is not a configuration in which either is preferentially digested.

  Furthermore, the pending number of the first variable display is disposed immediately above the first special display device 43L, and is lit and displayed by the first suspending lamp 46a that can emit blue light, and the pending number of the second variable display is It is disposed directly above the second special display device 43R, and is lit and displayed by the second storage lamp 46b capable of emitting red light. The holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided in the same manner as the first variable display and the second variable display, and the same number as the number of the first variable display or the second variable display is provided. Light. The display contents of the storage lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by the sub controller 262 described later. In addition, when the game ball newly wins the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the jackpot state, the variable display of that portion is also suspended.

  Further, in the present embodiment, that the variable display performed on the basis of the entry of the game ball to the start winning device 33a, 33b is suspended (the right to execute the variable display) is the decorative symbol The display device 42 is also taught. Although details will be described later, as shown in FIG. 43, a hold icon 461 is displayed in the lower portion (hold display area 462) of the decorative symbol display device 42, indicating that the variable display is held and stored. Up to eight hold icons 461 are displayed, and are sequentially digested from the left one.

  Furthermore, with regard to the hold icon 461 of the present embodiment, there is no information on which of the first change display and the second change display the hold icon 461 corresponds to, basically, which change Even if it corresponds to the display, it has a common aspect.

  In the variable display device unit 35 (in this example, the upper position of the stage 153 of the center frame 47) of the present embodiment, the variable display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 is the first variable display, and the second A fluctuation identification lamp 40 is provided to indicate which one of the fluctuation displays. The variation identification lamp 40 includes an LED of blue emission color and an LED of red emission color, and emits blue when the first variation display is performed in the decorative symbol display device 42, and the second variation is generated. It emits red light when the display is being performed.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light and display, for example, "o" or "x" as a normal symbol, and when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the normal symbol is "o" → The display is switched at high speed (variation display) in the order of “x” → “o” →. Then, when the variable display is stopped for a few seconds with the symbol "o" (winning symbol), the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) is in the open state for a predetermined time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later.

  In addition, when the game ball newly passes through gate 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 41, the fluctuation display of that amount is after the end of the fluctuation display being performed at that time It is configured to be performed. That is, the variable display is put on hold (pending). Although the maximum number of times of the variable display of the normal symbol to be held is determined for each type of pachinko machine, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of times is held up to 4 times. In addition, the number of suspension of the variation display of the normal symbol is disposed in the variable display unit 35, and is lit and displayed by the storage lamp 44 capable of emitting white light. The holding lamps 44 are provided four each similarly to the maximum holding number of the variable display of the normal symbol, and are lit by the same number as the number of the variable displays being held.

  In addition, as a high entering state, for example, (1) a state where the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low entering state, (2) one open time of the second start winning device 33b ( (3) The specified number of game balls that can enter the ball for one opening of the second start winning device 33b is longer than in the low ball state, (4) The number of opening times of the second starting winning device 33b per winning of the entry support lottery is larger than that in the low entry state, (5) The winning probability of the entry support selection is from the low entry state It is also possible to keep it high. The high ball entry state in the present embodiment adopts the configurations of the above (2) and (5). Of course, not limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". . As a result, it becomes easy for the game ball to win frequently with respect to the second start winning device 33b, and the number of times the winning or losing lottery is executed increases, and the ball has a good state of possession with the reduction of the player's ball reduced. .

  However, in this embodiment, even in the low ball entry state, the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is the same as that in the high ball entry state (1.86 seconds), and the ball was won in the ball entry support lottery Also in the case where the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state, it is almost the same (5.7 seconds) as in the high ball-in state (5.8 seconds). Further, the probability of winning in the entry support lottery is also 15/233, which is a probability of being relatively easy to win as compared to a conventional pachinko machine having less than 1/100. As a result, even in the low ball entry state, the second start-up winning device 33b can be relatively easily opened, and the variable display of the special symbol can be easily reserved.

  Further, on the game board 30, there are attached rails 50 for guiding the game balls fired from the launcher 60 to the upper part of the game board 30, which are composed of an inner rail structure 51 and an outer rail structure 52. As a result, the game balls fired in response to the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the firing rails 61 and the rails 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail forming portion 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the gaming balls guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area once return to the inside of the rail 50 again. Further, a rubber return 54 is attached to a substantially front end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail configuration portion 52. The game ball fired with a predetermined momentum or more strikes the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming portion 52 is disconnected at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail forming portion 51 is disconnected at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the play area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, until the game ball launched by the launcher 60 passes back the rail 50 until it passes the return ball preventing member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail configuration parts 51 and 52 are removed from the game area It is eaten.

  By the way, the present embodiment is characterized in the start winning unit 401 which unites the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the start winning unit 401 will be mainly described with reference to FIGS.

  In the start winning unit 401, a substantially plate-like base plate 402 attached to the front of the game board 30 in contact with the base plate 402 has a distance allowing the game ball to pass between the base plate 402 and the front. Provided with a substantially disc-like front covering means (general part) provided so as to cover the front of at least the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. There is. The front decoration portion 403 is made of a transparent or translucent resin material (for example, polycarbonate), and the front decoration portion moves the gaming balls moving around the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b. It is configured to be visible through 403.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45A, FIG. 47, etc., the base plate 402 communicates with the opening formed in the game board 30, and the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b. A pair of upper and lower discharge holes 404 are formed to discharge the game ball, which has entered the ball, to the rear of the game board 30 through the opening. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided corresponding to the fronts of the respective discharge holes 404 formed in the base plate 402, and have a substantially U-shaped cross section opened upward. The receiving unit 405 is provided. The opening formed in the upper portion of the ball receiving portion 405 constitutes a start winning hole. Furthermore, the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 405 has a shape for guiding the gaming ball backward (includes a portion having a shape inclined downward to the rear), and enters the ball receiving portion 405 via the start winning hole. The gaming ball is guided to the rear discharge hole 404.

  The game nails standing on the front of the game board 30 include a pair of left and right life nails 406 provided above the left and right sides of the start winning opening of the first start winning device 33a, and the pair of life nails A game ball which has passed between 406 is configured to enter the first starting winning device 33a. In the present embodiment, the start-up winning unit 401 is disposed below the nail nail 406 so that the nail nail 406 and the front decoration 403 do not overlap.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the present embodiment, the front side of the ball receiving portion 405 is closed by the front decoration portion 403. In other words, the front wall portions of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are configured by the front decoration portion 403. In particular, in the present embodiment, each ball receiving portion 405 is integrally formed with the front decoration portion 403, and the ball receiving portion 405 is also made of a transparent or translucent resin material (in the same manner as the front decoration portion 403) The ball receiving portion 405 of the first start winning device 33a is made of transparent resin). Hereinafter, the member in which the front decoration part 403 and the ball | bowl receiving part 405 were united is called "cover unit 407."

  Furthermore, mounting bosses 408 for mounting the cover unit 407 on the base plate 402 are provided integrally with the ball receiving portions 405 in the cover unit 407. The boss hole of the mounting boss 408 is open rearward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45A, mounting holes 409 are formed in the base plate 402 corresponding to the mounting bosses 408, and the mounting bosses 408 and mounting holes 409 are aligned, By screwing from the rear surface side of the base plate 402, the cover unit 407 is attached to the base plate 402. In addition, a support rib may be provided on the base plate 402 so as to protrude forward and support the lower surface side of the ball receiving portion 405.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 44, the base plate 402 of the present embodiment is extended to the left and right sides more than the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403. Furthermore, a pair of left and right pairs formed on the extended portion so as to project forward from the base plate 402 and guiding the game balls moving in the game area on the left and right sides of the front decoration 403 to the front decoration 403 side The slider 411 is provided. The game ball guided by the slider 411 falls on the wing member 37 in the open position with a relatively high probability if the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, to the second start winning device 33b. It is supposed to hit the ball. Further, in the base plate 402, screw holes 412 for screwing the base plate 402 to the game board 30 are formed at the extended portion.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 47 and the like, in the present embodiment, the game ball moving in the game area on the side of the ball receiving unit 405 is guided to the ball receiving unit 405 corresponding to the second start winning device 33b. Only by providing the blade member 37 which can be displaced between the open position and the closed position for restricting the movement of the gaming ball moving to the side of the ball receiving portion 405 to the ball receiving portion 405 side of the ball receiving portion 405. Rather, the pseudo-vane as movable covering means which can be displaced between a functional position capable of covering the front of the vane member 37 in the open position and a standby position capable of covering the front of the vane member 37 in the closed position. A member 431 is provided. In the present embodiment, the blade members 37 in the functional position constitute the guiding means.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when the wing member 37 is in the open position, it has a role of placing the gaming ball and guiding it to the ball receiving portion 405, so that the width (thickness) of the front and back is greater than the diameter of the gaming ball. It is configured large. On the other hand, the pseudo blade member 431 disposed in front of the blade member 37 (between the blade member 37 and the front decoration 403) has the blade member 37 in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position In the case (see FIG. 47 (c)), the game ball can pass through the game area (between the pseudo blade member 431 and the base plate 402) behind the pseudo blade member 431 so that it is thinner than the blade member 37. Is configured.

  Further, as a mechanism for operating the blade member 37, a blade side motor 421 as blade side driving means for displacing the blade member 37, and a substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425 having one end connected to the blade member 37; A blade side gear 426 provided on the other end side of the blade shaft 425 and engaged with the blade side pinion 423 provided on the blade side drive shaft 422 of the blade side motor 421 is provided. The blade-side motor 421 of the present embodiment is electrically connected to a main control device 261 described later. Further, the blade shaft 425 is fixed to the blade member 37 in a state of being inserted into a substantially circular through hole 427 (see FIG. 46B) which is formed in the blade member 37 and which penetrates back and forth.

  Further, as a mechanism for operating the pseudo blade member 431, a pseudo side motor 432 as a pseudo side drive means for displacing the pseudo blade member 431 and a substantially cylindrical pseudo shaft 433 having one end connected to the pseudo blade member 431. And a pseudo gear 436 provided on the other end side of the pseudo shaft 433 and engaged with a pseudo pinion 435 provided on the pseudo drive shaft 434 of the pseudo motor 432. The pseudo side motor 432 of the present embodiment is electrically connected to a sub controller 262 described later.

  Further, the pseudo shaft 433 is inserted inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425, and the pseudo blade member 431 is opposed to the front end portion of the pseudo shaft 433 projecting forward from the front end portion of the blade shaft 425. The dummy gear 436 is attached to the rear end of the dummy shaft 433 projecting rearward from the rear end of the blade shaft 425. With this configuration, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the blade member 37 and the rotation axis of the pseudo blade member 431 extend on (substantially) the same straight line It is done.

  In addition, the front end portion of the pseudo shaft 433 has a substantially D-shaped cross section, and the front end portion is inserted into a substantially semicircular recess (not shown) formed on the rear surface of the pseudo blade member 431. In the state, it is fixed to the false blade member 431. Further, on the front surface side of the pseudo blade member 431, a substantially cylindrical pivotally supporting convex portion 437 formed to project on the front surface side of the pseudo blade member 431 is provided along with the formation of the concave portion. It is done. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the present embodiment, on the rear surface of the front decorative portion 403, a concave bearing portion 438 into which the axially supported convex portion 437 is inserted is formed. As a result, the front end side of the dummy shaft 433 and hence the front end side of the blade shaft 425 are supported, so that deformation, positional deviation, and the like of the dummy shaft 433 and the blade shaft 425 can be suppressed. In addition, a bearing portion may be provided to pivotally support the lower peripheral edge of the blade member 37 or the pseudo blade member 431 on the rotation center side.

  In the present embodiment, the start winning unit 401 is configured to visually recognize the deformed whale. That is, as shown in FIG. 44, the substantially disc-shaped front decoration portion 403 basically includes a character display portion 441 on which a whale is drawn in a colored and transparent hue, and the rest (around the character display portion 441 ) Is a general part 442 that is colorless and transparent (may be colored and transparent with a lighter hue than the character display part 441). However, the forelimb of the whale is not drawn on the character display section 441. Instead, the fore limb of a whale is expressed by the pseudo feather member 431.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (b), FIG. 46, etc., the artificial feather member 431 has a shape (fillet shape) imaging the forelimb of a whale, and coloring of the whale of the character display portion 441 (for example, translucent amber) It is made of a colored and transparent resin material in accordance with. Then, by moving the artificial feather member 431 to the functional position, the forelimb of the whale is configured to protrude to the side of the torso of the whale. In the present embodiment, the tip end portion of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is positioned outward of the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403 (general portion 442).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), in the present embodiment, the dummy blade member 431 in the standby position is located behind the character display portion 441 of the front decoration 403 (a majority of the dummy blade member 431 is It is configured to be hidden by the character display portion 441). In the present embodiment, the whale corresponds to the third object, the part other than the forefoot of the whale corresponds to the first object, and the character display unit 441 of the front decoration unit 403 corresponds to the first object display unit. The forelimb corresponds to the second object, and the pseudo blade member 431 corresponds to the second object display unit. Furthermore, the state in which the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position corresponds to the completed display state, and the state in which the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position corresponds to the uncompleted display state.

  Further, the wing member 37 is also configured to be positioned behind the character display portion 441 (when the wing member 37 in the closed position is entirely hidden by the character display portion 441) when in the closed position. In addition, the blade member 37 of the present embodiment is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. Furthermore, the upper surface (game ball guiding surface) and the front surface of the blade member 37 in the open position are flat (smooth) surfaces. The front and back surfaces of the pseudo blade member 431 are also flat.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 46B and 47, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to have a larger area than the blade member 37 in a front view, the blade member 37 is in the open position, and the pseudo The entire front surface of the blade member 37 is covered by the false blade member 431 in both the case where the blade member 431 is in the functional position and in the case where the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the false blade member 431 is in the standby position. It is supposed to be In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47A, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the functional blade side of the pseudo blade member 431 is The side portion is configured to be positioned closer to the open position than the surface on the open position side of the blade member 37. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the blade member 37 is in the open position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member 431 (the side portion on the standby position side The upper surface (the game ball guide surface, the surface on the standby position side) of the wing member 37 is positioned higher (close position side) than the upper surface (the game ball guide surface, the surface on the standby position side).

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, among the blade members 37 and the pseudo blade members 431, the blade members 37 do not operate alone, and the blade members 37 are displaced from the closed position to the open position. The dummy blade member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the standby position to the functional position while covering the front of the blade member 37. Furthermore, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the functional position to the standby position while covering the front of the blade member 37 There is. On the other hand, the false blade member 431 may operate alone, and as shown in FIG. 47C, the false blade member 431 is in the functional position but the blade member 37 is in the closed position. Are also configured to occur. That is, in the state where the blade member 37 is in the closed position, it is possible to derive the pseudo blade open mode as if the blade member 37 exists in the open position (position other than the closed position). In the present embodiment, a pseudo blade releasing unit is configured by the pseudo blade member 431 and a mechanism for operating the same (including an operation control function described later).

  In the game area, the area covered by the front decoration portion 403 (hereinafter also referred to as "covered area") is covered at the lower position of the second start winning device 33b (the ball receiving portion 405). A pseudo winning detection switch 445 as a pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the area is provided. Since the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is provided in the gaming area, the gaming ball will continue to move downstream of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 even after being detected by the pseudo winning detection switch 445. .

  Further, in the covering area, a guide stand 446 is provided as a pseudo prize guiding means for guiding the gaming ball moving in the covering area to the pseudo prize detection switch 445 so as to project forward from the base plate 402. ing. The guide stand 446 is provided as a left and right pair, and the pseudo prize detection switch 445 is attached so as to be held between these. Further, the guide stand 446 has a curved shape along the lower edge portion of the character display portion 441 of the front decoration portion 403 when the start winning unit 401 is viewed from the front, and further, the guide stand 446 and The entire pseudo prize detection switch 445 is configured to be covered by the character display unit 441 (to be hidden by the character display unit 441).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 47, the front decoration is at the lower position of the area (hereinafter also referred to as the “specific covering area”) of the gaming area which is covered forward by the artificial wing member 431 in the functional position. Although there is a covered area that is covered at the front by the part 403, there is an area where the base plate 402 is not disposed. As shown in FIG. 47C and the like, in this embodiment, a plurality of (in this embodiment, a plurality of (in this embodiment) the lower edge portion (below the specific covering region) of the pseudo blade member 431 located in the functional position In the example, two game nails (hereinafter referred to as “guide nails 448”) are provided upright on the game board 30. The plurality of guide nails 448 are disposed lower as they are positioned on the center side (the side of the guide stand 446) of the start winning unit 401 in the width direction, and basically, the game is in contact with the top side of the guide nails 448 The ball is guided to the guide stand 446 side (the game ball in contact with the upper surface side of the guide nail 448 is not necessarily placed on the guide stand 446, but is placed with a relatively high probability).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the gaming ball hardly contacts the guide nail 448 or the guide stand 446 located directly below the blade member 37. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (c), when the blade member 37 is in the closed position, it enters the covering area and moves the side of the blade member 37 in the closed position. The game ball in contact with the guide nail 448 is placed on the guide stand 446 or directly placed on the guide stand 446. The guide nail 448 is disposed adjacent to the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position and the character display portion 441 of the front decoration 403, and the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is also viewed from the front. The game ball guided to the guide stand 446 side by the guide nail 448 continues to be hidden behind the artificial blade member 431 or the character display portion 441 because it continuously extends with the character display portion 441. In this case, it becomes difficult to keep track of the operation of such a game ball. In the present embodiment, the guide base 446 and the guide nail 448 constitute a path changing means.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window portion 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication passage 71 connecting the discharge mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, and an upper tray communication passage 73 connecting the discharge mechanism portion 352 to the upper tray 19. In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the firing rail 61 and the rail 50 (outer rail forming portion 52) provided on the front side of the inner frame 12, and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. Thus, if the game ball launched from the launcher 60 does not reach the return ball preventing member 53 and returns the rail 50 back as a far ball, the far ball is moved to the lower tray 15 through the far ball passage 72. Exhausted.

  Further, reference numeral 67 in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 is a payout passage for guiding the gaming balls paid out by the payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 projects forward by an urging force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the dispensing passage 67. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 can be pushed open by the rear end on the inlet side of the lower tray communication passage 71. The inlets (ball inlets) of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and the respective inlets and the dispensing passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance when the front frame set 14 is closed. The game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication passage 73 become full of gaming balls, the gaming balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication passage 71 side (the inlet side of the lower tray communication passage 71 overflows), It will be dispensed to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a fullness detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. By the presence of the full detection switch, it is determined that the lower plate 15 is full of gaming balls (the lower plate 15 is full of gaming balls and the gaming balls are stagnant in the lower plate communication path 71) be able to. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the fullness detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full using the display, the voice, etc. on the decorative symbol display device 42 Control is performed. In addition, the stagnation of the gaming ball in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated, and when the gaming ball is not detected by the fullness detection switch (when it is not continuously detected for a predetermined time), the error notification state is released.

  Next, the rear face configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged up and down, right and left so as to be partially overlapped in front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. And protective covers made of resin are attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion may be generally referred to as a back pack, so that unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" herein.

  First, the rear face configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 4) disposed corresponding to the through hole at the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind 213 is provided to project rearward. In addition, on the back side of the frame cover 213, the decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45 and the sub control device 262 can be detached Is attached to

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42 a having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the back surface of the frame cover 213 It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub controller 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262 a and fixed to the back side of the display controller 45 (substrate box 45 a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board or the like for driving an LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. Further, the housing box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning device 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting the game balls that have won the various winning openings. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, a substrate box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member can not be opened without leaving a predetermined trace. Thus, it can be easily found that the substrate box 263 has been tampered with.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch for detecting the game ball having entered the various winning openings, corresponding to the various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and the variable winning device 32 is provided with a count switch 223. Further, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first panel relay board electrically connected to the winning opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. There is. The first board relay board relays the winning opening switch 221 and the like to the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

The detection results respectively detected by the various ball entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the payout number of gaming balls) according to the winning situation in each case is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of gaming balls are calculated based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
In addition to the above, on the back surface of the game board 30, although not shown, there is provided a special winning opening solenoid for opening the big winning opening in the variable winning device 32. Further, the second start winning device 33b is provided with the blade side motor 421 for driving the blade member 37 to open and close as described above. Furthermore, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors to the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is an integrated unit of a resin molded back pack 351 and a payout mechanism portion 352 of the game ball. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened backward with the open and close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 (shown schematically in FIG. 5) is provided at the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various information to a hall computer HC (corresponding to an external processing means) of the game hall, which will be described later, and as shown in FIG. Second jackpot signal terminal 2302, through gate passage signal terminal 2303, error signal terminal 2304, award ball signal terminal 2305, inner frame opening signal terminal 2306, door opening signal terminal 2307, first confirmation signal terminal 2308, second confirmation signal terminal 2309, various external connection terminals such as a third confirmation signal terminal 2310, a first incoming ball signal terminal 2311, a second incoming ball signal terminal 2312, and a third incoming ball signal terminal 2313 are provided. Each of the terminals 2301 to 2313 is electrically connected to the hall computer HC via a cable (not shown), and various signals are output from each of the terminals 2301 to 2313 to the hall computer HC.

  The first jackpot signal terminal 2301 is a terminal for outputting a signal indicating that a jackpot state is in progress, and the second jackpot signal terminal 2302 is for outputting a signal indicating that a jackpot state is in progress or in a time reduction mode. It is a terminal to do.

  The through gate passage signal terminal 2303 is a terminal for outputting a signal indicating that the gaming ball has passed to the through gate 34.

  The error signal terminal 2304 is a terminal for outputting information on various error conditions such as a winning error, a bottom full error, a tank ball non-existence error, a payout error, and the like.

  The winning ball signal terminal 2305 is a terminal for outputting information on the number of winning balls to be paid out from the payout control device 311. Every time a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are paid out, a winning ball signal is output.

  The inner frame open signal terminal 2306 is a terminal for outputting information on the opening of the inner frame 12 detected by an inner frame open detection switch 92 described later. The door open signal terminal 2307 is a terminal for outputting information on the opening of the front frame set 14 detected by the front frame open detection switch 91 described later.

  The first determination signal terminal 2308 is a terminal for outputting a first determination signal described later, and the second determination signal terminal 2309 is a terminal for outputting a second determination signal described later, and a third determination signal The terminal 2310 is a terminal for outputting a third determination signal described later.

  The first input ball signal terminal 2311 is a terminal for outputting a first input ball signal described later, and the second input ball signal terminal 2312 is a terminal for outputting a second input ball signal described later, The third incoming ball signal terminal 2313 is a terminal for outputting a third incoming ball signal described later.

  The first jackpot signal terminal 2301, the second jackpot signal terminal 2302, and the third confirmation signal terminal 2310 are predetermined data counter devices (not shown) provided around (for example, above) the pachinko machine 10 And connected. The data counter device is provided with a predetermined display means, and on the basis of the signals inputted from the two jackpot signal terminals 2301 and 2302 and the third confirmation signal terminal 2310, the number of big hits and the number of fluctuation confirmed, the game It is possible to display the status (during a big hit or being in the time shortening mode) and the like. The third determination signal includes a third determination signal for low support and a third determination signal for high support, which will be described later, but the data counter device does not distinguish between the third determination signal terminal 2310 and the third determination signal. If one of the signals is input, it is determined that the variable display has been fixed once, and processing for increasing the number of fixed variables displayed on its own display means by one is performed. .

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, an ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 which protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263 together. Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the substrate box 263 and the terminal portion (substrate side connector) provided along the upper edge portion of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The dispensing mechanism portion 352 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and gaming balls supplied from an island facility of the game hall are successively supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, there is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the lateral direction and which slopes gently toward the downstream side, and further, on the downstream side of the tank rail 356, a case rail 357 longitudinally. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and the required number of gaming balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The gaming balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

  In addition, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism portion 352, and a power switch board 382 for fetching the main power from the outside is installed. There is. A main power of, for example, 24 V AC is supplied to the power switch substrate 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382 a.

  Under the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the above-described ball collection mechanism flow, and the game ball is formed at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. That is, the gaming balls having won in the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. The out port 36 also communicates with the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that did not win in any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are separately formed and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It may be

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, the dispensing control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 can be removed Is attached to

  The emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. The emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for the sake of convenience, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed substrate).

  In addition, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the substrate box 311 a and fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313 a (the emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313). A sealing member is provided in the substrate box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is accommodated, and an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection substrate 314 is accommodated in the substrate box 314a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the emission control device 312 and the power supply device 313). Each of the substrate boxes 311a, 313a, 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be viewed.

  Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state recovery switch 321 which protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed at the occurrence of a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse to resolve the ball clogging (return to the normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the substrate box 313a. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and maintains the state at the time of the power failure even when the power failure occurs, and may restore the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (power recovery) it can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, at the end of business in the game hall), the state before the power is turned off is stored, so when returning to the initial state when the power is turned on Throw in

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and one side is rotated by one. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  As described above, the right side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 covering the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of the outer frame 11, and to operate the locking device 600 by the said wire etc. As a result, defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extension wall 83 covers the right end (the end on the left side in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12 The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 can not be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the front lower right portion (right side of the launcher 60) of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided in the lower right rear portion (lower left in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12. The front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 each include a detection unit that can be inserted into and withdrawn from the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided such that the detection unit faces forward The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided such that the detection unit faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main unit, the on signal is output to the main control device 261, and the detection unit is pressed to the switch main unit side and in the state of being retracted into the switch main unit It is configured to output to the main control device 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection unit is pressed by the back of the front frame set 14 and turned off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the projecting state. It will be on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is pressed by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed on the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 to be turned off, and detection is performed when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the projecting state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A main controller 261 (main substrate) as a main control means is mounted with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 has a ROM 502 storing various control programs to be executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area in which values such as various flags, counters, and I / O are stored. And a backup area 503a.

  In addition, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  When the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a includes a power-off time (including a power-down occurrence) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off. The same is an area for storing values such as stack pointers, registers, and I / O. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and conversely, restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main processing when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure cancellation). Is executed in A power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542 described later is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like. The occurrence of the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

  If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input / output port 505 are a RAM erase switch circuit 543 to be described later, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

  In addition, although illustration of various relay boards etc. is omitted for convenience, the input / output port 505 includes various switches of the winning opening switch 221, the count switch 223, the start winning switches 224a and 224b, the through gate switch 225, and the handle 18. Various electric components such as various detection switches, various substrates, solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning device 32, and a blade side motor 421 for opening and closing the second start winning device 33b (the blade members 37) are connected. That is, although the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (substrate side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions and the like.

  The sub control unit 262 (sub control board) as the sub control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. The RAM 553 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc., the input / output port 554, the bus line 555, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data transmission / reception circuit, etc. Is equipped. The RAM 553 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  The CPU 551, the ROM 552, and the RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via the bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is connected. Further, the input / output port 554 includes the speaker SP, the holding lamps 46a and 46b, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, various electric decoration parts and lamps 102 and 104, a pseudo winning detection switch 445 provided in the start winning unit 401, The pseudo side motor 432 etc. which operate the pseudo | simulation blade member 431 are connected.

  The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display. In the present embodiment, the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45 constitute a display control means. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 are configured to display that the jackpot has been won, and the sub control device 262 In the decorative symbol display device 42 that is controlled, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed as the effect display in accordance with the variable symbol display of the special symbols in the special display devices 43L and 43R.

  Further, the payout control device 311 performs payout control of the winning balls and the rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing a control program to be executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured such that a backup voltage can be supplied from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and data can be held (backup), and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a Data is backed up. If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all the areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a is a stack pointer at power-off, each register, and so on, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned on again when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. This area is for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. As in the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is configured to receive the power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag in which the payout control of the winning balls by the payout control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer in which the command sent from the device is stored.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of the winning balls, and is turned on when the specific command for permitting the payout of the winning balls is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and the initialization is performed. It is turned off when it is restored before processing or power off. In this embodiment, a specific command is a payout initialization command that instructs initialization processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a winning ball command that instructs payout of a winning ball, and the main control device 261 is restored. There are three of the payout return commands sent in case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received, and similar to the payout permission flag, processing of initial setting or power off It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and turned off when determination of the command received by the command determination process is performed.

  The command buffer is configured of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when the command is stored in all the storage areas, it is stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the storage and the reading of the command are performed based on the respective pointers.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 including the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. Connected to the input / output port 515 are a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312, a payout device 358, and the like.

  The card unit connection board 314 is a ball operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. , And are electrically connected to each other, and take in a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. The card unit connection board 314 can be omitted in a cash machine in which the game balls are directly lent out to the upper tray 19 from the ball lending device or the like without passing through the card unit.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the gaming ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the release control signal 311 outputs a release permission signal, the player detects that the handle 18 is touched by a sensor signal, and the release prohibition button 18a for stopping the release The launch device 60 is driven on the condition that the game ball is not operated (see FIG. 1), and the gaming ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes variation display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub controller 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And have. The input port 527 is connected to an input / output port 554 of the sub controller 262. The CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and to the output port 529, a decorative symbol display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device is connected.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is formed into an IC chip, it is also referred to as a "drawing chip", and the substance of the VDP 526 should be referred to as a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524 and the like to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 for monitoring power supply interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And have.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. The +12 V power supply, the +5 V power supply, and the backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, and the like. An operation power supply (+12 V power supply, +5 V power supply, etc.) is supplied to the emission control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 at the time of power failure due to occurrence of power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The blackout signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the power failure process even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can execute and complete the power failure processing normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control unit 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control unit 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (including the power on due to a power failure cancellation) while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control unit 261 and the payout control unit 311. Ru.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as a main control means performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a type random number counter C1 as a random number generation means used as a random number generating means used in a random number lottery whether or not to generate a big hit state, and a type used to determine a big hit type (type lottery). A decision counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to decide whether or not a reach state is to be generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set an initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, and And the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 used to determine the variation display time of the second special display devices 43L and 43R (the decorative symbol display device 42), and the second start winning device 33b It is decided to use the normal symbol random number counter C4 used in the entry support lottery whether or not to let it be. The variation selection counter C3 is also used for a lottery of reach type when the decorative symbol display device 42 is detached and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. More specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined according to the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and the variation time, ie, the presentation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, returns to the lower limit value 0. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 has a special variation suspension area as a suspension storage area in which the values of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2 and the variation selection counter C3 are stored, and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored A change holding area is provided. The normal change reserve area includes four reserve areas (preserve first to reserve fourth areas) and one execution area. In each reserve area of the ordinary variation reserve area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passage history of the gaming ball to the through gate 34. By adopting the configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

  In addition, the special variation reserve area includes eight reserve areas (preserve first to reserve eighth areas) and one execution area. In each reserve area of the special variation reserve area, in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the first start winning device 33a, and the second start winning device 33b, a random number counter C1, a type determination counter C2, and a variation selection Each value of the counter C3 is stored in time series. In the present embodiment, the first change display and the second change display (the change displays in the special display devices 43L and 43R) can be respectively held up to four times.

  Describing each of the counters in detail, the success / failure random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 695, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 695) as the final value. It is configured to return to. Usually, when the pass / fail random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the pass / fail random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 695), and is updated once every timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, the value of the yes / no random number counter C1 stored in the yes / no random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation reserve area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the random number counter C1 that becomes the big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time shortening mode) is two, and the value is “7, 307”, and the high probability In the state (probability variation mode), the number of the value of the random number counter C1 which is a big hit is 20, and the value is “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. That is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two success / failure determination tables as winning value storage means to be referred to when determining whether the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 corresponds to the big hit. There are a first success or failure determination table storing "7, 307" as a big hit value, and a second success or failure determination table stored "8 to 16, 308 to 316" as a big hit value.

  The type determination counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 19 and return to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19). In addition, the ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table to be referred to when determining whether the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to which jackpot type (in this example, the first start winning device 33a and The type determination table is one in order to make the distribution of the jackpot type the same regardless of which jack of the second start-up winning device 33b corresponds to entering the ball. Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery, the type of the type of jackpot state to be granted is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (type lottery is performed), the jackpot state of the determined type is It will be granted.

  The type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. The value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation suspension area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 238, and return to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs with respect to the decorative symbol by the variation selection counter C3, the reach state occurs similarly to the “front and back out of reach” in which the final stop symbol is shifted by only one before and after the reach symbol. After the final final stop design stops other than the front and rear reach design, it is decided to draw out "reach out except back and forth deviation" and "complete out" that reach condition does not occur. In the present embodiment, as a reach determination table storing the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type in the ROM 502, it is acquired triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first start winning device 33a. The first reach determination table referenced when determining the reach type (when not hitting big) based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 is acquired triggered by the entry of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b as a trigger A second reach determination table to be referred to when determining the reach type (in the case of no big hit) based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 is provided. In the first reach determination table, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the back and forth reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than back and forth, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to the completely out. On the other hand, in the second reach determination table, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the back and forth reach, C3 = 2 to 11 corresponds to the reach other than back and forth, and C3 = 12 to 238 corresponds to the completely out.

  The variation selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation suspension area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. .

  Also, of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially added one by one within the range of 0 to 59, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 59), is the lower limit value The other variation type counter CS2 is configured to return 1 to 0, which is the lower limit value after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 37). It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decoration symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after reach occurrence. A more detailed pattern variation mode is determined, such as the elapsed time until the stop (in this example, the middle pattern). Therefore, various combinations of fluctuation patterns can be easily realized by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation of the decoration symbol by the decoration symbol display device 42.

  Note that the size and range of each counter are merely an example and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 be different prime numbers and be values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Also, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to the upper limit value (that is, reaches 232, then returns to the lower limit value 0). The random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the gaming ball passes either the left or right through gate 34. Low entry The number of random numbers to be won in the ball state is 15. The range is “1 to 15.” On the other hand, the number of random numbers to be won in the high ball state is 232. The range is “1 to 232.” That is, in the present embodiment, a low entry support determination table referred to in the entry support lottery in the low entry state to the ROM 502, and a high entry state Entry support in A high entry-time support determination table to be referenced in the selection is prepared, and when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, the variable display is performed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol display device 41. After that, the symbol corresponding to the winning (in this example, "o") is stopped and displayed, and the second start winning device 33b is released in the pattern according to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly classified into main processing activated upon turning on the power, timer interrupt processing activated periodically (in this embodiment, in 2 msec cycle), and stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). The NMI interrupt process is activated by the input of the above, and for convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, while reading the states of various switches (except the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261, the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, when there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process as it is.

  When there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. Further, in the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and a prize ball is awarded based on the prize ball command (game balls are dispensed) ). Further, upon the output of the prize ball command, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is performed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, 695 and 19 respectively). , 238, 232) and clear to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, start-up winning processing accompanying the winning of the start-up winning device 33 is executed, and in step S305, through-gate passing processing accompanying passing of the gaming ball to the through gate 34 is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily ended.

  Here, the start winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, in the RAM 503, a first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the first variation display triggered by winning in the first start winning device 33a, and second triggered by winning in the second start winning device 33b. The second hold counter Nb counts the number of pending variable displays, and the total number of pendings counts the total number of pending variable displays (the number of pending first variable displays and the number of pending second variable displays) A counter Nx is provided.

  Also, in the execution area and the respective reserve areas of the special variation reserve area, a pass / fail random number storage area for storing the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, a winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided.

  Furthermore, in the execution area and each reserve area of the special variation reserve area, whether it is the first variation display based on entering the first start winning device 33a or based on entering the second start winning device 33b A variation storage area is provided in which information indicating whether it is the second variation display is stored. Hereinafter, "the fact that information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area" is also referred to as "the first variation flag is set on", and that "the second variation display is in the variation storage area" The fact that the information indicating “is stored” is also referred to as “the second change flag is set on”.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the second start winning device 33b based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S501, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S501, in step S500-A, a ball entry signal setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S502. Details of the lower entry ball signal setting process will be described later.

  In step S502, it is determined whether the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb and the total hold number counter Nx are incremented by one.

  In the following step S504, the values of the random number counter C1 updated in the random number update processing of the step S303, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 (the random number counter buffer Each stored value) is stored in the first area (a random number storage area, a win type random number storage area, and a reach random number storage area) of free storage areas of the special variation storage area. After step S504, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S505, a process of judging whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reserving area is a value corresponding to a large hit is performed. The details of the success / failure determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, the big hit based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation hold area. Perform type determination processing to determine the type of The details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the following step S507, if it is determined in step S505 that the value of the random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the big hit, the value is out based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation suspension area. A reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach at the time of fluctuation. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, the downward entry ball signal setting process in step S500-A will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the bottom entry ball signal setting process, first, in step S7101, a mode storage area to be described later is referred to, and whether or not the value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area, That is, it is determined whether or not it is in the high ball entry state (in the time reduction mode or the definite variation mode, and hereinafter, also referred to as the high support mode). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, that is, if it is in the high support mode, a second high ball pitch signal is set in step S7102, and a third high ball pitch signal in step S7103. Is set, and this processing ends.

  The second high entering ball signal is a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the second start winning device 33b in the high support mode, and the high entering third signal is in the high support mode. It is a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7101, that is, if the ball is in a low ball entry state (hereinafter, also referred to as a low support mode), a second low ball speed signal is input in step S7104. In step S7105, a low-sap third-time-enter ball signal is set, and the process ends.

  The low support second entering ball signal is a signal indicating that the gaming ball has entered the second starting winning device 33b in the low support mode, and the low support third entering ball is in the low support mode. It is a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b.

  Next, details of the success or failure determination process of step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation suspension area matches one of “7” and “307”, which is the value stored in the first validity determination table. Determine if By the way, "7" and "307" are values that become jackpots in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  Although the process of step S5101 is simplified and described in FIG. 14 for the sake of convenience, it is actually determined whether the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is "7" and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the yes / no random number counter C1 is "307", and if affirmed determination is made in either of these determinations, then affirmed determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made Also in the case where the negative determination is made, the negative determination is made in the step S5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the first success or failure flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is the value stored in the second pass / fail determination table. It is determined whether or not it is "316". By the way, "8 to 16, 308 to 316" is a value that is a jackpot only in the probability variation mode. Incidentally, also in the case of the determination processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the big hit actually coincide with each other as described above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the state is "off" even in the high probability state, the processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second success or failure flag is turned on in step S5104, and then the process ends. In the present embodiment, in addition to the success or failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success or failure random number counter C1, the first success or failure flag and the second success or failure flag are not separately provided. It is configured to store (overwrite) information as to whether or not to occur. That is, for convenience of explanation, the storage of the information that causes the big hit state in the yes / no random number storage area is referred to as setting the first yes / no flag and the second yes / no flag on.

  In addition to the success or failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success or failure random number counter C1, a success or failure flag is separately provided, and the value of the success or failure random number counter C1 is kept stored at this time. In the variation display setting process performed at the start, the corresponding table may be referred to based on the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, and the pass / fail may be determined.

  Next, the type determination process of step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second yes / no flag is set to ON in the yes / no determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a jackpot state will occur), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a big hit will occur), the type determination table is taken into consideration in step S5202, and the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is It is determined whether the value matches the value “0 to 9” corresponding to “15 RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the 15RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the type determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area corresponds to "2RS". , 11 ”to determine whether it matches. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5205, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5204, the 15RN flag is turned on in step S5206, and the process ends.

  Next, the second reach determination process of step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first success or failure flag is set in the success or failure determination process performed immediately before. If a positive determination is made in step S5401, that is, if a big hit occurs in both the low probability state and the high probability state (the big hit state always occurs), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if the big hit state does not occur at least in the low probability state (there is a possibility of becoming out of place), the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5402 and anew. It is determined whether or not the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the special variation reserving area matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "reach before and after". When an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5403, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of the front / rear outreach is turned on, and then the present process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, the front and back flags are not separately provided, and information indicating that the reach random number storage area is "back and forth out of reach". Is stored (overwritten). In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting of the reach random number storage area will be described as turning on the front / rear flag.

  On the other hand, if negative determination is made in step S5402, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5404 and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation reserving area corresponds to "reach other than out-of-front out" It is determined whether or not it matches one of the values "2 to 11". When an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, the flag is turned on in step S5405, and the present process ends.

  Further, in the case where the negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, in the case of “complete removal” in which the variable display ends without passing through the reach state, the present processing ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 following step S507, a setting process of the preceding command is performed. It should be noted that in the advance command, the fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the content of fluctuation display) which is stored pending is triggered by which of the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b enters. Together with information indicating whether or not to be included, and information indicating the result of the success / failure determination process, the type determination process, and the reach determination process is output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). .

  After the process of step S508, or when the negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S509, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the first start winning device 33a as the first start winning switch 224a. It discriminates by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S509, in step S500-B, a ball entry signal setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S510. Details of the upper entering time signal setting process will be described later.

  In step S510, it is determined whether the value of the first hold counter Na that counts the number of pending variable displays triggered by a winning on the first start winning device 33a is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). To determine If a negative determination is made in step S510, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511, in which the first hold counter Na and the hold total number counter Nx are incremented by one.

  In the following step S512, each value of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is displayed as a vacant holding area of the special variation hold area (a probability random number storage area, a winning type random number storage area, a reach random number storage area) Store in). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

  In step S513, a process of judging whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reserving area is a value corresponding to the big hit is performed. The details of the success or failure determination process have already been described above. That is, in the present embodiment, the acceptance determination process based on entering the first start winning device 33a and the acceptance determination process based on entering the second start winning device 33b are common, and hence, the same game In the case of the mode, the jackpot winning probability in the success or failure lottery is the same.

  In the following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, the big hit based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation hold area. A type determination process is performed to determine the type. The details of the type determination process have already been described above. That is, in the present embodiment, the type determination process based on entering the first start winning device 33a and the type determination process based on entering the second start winning device 33b are common, and thus, the first start If the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on entering the winning device 33a, and if the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on entering the second start winning device 33b, The distribution is the same.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the win / fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the big hit. A first reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach based on the value of the selection counter C3.

  Here, the upper entry ball signal setting process in step S500-B will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the upper entry ball signal setting process, first, at step S7201, the mode storage area is referred to, and whether the value of “12” or “21” is stored in the mode storage area, ie, It is determined whether or not the ball entry state is high (high support mode). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, that is, if it is in the high support mode, the first high-slow first entering ball signal is set in step S7202, and the high-sapering third entering ball signal in step S7203. Is set, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7201, that is, if it is in the low support mode, the low-sapporate first entering signal is set in step S7204, and the low-sapporate third entering in step S7205. The ball signal is set, and this processing is ended.

  The high landing first landing signal is a signal indicating that the gaming ball has entered the first starting winning device 33a in the high support mode, and the low landing first landing signal is in the low support mode. This is a signal indicating that the gaming ball has entered the first starting winning device 33a.

  In the present embodiment, the low Sap first entering ball signal and the high Sap first entering ball signal correspond to the first entering ball signal, and the low Sap second entering ball signal and the high supporting second enter ball signal Is equivalent to the second incoming ball signal, and the low-sap third-time embedded ball signal and the high-sap third-time incoming ball signal correspond to the third incoming-ball signal.

  In addition, the first input ball signal at low support time and the first input ball signal at high support are output from the first input ball signal terminal 2311, and the second input signal for low support and the second input signal at high support are output. Is output from the second input ball signal terminal 2312, and the low-sapthing third input ball signal and the high-sapthing third input ball signal are output from the third input ball signal terminal 2313.

  In addition, the low-sap first-in-first-in-field signal and the high-sapear-first-in-first-in ball signal are signals of different configurations (for example, different in pulse length and number of pulses) HC can distinguish and recognize both signals. Similarly, signals with different configurations are similarly applied to the low-sap second enter and high-sap second enter ball signals, and the low-sap third enter and high-sap third enter signals. The Hall computer HC can distinguish and recognize both signals.

  Next, the first reach determination process of step S515 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first success or failure flag is set in the success or failure determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a big hit occurs in both the low probability state and the high probability state (the big hit state always occurs), this processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the big hit state does not occur at least in the low probability state (there is a possibility that it will be out), the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5302 It is determined whether or not the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the special variation reserving area matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "reach before and after". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5303, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of the front / rear deviation reach is turned on, and then the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if negative determination is made in step S5302, the reach determination table is taken into consideration in step S5304, and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area corresponds to "reach other than out of order". It is determined whether or not it matches any one of the values "2 to 21". When an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the flag is turned on in step S5305, and the process ends.

  Further, in the case where the negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, in the case of “complete removal” in which the variable display ends without passing through the reach state, the present processing ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, after step S515, in step S516, the process of setting the preceding command is performed, and the present process ends. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the random number counter C1 etc. is directly stored in the special change reserve area, and then the judgment processing is performed. Although the type determination processing and the reach determination processing are executed, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, there is provided a temporary storage area (work area) for temporarily storing the counter values when the value etc. of the random number counter C1 is acquired, and regarding the information stored in the temporary memory area After the determination process and the reach determination process are performed, a configuration may be employed in which the corresponding special variation reserve area is stored in the reserve area.

  The process of extracting the value of the random number counter C1 in step S504 and step S512 constitutes the discrimination value extraction process, and the value of the random number counter C1 extracted in step S504 and step S512 is similarly stored in the special change suspension area. The process constitutes a discriminant value storage process. Further, the process of determining whether the value of the success or failure random number counter C1 in step S505 and step S513 (step S5101 and step S5103) constitutes a first success or failure determination process, and the determination result is The processing of step S5102 to store (setting the corresponding flag) and step S5104 constitute result storage processing.

  Next, the through gate passing process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, it is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225 whether the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 34 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through gate 34, the number of pending variable display performed in normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the present processing ends. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, passage of the gaming ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed, and the process proceeds to step S603 on condition that the value of the normal hold counter Nc <4 and the normal hold counter Increment Nc by one.

  Further, in the subsequent step S604, a random number related to the pass / fail is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of the step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal variation reserving area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passage processing is ended.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in backup area 503 a of RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SK1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and performs the NMI interrupt processing. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and the occurrence of power-off is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such an NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SK1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control under execution. Then, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of the main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon power-on reset.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power on is performed. Specifically, while setting a predetermined value to the stack pointer in advance and waiting for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, the RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed on the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply 313 is pressed (ON), and if pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 to clear (delete) the backup data. Do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process also proceeds to step S112 in this case. If occurrence information of power-off is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off That is, determine the effectiveness of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to step S112 in this case.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311, and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 etc.). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, at the time of opening of the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM (step S113 etc.). In addition, when the occurrence information of the power failure is not set, or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.), the process similarly shifts to the initialization process (step S113 etc.) of the RAM 503. That is, in step S113, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S114, an initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to the normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition that power generation interruption information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal are satisfied. Then, the processing at the time of power recovery (processing at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, the power-off occurrence information is cleared.

  In step S109, a command to return the control device on the sub side to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to the normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, the processes of steps S201 to S210 are executed as periodic processes of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processes of steps S211 and S212 are executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R, the start winning device 33, etc. updated in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each device, or output data such as a command is sub Execute external output processing to transmit to each control device.

  For example, at the time of variation display of a decoration symbol by the decoration symbol display device 42, a variation pattern command, a symbol command and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the display effect according to the display performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 having input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands. Is instructed to the display control device 45 so as to display (variation display) on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative symbol, such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, in the sub-control device 262, the relationship between the variation pattern command and the variation type of the decorative symbol is stored as a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the effect pattern and the like of the variable display based on the change pattern command, and controls the display control device 45 and the voice.

  Here, the variation type of the decorative symbol will be described.

  "Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special presentation is displayed except for the variation of the decorative symbol. In the definite change mode and the time shortening mode, the variable display time is shortened as compared with the normal mode even in the case of various reach. For example, the variable display time for which the normal reach is derived is “15 seconds” in the normal mode, and “10 seconds” in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode.

  In "Super reach", characters or the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol while the decorative symbol is variably displayed (after the reach state is established), thereby reaching the player's sense of expectation It is a pattern. In this embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as the super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach.

  "Premium reach" is an effect mode that can be derived only when a jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character or the like of a pattern different from the super reach Is displayed in a manner that indicates that the player is expecting the player. Two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when “2 RS” is won, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination of the chance symbol, but when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, the unique variation display (Chance fluctuation) is to be conducted. As an example of the chance variation, if the reach condition occurs, the variation is continued even after the timing when the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area if it is the reach before and after the reach or not reach before and after Finally, a variable display is performed in which “3”, “4”, and “1” are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas, together with effects.

  In addition, the variable display time which is "completely out" which is not in any reach state is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode, and "6 seconds" in the definite variation mode and the time shortening mode.

  Further, the sub control device 262 determines a stop symbol (a combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub controller 262 to determine the stop symbol, and a combination of probability variation big hit symbols, a combination of normal big hit symbols, a combination of chance symbols, a combination of back and forth symbols, a symbol other than back and forth It designates six categories of combination and combination of completely out of design. On the other hand, in the sub control device 262, the relationship between these commands and the stop symbol is stored in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 stops and displays the combination of the symbols corresponding to the symbol command.

  If you win a probability change jackpot ("15 RS", hereinafter also referred to as "probability with a probability change jackpot") that you can expect an increase in gaming balls, or a regular big hit that you can expect an increase in gaming balls ("15 RN". Below. In the decorative symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol with a number pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination of Zoro eyes. In the present embodiment, in the case of “with a certain probability variation big hit”, the probability variation big hit design or 2 which is a combination of 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9 odd-numbered zoroku decorative symbols The variable display is stopped by any combination of the normal jackpot design, which is a combination of decorative patterns consisting of even numbers of 4, 6, and 8 even numbers, and in the case of "with a jackpot normal jackpot" Usually, the fluctuation display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbols.

  Then, when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command of the certain occurrence variation ball hit, it determines one of the combinations of symbols consisting of any one of 1 to 9 as a stop symbol, and sets the variation ball. Yes When a jackpot symbol command is received, one of the 2, 4, 6, and 8 Zorozu symbol combinations is determined as a stop symbol.

  In addition, in the case of winning a probability change big hit (“2 RS”, hereinafter also referred to as “a drop with no probability change big hit”) which can not expect an increase in gaming balls, “3” · “ The combination of the 4 "and" 1 "chance symbols will be stopped and displayed. The combination of the chance symbol of this embodiment is one type.

  The combination of the front and back outset design corresponds to the “front and back out of reach reach” in which the final stop design is shifted by only one before and after the reach design after reach is generated. The combination of the symbols other than the front and back is corresponding to the "reach other than front and back out" in which the final stop symbol is stopped other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach is generated. The combination of the completely out of the pattern corresponds to the "complete out" where even the reach does not occur. In the present embodiment, when the combination of the front and back sides of the symbol, the combination of the front and back sides, and the combination of the front and back sides are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, the display is “off”.

  In addition, although mentioned later in detail, the sub control device 262 determines the combination of the symbols stored in the buffer for counters of the corresponding RAM 553 as a stop symbol when these off symbol commands are received. In the present embodiment, although three commands are prepared for the symbol command for detachment, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, there is only one type of symbol command for detachment, and the sub control device 262 The combination may be determined.

  Further, in the external output process of step S201, information for causing the gaming state to be grasped is externally output to the hall computer HC of the gaming hall, taking into consideration various information such as a mode storage area and a hit situation storage area described later. Furthermore, the output of error information and the like to the hall computer HC is also executed in this external output process. For example, when a winning error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hole computer HC of the game hall via the error signal terminal 2304 of the external terminal board 240, and when there is no winning error, An off signal is output.

  In addition, when various input signals such as the low support first determination signal or the various types of input ball signals such as the low support first input ball signal are set, these signals are subjected to external output processing (step At S201), the data is output to the hall computer HC. That is, the main controller 261 is a first definite signal output means, a second definite signal output means, a third definite signal output means, a first input ball signal output means, a second input ball signal output means, and The third ball entry signal output means is configured.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one and cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the upper limit (59 and 37 in this embodiment), as in the other counters. Do. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the following step S203, the winning ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a special display control process is performed. In this process, control relating to the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and determination of a jackpot and setting of variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of the special display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the variable winning device 32 is performed. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, a normal display control process is performed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of the normal display control process will be described later.

  In step S208, a start winning device control process is performed. In this process, control relating to the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) is performed. Details of the start winning device control process will be described later.

  After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if occurrence information of power-off is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has come, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. It is determined whether or not has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing, updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is performed within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It repeatedly executes (step S211, step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

  In step S212, the change type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum value (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the change values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of step S201-S209 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using such remaining time, and the fluctuation similarly The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is turned off. It will be. In the power failure process, the generation of each interrupt process is first inhibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is backed up in step S215. Remember to

  Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power is shut off is transmitted to another control device (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S217, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the RAM access is inhibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process can not be executed.

  In addition, the process of step S209 is at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the change in gaming state performed at steps S201 to S208 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main control device 261, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is small compared to the case where each processing is halfway And can be easily stored. In addition, when returning to the state before the power is shut off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before storing data (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off, and the state before the power shutoff can be reliably stored. .

  Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, a hit situation storage area to be described later is referred to, and it is determined whether it is a state other than the big hit state at present. In the "big hit state", the variable winning device 32 is an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L and 43R until the variable winning device 32 is opened. It includes a round period to be opened, an interval period when the variable winning device 32 is closed, and an ending period until the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R can be started after the final round. .

  In the hit situation storage area of the present embodiment, “0” is stored in a state other than the big hit state, and “1” in the opening period and the interval period in the big hit state, “2” in the round period, "3" is configured to be stored during the ending period. That is, in the step S801, it is determined whether "0" is stored in the hit situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in progress.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the jackpot state is in effect, the present process is ended as it is, while if a positive determination is made in step S801, a special image to be described in detail later will be displayed in step S802. It is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R (the decorative symbol display device 42) by checking the setting status of the flag. Specifically, it is considered that the variable display is in progress if the special view display flag is in the on state, and it is considered that the stop display in the variable display stop state is considered when the special view display flag is in the off state. . In addition, although the details will be described later, the flag during special image display is turned on when the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is started, and the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R It is turned off when the variable display is stopped.

  Then, if the negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if it is not in the jackpot state nor in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S803 to enter the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the value of the pending total counter Nx that counts the pending number of the total of the variable display to be triggered is larger than 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if no variable display is suspended, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S803, that is, if at least one variable display is on hold, in step S804, 1 is subtracted from the hold total number counter Nx.

  In the subsequent step S805, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the special variation reserved area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first area to the pending eighth area of the special variation pending area to the execution area side, ie, pending first area → execution area, pending second Data in each area is shifted in such a manner as area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area, and so on. After step S805, in step S806, it is determined whether the first change flag of the execution area is set to on.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S806, that is, when it is data corresponding to the first variable display based on entering the ball to the first start winning device 33a, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S807. Do. In the subsequent step S808, the variation identification lamp 40 is caused to emit blue light. Thereafter, in step S809, after performing the variable display setting process described later in detail, the present process is ended.

  Further, in the case of a negative determination in step S806, that is, in the case of data corresponding to the second variable display based on entering the ball to the second start winning device 33b, in step S810 Subtract. In the subsequent step S811, the variation identification lamp 40 is caused to emit light in red. Thereafter, in step S809, after performing the variable display setting process described later in detail, the present process is ended.

  Here, the details of the variable display setting process of step S 807 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, a mode storage area, which will be described later, is referred to in detail, and it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (probability variation mode). Discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored in the mode storage area. In the present embodiment, one of the values “11”, “12”, and “21” is stored in the mode storage area, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12” is the time reduction mode. "21" corresponds to the positive variation mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state by determining whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if it is in a high probability state (probability change mode), in step S902, the first or second random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into account. It is determined whether or not one of the pass / fail flags (see the pass / fail determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If a positive determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in a high probability state in a high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If the negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the low probability state (normal mode, time shortening mode), in step S903, the first random flag is turned on by referring to the random number storage area Determine if it is not. If a positive determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, the jackpot determination flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been determined is set on. In the present embodiment, storing the value corresponding to the determination of the occurrence of the big hit state in the pass / fail random number storage area is referred to as setting the big hit determination flag ON.

  In the following step S905, it is determined whether the 15RS flag (see the type determination process in FIG. 15) is set to ON, taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserve area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, that is, if it is "15 RS", 15 RS pattern setting processing (processing for setting a variation pattern command and a symbol command) is performed in step S906. The 15 RS pattern setting process is a process for executing variable display for teaching the generation of “15 RS”, and special processing is performed based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. The variation patterns (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern, and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are prescribed in advance by a table or the like. After step S906, the process proceeds to step S915 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S905, it is determined in step S907 whether the 2RS flag is set to on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S907, a 2RS pattern setting process is performed in step S908. After step S908, the process proceeds to step S915.

  If the negative determination is made in step S 907, the 15 RN pattern setting process is performed in step S 909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S915.

  Further, when the negative determination is made in step S902 or step S903, that is, when the jackpot is not won, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserving area is taken into consideration in step S910, 16. It is determined whether or not the reach determination process of FIG. 17 is ON. When an affirmative determination is made in step S910, that is, in the case of "reach before and after out of reach", after performing the front and rear reach pattern setting processing in step S911, the process proceeds to step S915.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S910, in step S912, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserving area is referred to, and it is determined whether the flag other than the front or back is on. If the affirmative determination is made in step S912, that is, if it is the "reach other than back and forth deviation", reach pattern setting processing other than back and forth is performed in step S913, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if it is "complete removal", out-of-variation pattern setting processing is performed in step S914, and then the process proceeds to step S915.

  In step S 915, a special-pattern-display-in-progress flag indicating whether or not variable display is being performed on special display devices 43 L and 43 R is set to on. This indicates that the conditions for performing the switching display (variation display) on the special display devices 43L and 43R are satisfied. In the subsequent step S916, setting processing of a special view display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L, 43R is performed. The special view display timer is referred to when it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

  The fluctuation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in the present embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. When a control signal to start switching display (variation display) is output to special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output process of the next normal process based on the setting of such a special view display timer. Switching display (variation display) is started on the special display devices 43L and 43R. In addition, the sub-control device 262 that receives the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command simultaneously with the start of variation of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the special display device Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols based on the symbol command. After the end of step S916, the variable display setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the random number counter C1 of the steps S504 and S512 and storing the value in the special change suspension area, the process of judging the steps S505 and 513, and the variable display setting In the process, the process of step S901 to step S903 and the like which determine the propriety on the basis of the propriety flag and the situation at that time constitute a chance lottery. Further, the second equivalence determination process is configured by the processes of steps S901 to S903, and the variable display setting process is configured by the processes of steps S906, S908, S909, S911, S913, and S914.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, if the determination in step S802 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S812, and the special view display timer subtraction process is performed. Every time this process is performed, the value of the special view display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set to the special view display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and the value of the special view display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction is taken into consideration to determine whether a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special view display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S813.

  If a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and the present process ends. Incidentally, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal to the effect that switching display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R. As a result, switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the flag for displaying the special view is turned off in step S814, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step S815. Based on the setting content of the stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R. That is, the stop display is performed in the stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type, out-of-order, and the like. Further, a control signal to the effect that stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed is also output to the sub control device 262. Thereby, the synchronization of the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 can be reliably achieved. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub control device 262 by the symbol command and the change pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 again There is no need to add Moreover, although it becomes repetition, it is a display which mainly uses the stop display by such special display devices 43L and 43R, and the display of the decoration symbol by the decoration symbol display device 42 becomes an auxiliary thing (for effect) to the last There is.

  Subsequently, in step S800-A, a determination signal setting process for setting various determination signals is performed, and the process proceeds to step S816. Here, the determination signal setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the determination signal setting process, first, in step S7401, it is determined whether the first change flag of the execution area is on. That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display has been started by the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a. If the first variation flag is on (step S7401: YES), that is, if it is the timing when the variation display by entering the gaming ball to the first start winning device 33a is determined, the process proceeds to step S7402, the mode Referring to the storage area, it is determined whether or not the value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is a high ball entry state (high support mode). . If the high support mode is selected (step S7402: YES), a high support first determination signal is set in step S7403. The high support first determination signal is a signal indicating that, in the high support mode, the fluctuation display by entering the gaming ball to the first starting winning device 33a is determined.

  Further, in the following step S7404, a high support third determination signal is set, and the process ends. The high support third time finalization signal is a signal indicating that, in the high support mode, the variable display by entering the gaming ball to the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b is determined.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S7402 (in the case of the low support mode), the low support first determination signal is set in step S7405, and the low support third determination signal is set in step S7406. And the process ends. The low support first determination signal is a signal indicating that the variation display by entering the gaming ball to the first start winning device 33a is determined in the low support mode, and the low support third determination signal is low. In the support mode, it is a signal indicating that the variation display by entering the gaming ball to the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b is determined.

  Further, if the negative determination is made in step S7401, that is, if it is the timing when the variation display by entering the gaming ball to the second start winning device 33b is determined, the process proceeds to step S7408 and the mode storage area It is determined whether or not the value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area with reference to the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is in the high ball-in state (high support mode). If it is the high support mode (step S7408: YES), a high support second determination signal is set in step S7409. The high support second time final determination signal is a signal indicating that the variation display by entering the gaming ball to the second start winning device 33b is determined in the high support mode. After step S7409, in step S7404 a high support third time finalization signal is set, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is in the low support mode (step S7408: NO), the low support time second determination signal is set in step S7410. The low support second time final determination signal is a signal indicating that the variation display by entering the gaming ball to the second start winning device 33b is determined in the low support mode. After step S7410, in step S7406, a low support time third determination signal is set, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, the low support first determination signal and the high support first determination signal correspond to the first determination signal, and the low support second determination signal and the high support second determination signal are the second determination. It corresponds to a signal, and the low support third determination signal and the high support third determination signal correspond to a third determination signal. Further, the low support second determination signal corresponds to the low entry second determination signal, and the high support second determination signal corresponds to the high entry second determination signal.

  Incidentally, the low-sap first determination signal and the high-sap- ple first determination signal are output from the first determination signal terminal 2308, and the low-sap second determination signal and the high-sap second determination signal are output as the second The low-supplement third decision signal and the high-supplement third decision signal output from the decision signal terminal 2309 are output from the third decision signal output terminal 2310.

  In addition, the low support first determination signal and the high support first determination signal are signals of different configurations (for example, different in pulse length and number of pulses), and the Hall computer HC distinguishes and recognizes both signals. It can be done. In addition, the low-sap second determination signal and the high-sap second determination signal, and the low-sap third determination signal and the high-sap third determination signal are similarly configured as different signals, The hall computer HC can distinguish and recognize both signals.

  Returning to FIG. 19, following the determination signal setting process (step S800-A), in step S816, after performing the process of determining the initial setting of the hit state and the time reduction mode period, the present process is ended. Do. Here, the determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, the success or failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserve area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the big hit determination flag is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, in step S1002, the win type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether the 2RS flag is set to ON.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1002, that is, if it is a "15 RS" or "15 RN" jackpot, then in step S1003, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 has been opened) Set “15” to the round number counter for discrimination.

  In the subsequent step S1004, "1" is set to the hit situation storage area. Further, in step S1005, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds, for example, is set for the special variable timer used for control in the hit state (opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32). Subsequently, in step S1006, "8" indicating the maximum number of ball entry per round is set to "8" to the prize counter for counting the number of gaming balls entered in the variable prize device 32. . In addition, the value of the winning counter is determined based on the detection information of the count switch 223 when the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process is performed, to the variable winning apparatus 32. It is decremented by 1 when it is determined that there was a ball entry.

  Then, in step S1007, an opening command for notifying the sub controller 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes information of the hit type and the like, and the sub controller 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the hit state. After step S1007, the present process ends.

  In addition, effects such as promotion of promotion of appearance of big hit type in big hit state (for example, when even Zoro eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, it teaches that "15 RS" was won in the big hit state immediately after Alternatively, when an odd number of eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, it may be taught that "15 RS" has been won during the jackpot state immediately after that.

  Further, if the determination in step S1002 is affirmative, in step S1008, "2" is set in the round number counter. After step S1008, in step S1009, "1" is set for the hit situation storage area. In the following step S1010, a value "500" corresponding to, for example, an opening period of 2 seconds is set to the special variable timer, and in step S1011, "8" is set to the winning counter. Set the command. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1013 whether "12" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is a time shortening mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1013, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1013, in step S1014, the value of the fluctuation number counter is decremented by 1 to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. Although described later in detail, in the present embodiment, at the end of the “15 RN” jackpot state, the number of times (for example, 100) of the variable display corresponding to the period of the time shortening mode is set to the fluctuation number counter. Each time variable display of the devices 43L and 43R (the decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in the step S1014.

  In the following step S1015, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0". If the negative determination is made in step S1015, that is, the variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of time shortening mode is still performed If not, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S1015 is affirmative, in step S1016, "11" is set in the mode storage area to indicate that the mode is the normal mode. That is, when the variable display is performed a specified number of times in the special display devices 43L and 43R, the time reduction mode ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After the step S1016, in the step S1017, the time short end command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode is set, and then the present process is ended.

  Next, variable winning device control processing for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is other than the jackpot state by determining whether the value set in the hit situation storage area is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if it is not in the jackpot state, the present processing ends. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, “1” is set in the hit situation storage area in the above-described determination information setting process.

  On the other hand, if the negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot state is in progress (if any of “1” to “3” is set in the hit situation storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. , Subtract 1 from the value of the special variable timer. Incidentally, at the start of the jackpot state, "2000" or "500" is set to the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

  In the following step S1203, it is determined whether the value of the special variable timer is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1204 whether "1" is set in the hit situation storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S 1204, “2” is set in the hit situation storage area in step S 1205. In the following step S1206, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot jackpot. Here, it is determined whether or not it is “15 RS” or “15 RN” (whether or not it is other than “2 RS”) which is a jackpot having jackpot.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, in step S1207, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set to the special variable timer. On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in step S1206, in step S1208, a value "100" corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the variable winning device 32 is set for the special variable timer. Do.

  After step S1207 or step S1208, in step S1209, the variable winning device 32 is opened, and in step S1210, a round command is transmitted to the sub control device 262 to convey information to start the round. Set Thereafter, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1211 whether "3" is set in the hit situation storage area. Although details will be described later, when all the rounds in the jackpot state end and the ending period starts, "3" is set for the hit situation storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1212.

  In the following step S1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1214 and "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. Thereafter, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot jackpot.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1215, in step S1216, a value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set to the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1215, in step S1217, a value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set to the special variable timer.

  After step S1216 or step S1217, "8" is set to the winning counter in step S1218. Further, in step S 1219, processing is performed to close the variable winning device 32, and in step S 1220, an interval command is transmitted to inform the sub control device 262 that the interval is to be started. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If the negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the time (open time or closed time) for maintaining the open or closed state of the variable winning device 32 remains, the process proceeds to step S1221 and variable It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the winning device 32 is “0”. In the winning counter, “8” which is the upper limit (prescribed number) of the number of winnings per round is set at the start of the jackpot state and the start of the interval. Then, each time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32, one is subtracted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1221, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1221, that is, if the end trigger of the round has come without waiting for the round setting period to elapse, the process proceeds to step S1212. As a result, when eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round is immediately ended at that time even if the open period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  In addition, if the positive determination is made in step S1213, that is, if all the rounds in the jackpot state are digested, the process proceeds to step S1222, and "3" is set for the hit situation storage area. After step S1222, in step S1223, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot jackpot. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1223, in step S1224, a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set to the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1223, in step S1225, a value "250" corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set to the special variable timer.

  After step S1224, or step S1225, "7" is set to the winning counter in step S1226. When the process of setting the ending after step S1222 is performed in the flow after the positive determination in step S1221, the value of the winning counter is “0”. Then, if the value of the winning counter is set to “0” as it is at the start of the ending period, the variable winning device control process after 4 msec suddenly becomes positively determined in step S1221, and the ending period can not be completed. Therefore, the ending period is completed by inserting a temporary numerical value ("7" in this example) other than "0" into the winning counter in step S1226. Of course, it may be configured to complete the ending period in another way.

  After step S1226, in step S1227, processing is made to close the variable winning device 32, and in the subsequent step S1228, an ending command is sent to convey information to the effect that the ending is to be started to the sub control device 262. Thereafter, the process ends.

  Further, if the determination in step S1211 is affirmative, that is, if the ending period is over and the time to end the jackpot state has come, the process proceeds to step S1229 to perform an end setting process. In the end setting process, setting of the mode storage area and setting of the fluctuation number counter are performed.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is referred to, and it is determined whether the 15 RN flag is set to ON.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, a value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area. As a result, the time reduction mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state.

  In the following step S1403, "100" is set to the fluctuation number counter. Note that with the fluctuation count counter, when “12” is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started, the fluctuation display for the specified number of times set as the time reduction mode period is completed. To understand what happened. After step S1403, in step S1404, a time short start command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the start of the time reduction mode is set. Thereafter, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1405. As a result, the positive variation mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state. After step S1405, in step S1406, the win type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation reserving area is referred to, and it is determined whether the 15RS flag is set to ON.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, in step S1407, a positive change start command for notifying the start of the positive change mode to the sub control device 262 is set. Thereafter, the process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, in step S1408, a special start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the start of the special probability variation mode which is a kind of probability variation mode. Thereafter, the process ends.

  In the special probability variation mode, each value such as winning probability of success lottery, distribution ratio of jackpot type, reach incidence rate, winning probability of entering ball support lottery, etc. is the same as probability variation mode, and the sub control device 262 The effect contents (such as the proportion of the effect pattern to be selected) selected and determined on the side change only partially, and on the main control device 261 side, there is no distinction of the special probability change mode (simply treated as a probability change mode). In addition, with regard to the processing after step S1405, referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area, whether the 15RS flag is set ON, and the winning type of the execution area of the special variation holding area A reference may be made to the random number storage area to determine whether or not the 2RS flag is set to ON, and a predetermined error process may be executed if a negative determination is made.

  Referring back to FIG. 22, after the end setting process of step S1229, “0” is set in step S1230 to indicate that the state of the hit is not the big hit state storage area. Thereafter, in step S1231, a hit end command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 to convey information indicating that the jackpot state is to be ended, and then the present process is ended. The hit end command includes the number information and the like of the fluctuation number counter set in the end setting process.

  Next, the normal display control process of step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the flag in the common view display, which indicates whether the variable display is being performed by the normal symbol display device 41, is on. In addition, when the flag in the common drawing display is on, it is considered that the variable display is in progress in the normal symbol display device 41.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0 or not. At this time, when the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the present process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if no variable display of normal symbols is held, the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2103.

  In the following step S2104, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the normal variation suspension area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas reserved in the normal change suspension area to the execution area side, and the first area reserved → the execution area, the second area reserved → The data in each area is shifted in such a way as the first holding area, the third holding area, the second holding area, the fourth holding area, and the third holding area.

  After that, in step S2105, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display device 41 is set, and the common drawing fluctuation setting processing for starting is executed.

  Here, the common drawing fluctuation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S 2301, a common-diagram displaying flag indicating that variation display of an ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display device 41 is being set is turned on. In the following step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether "0" is stored, that is, whether it is a state other than the jackpot state at present. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if it is not in the jackpot state, in step S2303, it is determined whether or not the value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area, ie, high. It is determined whether or not the ball is in the ball entering state (time shortening mode or definite variation mode).

  If the affirmative determination is made in step S 2303, the variation display time of the normal symbol is displayed for the common view display timer that measures the variation time (remaining time) of the variation display performed in the normal symbol display device 41 in step S 2304 Set "465" to make it 1.86 seconds.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal variation reserving area is "0". In the high entry state, the winning is performed when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of "0 to 232" is "1 to 232".

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the player wins the entry support lottery whether or not the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state, in step S2306, the member has won the entry support lottery Set the ball entry support flag on to indicate that. After step S2306, in step S2307, an open confirmation command is set as the open schedule information informing the sub control device 262 that it has been decided to open the second start winning device 33b. Thereafter, the process ends.

  In addition, if the negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, if it is in the jackpot state or low ball entry state, in step S2308, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol for the common figure display timer Set "465" to make 1.86 seconds. Furthermore, in step S2309, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal change suspension area is "1 to 15". In the low pitch state, the winning is achieved when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of "0 to 232" is "1 to 15".

  If a negative determination is made in step S2309, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2309, that is, if a winning support lottery is won, then in step S2306, a entering support flag indicating that the winning support lottery is won is set to ON, and step S2307 After the release confirmation command is set in step 3, the present process ends. In addition, about the variation display time of the normal symbol, the winning probability in the entry support lottery, etc., it is possible to set appropriately for each model of the pachinko machine, for example, the winning probability of the entry support lottery in high ball entry status Also, it may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the low ball entry state.

  Referring back to FIG. 24, after step S2105, the present process ends. It should be noted that, when the control signal indicating that the variable display is to be started is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing of the next normal processing based on the setting in the common drawing variation setting processing, the normal symbol display device At 41, the variable display is started. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "o" or "x" as an ordinary symbol, and if "o" is displayed, "x" or "x" If it is, the display is switched (varied) to "o"

  If YES at step S2101, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying variable, the process proceeds to step S2106, and processing for subtracting a common view display timer is performed. Every time this process is performed once, the count value of the common view display timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the processing proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether the count value of the common view display timer is “0”, that is, whether the fluctuation time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the common drawing display flag is turned off in step S2108, and the common drawing stop display setting for performing the stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the common view stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal indicating that the stop display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is output. That is, in the case of winning (when the ball support flag is set to ON), the symbol "○" (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lighted for only a few seconds) and when it is out, "x" Stop display the symbol.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, the common drawing determination information setting process is performed, and the process ends. Here, the common drawing determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether the ball entry support flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second startup winning device 33b is in the open state is set on.

  In the following step S2403, it is determined whether or not one of "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the ball is in a high ball entry state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S 2403, the open time of the second start winning device 33 b is 5 for the ordinary variable timer for measuring the open time (remaining time) of the second start winning device 33 b in step S 2404. Set "1450" to make it 8 seconds.

  Furthermore, in step S2405, "3" is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times, with respect to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (the remaining number of times) the second start winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, in step S2408, the entry support flag is turned off, and in step S2409, the flag is turned on during the support period. Further, in step S2410, setting is made to open the second start winning device 33b.

  In the subsequent step S 2411, a support period start command is set to notify the sub control device 262 that it is a period in which the second start winning device 33 b is in the open state. Further, in step S 2412, a blade open command is set to notify the sub control device 262 that the timing for opening the second start winning device 33 b has arrived. Thereafter, the process ends.

  Also, in the case of a negative determination in step S 2403, that is, in the case of a low ball entry state, in step S 2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is 5.7 seconds with respect to the ordinary variable timer. Set "1425". In the subsequent step S2407, "1" is set in the opening number counter so as to open the second starting winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball support flag is turned off, in step S2409 the flag is turned on during the support period, and in step S2410, setting is made to open the second start winning device 33b, step S2411 The support period start command is set in step S2412, and the blade release command is set in step S2412. Then, the process ends.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 24, when a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is performed. finish. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal to the effect that switching display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is output. Specifically, if the current lighting is "o", the display is switched to "x", and when it is "x", the display is switched to "o". Thereby, the switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control processing, that is, every 4 ms.

  Next, the start-up winning device control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the flag is on during the support period. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the value of the ordinary variable timer is decremented by 1 in step S2202. In the following step S2203, it is determined whether the normal variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the second start-up winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether the value of the ordinary variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b defined in advance has not yet elapsed, the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205, and a blade closing command is set to notify the sub control device 262 that the timing for closing the second start winning device 33b has arrived. . Thereafter, in step S2206, the normal variable flag is turned off. In the following step S2207, the value of the opening number counter is decremented by 1, and in step S2208, setting is made to close the second starting winning device 33b.

  Thereafter, in step S2209, it is determined whether or not the value of the release number counter is "0". If the determination in step S2209 is affirmative, in step S2210, the flag is turned off during the support period. Further, in step S2211, a support period end command is set to notify the sub control device 262 that the period for opening the second start winning device 33b has ended. Thereafter, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2209, that is, the winning entry support lottery is performed in the probability change mode or the time shortening mode, and the second start winning device 33b is opened three times based thereon If there is the remaining number of times, a value (for example, "250") corresponding to the interval time is set to the normally variable timer in step S2212. After step S2212, this process ends.

  In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, in the interval period during which the second start winning device 33b is opened three times (the second start winning device 33b is in the closed state), the process proceeds to step S2213. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2213, that is, if the interval period has not elapsed yet, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2213, the ordinary variable flag is turned on in step S2214, and a value corresponding to the opening time for the ordinary variable timer in step S2215 (in this example, high entering state; "1450", in the low ball entry state; "1425") is set, and in step S2216, setting is made to open the second start winning device 33b. Thereafter, in step S2217, a blade open command is set, and the process ends.

  When the second start winning device 33b is in the open state and the game ball enters a prescribed number (for example, one) into the second start winning device 33b, the second start winning device 33b May be immediately closed (for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the second start winning switch 224b has been detected, and a positive determination is made. In this case, it may be configured to shift to step S2205).

  Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first, the reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily put on standby, and a reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, in step S3001, the command transmitted from main controller 261 is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513, and in step S3002 to store that the command has been transmitted from main controller 261. The command reception flag is turned on to complete the present reception interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer for storing the next received command in the next storage area Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed in the interrupt process which is executed when the command is received. For example, as shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, whether or not the command is received is confirmed, and if the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and transition to command determination processing may be made if a command is not received. In such a case, by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals, it is confirmed whether or not the command has been received.

  Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon reset upon power-on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process is performed in response to power on. Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value determined in advance, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and the external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Then, if the occurrence information of the power-off is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the power-off It is determined whether or not the backup is effective. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 513. In addition, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup depending on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 is correctly stored.

  When the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106 or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process for initializing the RAM 513 is performed after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, an initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit an interrupt.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and that the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing upon power recovery (power failure recovery) Process). That is, the stack pointer before power-off is restored in step S3109, the power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and the payout permission flag for permitting payout of the prize ball is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, CPU peripheral devices are initialized. In step S3113, the use register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether or not occurrence information of power-off is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power is shut off, so that the processes after step S3123 are performed as the power failure process at the time of the power-off. In the power failure process, the generation of each interrupt process is first inhibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to backup area 513a. In step S3128, the RAM access is inhibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process can not be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 513.

  Since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the completion of the process performed at the time of power-on, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is compared with the case where each process is in progress. Less and easier to remember. In addition, when returning to the state before the power is shut off, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, so it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is periodically (in this embodiment, 2 msec cycle) activated.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in the reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28) described above is received.

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main control device 261, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of step S3302 to step S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether it is a payout return command or not, and in step S3306, it is a prize ball command Whether or not it is determined.

  If the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether the payout permission flag has already been turned on, and if the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of the winning balls is set.

  As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized coincide with each other. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the timing of initialization being shifted, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command can not be performed, etc. Can prevent the occurrence of negative effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of the winning balls can be set reliably.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3307 that the payout permission flag has been turned on, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized in the state where the payout permission flag is set. The payout initialization command is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout permission flag is not turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognizes it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the clearing of the work area of the RAM 513 (step S3308) and the setting of the initial value of the RAM 513 (step S3309) are executed while the payout permission flag is on, the payout ball will not be paid out if it remains, etc. Although a bad effect is caused to give a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent giving a loss to the player.

  In addition, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutoff. In order to permit payout of the winning balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of power failure and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power failure, the payout of the winning balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer corresponds to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. It will be updated.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. In order to permit the payout of the winning balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in the predetermined buffer area. And memorize. Since the payout of the winning balls corresponding to the number of winning balls is performed based on the winning ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the winning ball command is a payout instructing command instructing the payout of the winning balls. . Further, when the award ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the award balls can be paid out earlier than the winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer corresponds to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. It will be updated.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is neither a payout initialization command (NO at step S3304) nor a payout return command (NO at step S3305), and if it is not a winning ball command (NO at step S3306), The command determination processing is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing ends. That is, it is possible to prevent the payout of the prize ball from being performed before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, and the state recovery switch 321 is checked in step S3204 and the state recovery operation start is determined. Execute recovery operation. By this processing, for example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs such as ball clogging of the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse to resolve the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S3205, the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full tray condition of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the full detection switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full condition is set, and when the lower tray is full, the lower Execute the setting of the release state. Also, in step S3206, the setting of the tank ball absent state (ball out state) or the tank sphere absent state (ball present state) is executed according to the change of the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball absence state is determined by the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, the tank sphere absence state is made special, the setting of the tank sphere absence state is executed, and the tank ball absence state is absent, the tank sphere no release state Execute the setting.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, for example, it is determined whether there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, notification is made.

  Subsequently, a payout control process of winning balls and rental balls is executed. In more detail, in step S3208, the payout number setting process is performed, in step S3209, a motor control state acquisition process is performed, and in step S3210, a motor drive process is performed.

  In step S3211, the state recovery switch 321 is checked, and the payout motor is driven to execute the ball removal processing on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started. In the subsequent step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

  Next, normal processing of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is configured of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when the command is stored in all the storage areas, it is stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the storage and the reading of the command are performed based on the respective pointers.

  In the following step S3903, a hold information storage process of storing the information of the prior command output from the main control device 261 in the hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 is performed. Note that, as described above, the first command is information indicating which of the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b is the variable display triggered by entering the ball, and the variation information corresponding to the big hit as described above. It includes information indicating presence or absence, information indicating a jackpot type, and information indicating a reach type.

  Similar to the special variation hold area of the main control unit 261, the hold information storage area of the sub control unit 262 includes eight hold areas (first hold to eighth hold areas) and one execution area. In the pending information storage area, according to the reception history of the advance command, the information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type, the first change display or the second change display Information (variation information) relating to variation indication such as presence information is stored in time series. As a result, not only the execution area of the special variation reserving area of the main control device 261 but also the variation information stored in the reserving area can be grasped by the sub control device 262.

  The on-hold information storage process will be described below with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether a preceding command has been received (whether the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4101, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S4101 is affirmative, in step S4102, the fluctuation suspension counter Nd for counting the number of suspension of fluctuation information stored in the suspension information storage area is incremented by one. Furthermore, in step S4103, information as to whether or not the jackpot included in the advance command, jackpot type, reach type, information as to which of the first variation display or the second variation display is supported, etc. Store in the first area among the reserved areas of

  In the following step S4104, advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where the effect display related to each other is intentionally derived in a plurality of continuous variable displays (a so-called "continuous notice" is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to give the continuous notice, and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of the continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the hold information storage area. Among them, the change information is stored in the hold area newly stored in step S4103.

  The continuous announcement counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 49, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 49). The continuous advance notice counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the continuous advance notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous advance notice counter buffer).

  The notice type counter is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 9 and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9). The notice type counter is periodically updated, and each time, the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

  Then, when fluctuation information is stored in the hold information storage area in the notice information storage processing, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Furthermore, in each of the holding area and the execution area of the holding information storage area, a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous notice is derived is provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success / failure determination table, which is referred to when deciding whether to give a continuous notice, and a notice table, which is considered when deciding the form of the continuous notice. A plurality of notice success judgment tables and notice tables are provided, and the notice success judgment table and notice table to be referred are selected according to the fluctuation information.

  After step S4104, in step S4105, it is determined whether the information newly stored in the reserve area corresponds to the first variable display. If the determination in step S4105 is affirmative, in step S4106, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the extinguished state is turned on. The first holding lamp 46 a of the present embodiment emits blue light.

  On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in step S4105, in step S4107, one of the second holding lamps 46b in the extinguished state is turned on. The second holding lamp 46b of the present embodiment emits red light.

  After step S4106 or step S4107, in step S4108, a continuous notice lottery process is performed to determine whether to execute the continuous notice. In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4108, when the value of the change hold counter Nd is "2" or more, the jackpot type or reach based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the hold information storage area. With reference to the notice success / failure determination table respectively corresponding to the type and the game mode, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous notice. Furthermore, when it is decided to execute consecutive notices, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type and game mode is referred to based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the hold information storage area. And decide whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice. In addition, among the pending areas of the pending information storage area, the continuous advance notice flag of all the pending areas in which the variation information is stored is turned on. However, the continuous advance flag of the execution area is not turned on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after step S4108, in step S4109, a pending icon setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed. After step S4109, the process ends.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), the hold icon 461 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 as the ball entry detection corresponding display means is an image object imitating a "float". ing. In the hold display area 462, up to eight hold icons 461 can be displayed. Furthermore, in the hold icon 461 of the present embodiment, the “main hold icon 463” as the ball entry detection-capable display indicating that the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is held, and the main hold icon 463 are displayed. “Provisional hold icon 464” as a precursor display that may be displayed as a previous step.

  As the pattern of the form of the main reserve icon 463, the one in which the stripe pattern of the floating ring is blue, the one in which the stripe pattern of the floating ring is red, and the character A using the floating ring (FIG. 43 (b) There is a display in which 463 a) “reference” is displayed and a display in which “character B using floating ring (refer to 463 b in FIG. 43 (c))” is displayed. On the other hand, the temporary holding icon 464 is an image object that looks like a blurred (thinned) “float” that is a basic aspect of the main holding icon 463. The character A and the character B may be of one type or plural types.

  In addition, as a display pattern of the hold icon 461, a pattern in which the main hold icon 463 is displayed suddenly and a temporary hold icon 464 is displayed, and then the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed so as to change from the temporary hold icon 464. There is a pattern to be performed (the pattern is also referred to as “precedent”). Furthermore, as described later, the display pattern of the hold icon 461 is associated with the expectation of winning to the jackpot occurrence (the degree of jackpot expectation), and the display pattern of the hold icon 461 suggests the jackpot expectation ( It is configured to perform pre-reading hold notice effect).

  Here, the pending icon setting process performed in step S4109 of the pending information storage process (see FIG. 35) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4301, the value of the icon lottery random number counter used when determining the display pattern of the hold icon 461 is acquired and stored in the hold icon information storage area of the corresponding hold area among the hold information storage areas. Note that the icon lottery random number counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 199). . The icon lottery random number counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the icon lottery random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. In step S4301, the value of the icon lottery random number counter is acquired from the counter buffer.

  In step S4302, the pending icon pattern storage table storing the correspondence between the value of the icon lottery random number counter and the display pattern of the pending icon 461 is referred to, and the icon lottery random number counter stored in the pending icon information storage area Based on the value, the display pattern of the hold icon 461 is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 39, a plurality of pending icon pattern storage tables are provided. In the present embodiment, the one for the jackpot that is referred to corresponding to the fluctuation information that teaches the jackpot, the one for back and forth joined to correspond to the fluctuation information that becomes the back and forth reach, and the reach other than the back and forth deviation There are two types, one for outliers before and after being taken into consideration in response to the fluctuation information, and one for others (completely out).

  For the jackpot icon storage table for the jackpot, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “0 to 59”, it corresponds to “a blue stripe pattern float ring (changed from the temporary hold icon 464)”. If the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "60 to 139", the symbol corresponds to "the red stripe pattern float ring via precursor", and if the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "140 to 158" Of the icon lottery random number counter is “59”, and the icon lottery random number counter corresponds to “character A”, and the icon lottery random number counter is “160 to 179”. It corresponds to the blue stripe pattern without ring, and the icon lottery random number counter value is “180 to 199”, corresponding to “red stripe without ring”.

  With regard to the hold icon pattern storage table for the front and back sides, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “0 to 59”, the value of the icon lottery random number counter corresponds to “corresponding to the blue stripe pattern floating ring via precursor”. In the case of "60 to 99", the icon lottery corresponds to the "red stripe pattern via the precursor", and when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "100 to 104", the symbol lottery corresponds to the "character via the precursor". When the value of the random number counter is "105 to 184", it corresponds to "the blue stripe pattern float ring without passing through precursor", and when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is "185 to 199" "red without passing through precursor" It corresponds to "striped floats".

  With regard to the hold icon pattern storage table for off-front and back, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “0 to 59”, the value of the icon lottery random number counter corresponds to “the blue stripe pattern passing ring through the precursor”. "60-89" corresponds to "red stripe pattern float ring via precursor sign", and the icon lottery random number counter value is "90 to 189" "blue stripe pattern float ring without precursor sign" In the case where the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “190 to 199”, it corresponds to “the red-striped floating ring without passing a sign”.

  As for the reserved icon pattern storage table for other than that, when the value of the icon lottery random number counter is “0 to 19”, the value of the icon lottery random number counter corresponds to “corresponding to the floating ring of blue stripe pattern via precursor”. In the case of "20 to 199", it corresponds to "a blue striped floating ring without passing a sign".

  In other words, red stripes are more likely to have a higher expectation for hitting than blue stripes, and red stripes are more likely to pass through precursors, and characters that have higher expectations for jackpots after passing precursors A or character B may be derived. In particular, when the character B is displayed, it can be grasped that the jackpot state will occur after the end of the corresponding variable display at that time.

  Then, in step S4302, the fluctuation pattern of the corresponding fluctuation display is determined based on various information stored in the hold area of the hold information storage area, and the hold icon pattern storage table to be referred to is determined according to the fluctuation pattern. Do. Furthermore, it is determined whether the value of the icon lottery random number counter is a value corresponding to the display pattern of which hold icon 461 and information indicating the display pattern of the hold icon 461 determined to correspond is the corresponding hold area Is stored in the hold icon information storage area (the display pattern of the hold icon 461 is determined).

  If it is determined in step S4302 that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to a jackpot, the display pattern of the hold icon 461 in which the character B is displayed in the hold area of the hold information storage area and the hold icon information storage area of the execution area. Check whether or not the information indicating the is stored, and if it is stored, refer to another (for example, for back and forth deviation) pending icon pattern storage table instead of the big hit pending icon pattern storage table It may be configured to

  After step S4302, in step S4303, it is determined whether the hold icon 461 determined in step S4302 is a hold icon 461 via a precursor. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4303, in step S4304, the hold change flag of the corresponding hold area is set to ON. The hold change flag indicates that the temporary hold icon 464 is scheduled to change to the main hold icon 463, and in the present embodiment, the hold change flag is set to ON to store in the corresponding hold area. The temporary holding icon 464 is displayed corresponding to the changed information (in other words, the holding change flag indicates whether the temporary holding icon 464 is displayed). Also, the hold change flag is provided in each hold area of the hold information storage area.

  After step S4304, or when a negative determination is made in step S4303, in step S4305, a pending icon display process is executed. Here, processing is performed to additionally display the hold icon 461 (the full hold icon 463 or the temporary hold icon 464) determined in step S4302 on the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42. Thereafter, the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first variation display based on entering the ball to the first start winning device 33a and the first based on entering the ball to the second start winning device 33b regarding the reserve icon 461 This is a common mode in which it is not specified which of the two variable displays corresponds to. However, by confirming the fluctuation identification lamp 40 or confirming the transition of the lighting mode of the holding lamps 46a and 46b, it is determined which of the start winning devices 33a and 33b is the fluctuation display based on entering the ball It is configured to be able to

  Referring back to FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when the negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal processing has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal processing. Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S3905. If the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3915.

  In step S3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying the decorative symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, upper, middle, and lower used for setting of each outlying symbol of a large hit decorative symbol counter CO, an upper symbol display region, a middle symbol display region, and a lower symbol display region. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that the register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO determines the symbol (jackpot symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol display device 42 when the jackpot state occurs, and in the present embodiment, as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO There are nine (0 to 8) counter values prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 8 and to return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 8).

  Then, when a symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probable variation big hit is to be stopped is received from the main control device 261, the counter value is, for example, 0 based on a table (a table correlating the counter value and the decorative symbol) not shown. If it is, the combination of the jackpot symbols is determined as “1” (Zoro eyes), and if it is 1, “2” (Zoro eyes) and so on. The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter updating process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub controller 262 receives the symbol command as described later. In this embodiment, the large hit decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the large hit decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553. However, it is not stored in the buffer, but the counter value is referred to at the timing when the symbol command is received. You may

  Also, when the symbol command indicating that the symbol corresponding to the large jackpot is to be stopped is received, for example, if the counter value is 0, 1 if it is "2" (no zoro eyes), if it is 2 to 4, "4" In the case of (Zoromes), 5 and 6, "6" (Zoromes) and in 7 and 8 "8" (Zoromes), the combination of the jackpot symbols is determined.

  The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the stop symbols for the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the lottery is out of the process. Since one of nine decorative symbols is displayed in the row, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. A stop symbol of the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper symbol counter CL, a stop symbol of the middle symbol display region is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and a stop symbol of the lower pattern display region is determined by the lower symbol counter CR.

  In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when updating each symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted and the current value is determined . The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553 back and forth, the reach pattern buffer other than the back and forth, and complete It is stored in any of the out-of-patterns.

  Here, the process of updating each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle and lower symbol counters CL, CM and CR are configured to be updated one by one in a single update process. Therefore, when the lower figure symbol counter CR is updated in the previous updating process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. Then, if it is the time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003, and the upper symbol counter CL is updated. If the middle symbol counter CM is updated (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004, and the middle symbol counter CM is updated. Further, if it is time to update the figure counter CR (steps S4001 and S4002 are both NO), the process proceeds to step S4005, and the figure counter CR is updated. In the update of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, The calculation result is taken as the current value of the out-of-design symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the update process of CL, CM and CR, the upper, middle and lower symbol counters CL, CM and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one update process, and the update times of the respective counter values overlap There is no. Thus, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated every time the update process is performed three times.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol of the upper symbol display area and the symbol of the lower pattern display region are the same) If it is determined that it is a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), then in step S4007, it is a combination of big hit symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same) Determine if When an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, the present process is ended without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, in step S4008, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front and back out symbols. If the symbol counter CL, CM, CR is a combination of front and back off symbols (front and back off reach) (S4008 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4009, the combination of the symbol counter CL, CM, CR at that time The outreach reach symbol is stored in the buffer, and this processing is ended. If the symbol counter CL, CM, CR is a combination of other symbols (reach other than back and forth deviation) (S4008 is NO), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the symbol counter CL, CM, CR combination at that time Is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the back and forth deviation of the RAM 553 and the present process is ended.

  Also, if it is a combination other than the reach symbol (S4006 is NO), the combination of the out symbol counter CL, CM, CR is out of combination and the symbol (completely out symbol) is combined, so in step S4011 A combination of out-of-time symbol counters CL, CM, CR is stored in the completely out-of-pattern buffer of the RAM 553 and this processing is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, in step S3906, a hold process is performed. The suspension process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether a change pattern command has been received (whether a change pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S4201, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, the value of the change suspension counter Nd is decremented by 1 in step S4202.

  After step S4202, in step S4203, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the hold information storage area. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first area to the pending eighth area of the pending information storage area (including flag information such as a continuous advance notice flag) toward the execution area, The data in each area is shifted in such a way as holding first area → execution area, holding second area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  In the following step S4204, it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first fluctuation display. If the determination in step S4204 is affirmative, in step S4205, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the on state is turned off. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4204, in step S4206, one of the second hold lamps 46b in the on state is turned off.

  After step S4205 or step S4206, in step S4207, a notice setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect to be used for continuous notice. In the notice setting process of step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (refer to the continuous notice lottery process of step S4108) of the execution area of the hold information storage area is on. Because this process is not performed, the process ends. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made, whether the jackpot is a jackpot or not, in the case of a jackpot what type is determined, if not a jackpot, a reach type is discriminated on the basis of the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command The type of continuous notice is determined with reference to the corresponding table. The continuous notice of the type determined here is derived at a predetermined timing for the corresponding variable display.

  After step S4207, in step S4208, if there is a hold change flag set to on, processing is performed to turn it off. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold change flag of the predetermined hold area is set to ON, the corresponding hold icon 461 is configured to be displayed in the form of the temporary hold icon 464. . That is, for example, in the case where information (see FIG. 39 etc.) for displaying the pending icon 461 via precursor is stored in the pending icon information storage area of the pending area, the pending change flag of the pending area is turned on. When there is a temporary holding icon 464 corresponding to the holding area, the temporary holding icon 464 is displayed. When the holding change flag of the holding area is turned off, the temporary holding icon 461 corresponding to the holding area is temporarily held. Instead of displaying the icon 464, the main hold icon 463 is displayed.

  In the subsequent step S4209, a pending icon shift process for shifting the pending icon 461 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. That is, in the data shift process of step S4203, since the information on the hold icon 461 is also shifted, the hold icon 461 in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the hold area in which the information is stored. The hold icon 461 is redrawn to correspond to the display position of the icon. Therefore, in the reserve display area 462, the reserve icon 461 located at the leftmost position is erased and the reserve icon 461 located on the right side thereof is erased each time the variable display is digested (executed). Is shifted to the left by one (display location moves). In addition, when the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed, when the temporary hold icon 461 is shifted, the temporary hold icon 464 changes to the main hold icon 463 (in the hold display area 462, for example, as shown in FIG. A display that changes from the aspect of 43 (a) to the aspect of FIG. 43 (b) is derived.

  After step S4209, the present process ends. In the present embodiment, the temporary storage icon 464 is configured to always change to the main storage icon 463 when one variable display is digested and data shift processing is performed. When the shift process is performed multiple times, the hold icon 463 may be changed, or the hold icon 463 may be changed not only at the start timing of the fluctuation display but also at the middle of the fluctuation display. At the stage of being shifted to the execution area, an effect of changing to the main hold icon 463 may be performed.

  Referring back to FIG. 32, in step S3907, display setting processing is performed. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processing such as generation of a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, the variation time, the stop symbol and the like to determine the display pattern and the like. Then, control is performed such as outputting the determined items as a display command to the display control device 45.

  The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts variation display of the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 42. Once the variation pattern command is received from main controller 261, the symbol is displayed based on the cooperation of sub control device 262 and display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. The variable display of is continued.

  In addition, when the variable display is started, when the continuous advance notice flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4108) is on, each situation is changed based on the change information of the change pattern command. With reference to the table corresponding to, determine the type of continuous notice to be derived in the variable display, determine the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice, or perform display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125, etc. To Furthermore, in the display setting process of step S3907, the process (performing display process) of performing effect control during the big hit is also performed.

  Here, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether an opening command for notifying the start of the jackpot state has been received from the main control device 261 or not. If the determination in step S4701 is affirmative, in step S4702, the round grasping counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds is “15 RS” or “15 RN” based on the information included in the opening command. If there is, set "15", and if "2 RS", set "2".

  After that, in step S4703, if there is a big drop out ball, setting of opening effect for 8 seconds (image of decoration symbol display device 42, sound of speaker SP, setting of lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is performed. finish. The sub control device 262 is provided with a table or the like for storing the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and the various presentation modes in the jackpot state, and the corresponding effect is referred to by referring to the table. You will select and have it run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, whether or not a round command has been received is determined in step S4704. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, then in step S4705, if a jackpot with a large hit is made, effects are set for a maximum of 30 seconds in a round, and then this processing is ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step S4706, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if there is a big drop out in step S4708, effects are set during an interval of 4 seconds, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4709 whether an ending command has been received. If a positive determination is made in step S4709, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if it is a big hit with a popped out in step S4711, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, and then the present process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot without jackpot, each period such as an opening period (2 seconds), a round period (0.4 seconds), an interval period (1 second), and an ending period (1 second) Instead of dividing and setting effects, it is set that effects (announcements, etc.) are performed throughout the entire period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether or not the hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, the present process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, in step S4713, the ending display is immediately ended, and the setting is made to be the mode of the normal gaming state in which the variable display is performed. Thereafter, the process ends.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in step S3908, the main hold icon 463 may be displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42. And a pseudo hold icon setting process for controlling a pseudo hold detection correspondence display which is derived in order to produce an effect such as “p.

  The pseudo hold icon 466 has the same mode as the temporary hold icon 464 described above, and even if the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 is displayed in the hold display area 462, the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold It can not be distinguished which of the icons 464. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43A, in addition to the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464, a large number of pseudo hold icons 466 and a large number of forward hold icons 464 are provided. A bubble display 467 is provided such that the bubbles keep rising. In the present embodiment, the bubble display 467 corresponds to the additional display.

  Here, the pseudo hold icon setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4501, it is determined whether there is detection information of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 or not. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, in step S4502, a pseudo lottery random number used in a lottery whether or not to display the pseudo hold icon 466 and whether or not the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position Get the value of the counter CG. The pseudo lottery random number counter CG is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29 and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 29). There is. The pseudo lottery random number counter CG is periodically updated, and each time, the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. In step S4502, the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is acquired from the counter buffer.

  In the following step S4503, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is any one of "0 to 9". If an affirmative determination is made in step S4503, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4503, in step S4504, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo lottery random number counter CG is any of "10 to 19". If a negative determination is made in step S4504, in step S4505, the pseudo permission flag used to determine whether or not the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced (independently) to the functional position is set on.

  After step S4505 or when the determination in step S4504 is affirmative, in step S4506, the value of the change suspension counter Nd for counting the number of suspension of the suspension information stored in the suspension information storage area is "1". As described above, it is determined whether or not it is less than "8" (whether "1 to 7" or not). If a negative determination is made in step S4506, that is, if no variable display is held or if no further variable display can be held, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4506, in step S4507, pseudo holding icon display processing for displaying the pseudo holding icon 466 is performed. In the pseudo hold icon display process, the number of the variable display (change information) currently being held is confirmed by the value of the change hold counter Nd, and the corresponding position in the hold display area 462 (the game ball is next When the second start winning switch 224b is detected, the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed on the position where the hold icon 461 indicating the hold of the corresponding variable display is to be displayed. After the step S4507, in step S4508, a pseudo holding flag indicating that the pseudo holding icon 466 is being displayed is turned on, and then this process is finished.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4501, in step S4509, it is determined whether the pseudo hold flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S4509, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4509, it is determined in step S4510 whether or not a variation pattern command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4510, processing is performed to delete the pseudo hold icon 466 in step S4511, and after the pseudo holding flag is turned off in step S4512, the present process ends. That is, the pseudo hold icon 466 is erased when the process of shifting the information of the hold information storage area (step S 4203) is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4510, it is determined in step S4513 whether or not a preceding command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4513, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4513, processing is performed to delete the pseudo hold icon 466 in step S4511, and after the pseudo holding flag is turned off in step S4512, this processing ends. In this case, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the mode of the hold display area 462 is switched and displayed, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (d).

  That is, even if the pseudo-hold icon 466 of this embodiment is a stage before the process of shifting the information in the hold information storage area is performed, it is immediately erased when the variable display is newly held. Become. In this case, in the reserve display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, the reserve icon 461 is displayed instead of the pseudo reserve icon 466, but when the temporary reserve icon 464 is displayed as the reserve icon 461. Since the mode is the same as the pseudo hold icon 466, no change in appearance occurs.

  On the other hand, when the main hold icon 463 is displayed instead of the pseudo hold icon 466 (when the display pattern of the hold icon 461 without a precursor is selected), the mode of the hold display area 462 is, for example, The state shown in FIG. 43 (a) is switched to the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) or 43 (c). The same switching display mode is also applied when the temporary hold icon 464 is changed to the main hold icon 463.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in step S3909, a pseudo blade opening control process is performed to control the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 provided in the second startup winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the pseudo blade open control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the blade close command (see step S2205 in FIG. 27) output from main controller 261 is received at the timing when blade member 37 in the open position is displaced to the closed position. Do. If the determination in step S4601 is affirmative, the process of displacing the artificial blade member 431 to the standby position is performed in step S4602, and then this process ends. In addition, by performing the processing, the pseudo blade member 431 controlled by the sub controller 262 is controlled by the main controller 261 and synchronized with the blade member 37 displaced from the open position to the closed position. It is displaced from the functional position to the standby position.

  When negative determination is made in step S4601, in step S4603, the blade open command output from main controller 261 at the timing when blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position (step in FIG. 26). It is determined whether or not S2412 (see step S2217 in FIG. 27) has been received. If the determination in step S4603 is affirmative, the process of displacing the artificial blade member 431 to the functional position is performed in step S4604, and then the process ends. By performing the process, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced from the standby position to the functional position so as to be synchronized with the blade member 37 displaced from the closed position to the open position.

  If negative determination is made in step S4603, in step S4605, is it received an open confirmation command (see step S2307 in FIG. 25) output from main controller 261 at the timing of winning in the ball entry support lottery? Determine if it is not. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4605, in step S4606, a single operation invalidation flag that prohibits the pseudo blade member 431 from operating alone is set to on.

  On the other hand, when the negative determination is made in step S4605, in step S4607, at the timing when the opening and closing process of the second start winning device 33b (vane member 37) performed by winning in the ball entry support lottery is finished. It is determined whether a support period end command (see step S2211 in FIG. 27) output from the main control device 261 has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4607, in step S4608, the single operation invalidation flag is turned off.

  After step S4608 or step S4606, or when negative determination is made in step S4607, in step S4609, the artificial blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position alone (blade member 37 is in the closed position). It is determined whether or not the pseudo release flag indicating that there is an on state.

  When negative determination is made in step S4609, in step S4610, a pseudo permission flag that is set to ON with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) when detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is performed. It is determined whether (see step S4505 in FIG. 40) is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4610, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4610, it is determined in step S4611 whether the single operation invalidation flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S4611, it is determined in step S4612 whether a jackpot state is in progress.

  If the negative determination is made also in step S4612, the pseudo release flag is set to ON in step S4613. In the following step S4614, a value corresponding to the time for which the pseudo blade member 431 is kept in the functional position is set in the pseudo open timer used for opening and closing control of the pseudo blade member 431. Further, in step S4615, processing is performed to displace the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position. Thereafter, in step S4616, the pseudo permission flag is turned off, and the processing ends.

  When the determination in step S4611 or step S4612 is affirmative, the process skips steps S4613 to S4615 and proceeds to step S4616. That is, when a series of opening / closing control to open the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) is performed, or during a big hit state, only the pseudo blade member 431 is processed by the pseudo blade open control process. The action is configured to not be performed.

  If the determination in step S4609 is affirmative, in step S4617, it is determined whether the single operation invalidation flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S4617, in step S4618, a process of subtracting one from the pseudo release timer is performed.

  In the following step S4619, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo release timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S4619, that is, if the timing for displacing the artificial blade member 431 to the standby position has not yet come, the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4619, the pseudo release flag is turned off in step S4620, the pseudo release timer is reset in step S4621, and the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the standby position in step S4622. After performing the process, the process ends.

  When the determination in step S4617 is affirmative, the process skips step S4618 and step S4619, and proceeds to step S4620. That is, in the present embodiment, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the front of the moving blade member 37 and the blade member 37 displaced to the open position is covered, The member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the standby position to the functional position. Furthermore, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also displaced from the functional position to the standby position so as to cover the front of the moving blade member 37. It is configured. For this reason, when displacing the blade member 37 to the open position, it is inconvenient if the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position. Therefore, prior to displacing the blade member 37 to the open position, the timing when it is determined to displace the blade member 37 to the open position (output from the main control device 261 when the ball entry support lottery is won). When the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position at the timing when the open operation confirmation command is received and the single operation invalid flag is turned on, processing is performed to return the pseudo blade member 431 to the standby position.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in step S3910, in the jack-out presence jackpot, the pseudo-wing member 431 and the effect button 125 are used to perform pseudo-blade effect to suggest whether or not to be promoted to a definite variation jackpot. A feather effect process is performed. Hereinafter, the pseudo feather effect process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not a popping ball is in a jackpot. If a negative determination is made in step S4801, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not an operation of the effect button 125 has been performed. If a negative determination is made in step S4802, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not it is already taught in the decorative symbol display device 42 that it is a probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4803, in step S4804, a jackpot inside pseudo open lottery is performed to determine whether the pseudo blade member 431 is to be set as the functional position. Here, the corresponding random number counter, the random number counter, and a table storing the correspondence between the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 are used. In the table, there are those which are referred to at the probability variation jackpot and those which are usually referred to at the jackpot.

  The table usually referred to at the time of big hit is a small displacement pattern (for example 35%) for displacing the artificial blade member 431 to the functional position side by about 40 degrees and a large displacement pattern (for example 5%) for displacing the artificial blade member 431 to the functional position And a non-displaced pattern (for example, 60%). On the other hand, the table to be referred to at the time of probability variation jackpot is determined that the small displacement pattern (for example 45%), the large displacement pattern (for example 10%), the non displacement pattern (for example 40%), and the promotion effect to probability variation jackpot is finalized It is set to be distributed into patterns (for example, 5%).

  In the subsequent step S4805, processing corresponding to the result of the jackpot pseudo open lottery is executed. That is, when the small displacement pattern or the large displacement pattern is selected, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position side, and processing for returning to the standby position is performed after a prescribed time. In addition, when the fixed pattern is selected, the false blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position side, and a process for returning to the standby position after a prescribed time, a process for starting the promotion effect, and a probability variation jackpot Store the state that already taught that (make the corresponding flag the default state). Thereafter, the process ends. In the present embodiment, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the teaching about winning the probability change big hit (15 RS) with the balls is always performed at the latest until the corresponding big hit state ends. It is done.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3911, the lighting pattern of the lamp and the electric decoration is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the voice setting process of step S3912, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a command relating to voice is transmitted from the main control device 261, such as notification of error occurrence, setting for performing these controls is also performed in step S3912.

  In step S3913, control setting of customer waiting effect (for example, demonstration screen display set to be displayed when predetermined time elapses in a state where fluctuation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is not performed; other such as energy saving mode) Perform the processing of

  In step S3914, an external output process of transmitting control signals based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3914 to the respective devices is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 at the time of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  After the processes of steps S3905 to S3914 performed every 2 msec are executed, or when the negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3915, and generation information of power-off is stored in RAM 553 or not. Determine if Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 261.

  If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3916, where it is determined whether the RAM 553 is destroyed. Here, if the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to the process of step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3915 that power off event occurrence information is stored, power off processing is executed in step S3917. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is inhibited and each output port is turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased. After execution of the power-off process, the process is looped endlessly.

  In the gaming hall, a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are connected to a hall computer HC, and the hall computer HC aggregates and manages data related to games etc. played by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the gaming machine system 1 is configured by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 provided in the hall and the hall computer HC.

  Here, the electrical configuration of the hall computer HC will be described.

  The hall computer HC includes an MPU 951 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM area 952 storing various control programs mounted on and executed by the MPU 951 and fixed value data, etc., and a RAM which is mounted on the MPU 951 and used as a work memory or the like. An area 953 and a hard disk 954 which is a rewritable non-volatile memory are provided. The hard disk 954 is provided with a management memory 954a that manages the number of winning balls and the game state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The MPU 951 is connected to the input / output port 956 by a bus line 955 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 956 is connected to the external terminal board 240 of each pachinko machine 10, and is also connected to the hard disk 954 described above, an input device 957 such as a keyboard or mouse, and a display output device 958 such as a monitor.

  Further, the management memory 954a includes a first variation fixed number management memory, a second variation fixed number management memory, a third variation fixed number management memory, a first entry number management memory, a second entry number management memory and a third A ball number management memory is provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 10.

  The first variation determined number management memory is output from the main controller 261 via the external terminal plate 240 and is input to the hall computer HC based on the low support first determined signal and the high support first determined signal. In addition, the fixed number of the fluctuation indication due to the ball entry of the game ball vis-a-vis 1st starting winning a prize device 33a is remembered. The first variation determined number management memory has a low value corresponding to the determined number of variation displays due to the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a in the low support mode, obtained based on the low support first determination signal. Corresponds to the fixed number of fluctuation display by entering the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a in the high support mode obtained from the support first variation fixed value K1 (off) and the high support first determination signal At the time of high support, the first fluctuation determined value K1 (on) is stored.

  The second variation fixed number management memory is output from the main controller 261 via the external terminal plate 240 and is input to the hall computer HC based on the low support second determined signal and the high support second determined signal. In the second start winning device 33b, the determined number of variable displays due to the entry of the game ball is stored. In the second variation fixed number management memory, the low support corresponding to the determined number of the variation display by the game ball entering the second starting winning device 33b in the low support mode obtained from the low support second determining signal Corresponds to the fixed number of fluctuation display by entering the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b in the high support mode obtained from the time second fluctuation determined value K2 (off) and the high support time second determined signal. The high-sapplication second fluctuation determined value K2 (on) is stored.

  The third variation determined number management memory is output from the main controller 261 via the external terminal plate 240 and is input to the hall computer HC based on the third determination signal for low support and the third determination signal for high support. In addition, the fixed number of the fluctuation indication due to the ball entry of the game ball vis-a-vis 1st starting winning a prize device 33a or 2nd starting winning a prize device 33b is remembered. In the third variation fixed number management memory, the variation display by entering the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b in the low support mode obtained from the low support third fixing signal To the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b in the high support mode obtained from the low support third variation fixed value K3 (off) corresponding to the fixed number and the high support third determined signal A third, high-spo, third variation determined value K3 (on) corresponding to the determined number of variation displays due to the game ball entering is stored.

  The first entry number management memory is an entry of gaming balls to the first start winning device 33a based on the low support first entry signal and the high support first entry signal input to the hall computer HC. It memorizes the number of balls. The first entry number management memory has a low support first entry value N1 corresponding to the number of balls entered into the first starting winning device 33a in the low support mode, which is obtained from the low support first entry signal. (Off) and a high-sap first-in-ball value N1 (on) corresponding to the number of balls entered into the first starting winning device 33a in the high support mode, obtained from the high-sap-first in-ball signal It is memorized.

  The second ball number management memory is configured to receive the game ball for the second start-up winning device 33b based on the low speed second ball entering signal and the high speed second ball entering signal input to the hall computer HC. It memorizes the number of balls. The second entering number management memory stores a second second entering value N2 corresponding to the number of balls entering the second starting winning device 33b in the low support mode, which is obtained from the second entering signal in the low support period. (Off) and a high-sap second-time-entered ball value N2 (on) corresponding to the number of balls entered into the second starting winning device 33b in the high support mode, obtained from the second high-sapear-time ball input signal. It is memorized.

  The third entering number management memory is configured to receive the first start winning device 33a or the second starting winning based on the low support third input signal and the high support third input signal input to the hall computer HC. The number of ball entry of the game ball to the device 33b is stored. The third entering ball number management memory indicates the number of entering balls into the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b in the low support mode obtained from the low support third entering ball signal. A high support indicating the number of balls entered into the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b in the high support mode, obtained from the third entering value N3 (off) and the high support third entering signal. The third ball entry value N3 (on) is stored.

  The above values K1 (off), K1 (on), K2 (off), K2 (on), K3 (off), K3 (on), N3 (on), N1 (off), N1 (on), in each pachinko machine 10 As shown in FIG. 61, N2 (off), N2 (on), N3 (off) and N3 (on) can be displayed on the display output device 958, respectively. The initial value of each value is set to 0.

  Next, processing in the hall computer HC will be described. First, the reception processing of the hole computer HC when the various determination signals and the various ball entry signals are input from the external terminal board 240 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the reception process, first, in step S7501, the type of signal received from the pachinko machine 10 is determined.

  Here, when the high-sap first determination signal is received, the value of the high-sap first variation fixed value K1 (on) is increased by one in step S7502. The function of the MPU 951 which increases the value of the first variable fixed value K1 (on) at the time of high support by one constitutes a part of the first fixed variable number grasping means.

  When the high-sap second time finalized signal is received, the value of the high-slow second fluctuation finalized value K2 (on) is increased by one in step S7503. The function of the MPU 951 which increases the value of the second variable fixed value K2 (on) at the time of high support is one part of a second fixed variable number grasping means.

  If the third high-sapering determination signal has been received, the value of the high-sapering third fluctuation determination value K3 (on) is increased by one in step S7504. The function of the MPU 951 which increases the value of the third variable fixed value K3 (on) at the time of high support by one constitutes a part of the third changed fixed number grasping means.

  When the high-sap first-time-in-ball signal is received, the value of the high-sapard-first-first ball value N1 (on) is increased by one in step S7505.

  If the high-sap second-time-entered ball signal has been received, the value of the high-sap second-time-entered ball value N2 (on) is increased by one in step S7506.

  If the high-sap third-in-the-ball signal is received, the value of the high-spo third-in-the-ball value N3 (on) is increased by one in step S7507.

  If the low support first determination signal is received, the low support first variation determined value K1 (off) is increased by one in step S7508. The function of the MPU 951 which increases the value of the low support first variation determined value K1 (off) by one constitutes a part of a first variation determined number grasping means.

  If the low support second determination signal is received, the low support second variation determined value K2 (off) is increased by one in step S7509. The function of the MPU 951 which increases the value of the second variable determined value K2 (off) during low support by one constitutes a part of the second determined variable number determining means.

  If the low support third determination signal is received, the low support third variation determined value K3 (off) is increased by one in step S7510. The function of the MPU 951 which increases the value of the low support third variation determined value K3 (off) by one constitutes a part of the third variation determined number grasping means.

  If the low drop-off first input signal is received, the process proceeds to step S 7511 to increase the low drop-off first drop value N 1 (off) by one.

  If the low drop-off second-in-ball signal is received, the low drop-off second-drop value N2 (off) is increased by one in step S7512.

  If the low drop-off third-entry ball signal has been received, the low-drop-drop third enter ball value N3 (off) is increased by one in step S7513.

  As described above, in the reception process of the hall computer HC in the present embodiment, information on the determined number of variable display and the number of ball entry is stored separately in each memory for each support mode.

  Also, after each signal is received and each variation determination value and each entry value are increased, the reception time of the signal is stored in the hard disk 954 in step S7514. The stored reception time can be displayed on the display output device 958.

  In addition, in the hall computer HC, based on the values K1 (off) and K1 (on) [for example, 1 game ball to the first start winning device 33a for the values K1 (off) and K1 (on). The number of gaming balls to be paid out by entering the ball (in this embodiment, by three), the approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming ball to the first start winning device 33a, It can be grasped for every support mode (each ball entering state). In addition, the hall computer HC sets [1 game ball to the second start winning device 33b for the values K2 (off) and K2 (on), for example, based on the values K2 (off) and K2 (on). The support number of gaming balls paid out by balls (in the present embodiment, two)], the approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the second start winning device 33b, each support mode (Each ball entry status) can now be grasped. In addition, the hall computer HC is provided with the approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the first starting winning device 33a and the gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the second starting winning device 33b. Based on the approximate number, the total approximate number of gaming balls paid out by the entry of the gaming balls into the start winning device 33a, 33b can be grasped. In addition, each grasped number can be displayed on the display output device 958.

  Next, an error check process performed by the hall computer HC will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the error check process, the finalized number check process of step S7601, the ball number check process of step S7602, the fluctuation ratio check process of step S7603, the ball proportion ratio check process of step S7604, and the total number check process of step S7605 Done in order. The error check process is repeatedly performed at regular intervals. Hereinafter, the fixed number check process, the ball number check process, the fluctuation ratio check process, the ball ratio check process, and the total number check process will be described in order.

  In the fixed number check process, as shown in FIG. 64, in step S7701, the low-sap first variation fixed value K1 (off) and the low-sap second variation fixed value K2 (off) are added to the sum It is determined whether the absolute value of the value obtained by subtracting the third variation determined value K3 (off) is less than or equal to a predetermined error allowable value Ka (off). That is, it is determined whether the sum of the value K1 (off) and the value K2 (off) is substantially equal to the value K3 (off).

  If a negative determination is made in step S7701, some abnormality (for example, an abnormal signal transmission between the respective terminals 2308, 2309, 2310 of the external terminal board 240, the pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer HC, etc.) occurs. In step S7702, notification of abnormality is issued, and the fixed number check process is ended.

  As the abnormality notification, for example, turning on an abnormality lamp provided as a notification means in the game hall, or displaying a display indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the fixed number check process in the display output device 958 (for example, As shown in FIG. 69, the display of the presence / absence of abnormality or the like in the result column of the fixed number check process can be mentioned as an example.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S7701, the process moves to step S7703. In step S7703, the high-sape third variation fixed value K3 (on) is subtracted from the sum of the high-sap first variation fixed value K1 (on) and the high-sap second variation fixed value K2 (on). It is determined whether the absolute value of the value is less than or equal to a predetermined error allowance Ka (on). That is, it is determined whether the sum of the value K1 (on) and the value K2 (on) is substantially equal to the value K3 (on).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S7703, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7703, the process proceeds to step S7702 to notify of an abnormality, and then the process ends.

  The error allowances Ka (off) and Ka (on) are relatively small numerical values of 0 or more, are stored in the hard disk 954, and are read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of confirmed number check processing. Also, the error allowances Ka (off) and Ka (on) are configured to be changeable by the input device 957 as appropriate.

  Next, the ball number check process will be described. In the ball number check process, as shown in FIG. 65, first, in step S7801, from the sum of the low-sap first ball-in value N1 (off) and the low-sap second-in ball value N2 (off) It is determined whether or not the absolute value of the value obtained by subtracting the third drop-in-ball value N3 (off) at low support is equal to or less than a predetermined error allowable value Na (off). That is, it is determined whether the sum of the value N1 (off) and the value N2 (off) is substantially equal to the value N3 (off). When negative determination is carried out by step S7801, it transfers to step S7802 and performs abnormality alerting | reporting, and complete | finishes a number-of-balls check process. As the abnormality notification, for example, turning on the abnormality lamp in the game hall or displaying a display indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the number-of-balls check processing in the display output device 958 (for example, as shown in FIG. 69) As such, the display of the presence or absence of an abnormality or the like in the result column of the number-of-balls check processing can be cited as an example.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S7801, the process proceeds to step S7803. In step S7803, a value obtained by subtracting the third high-spot entry N3 (on) from the sum of the high-spo first entry N1 (on) and the high-spo second entry N2 (on). It is determined whether the absolute value of is less than or equal to a predetermined error allowance value Na (on). That is, it is determined whether the sum of the value N1 (on) and the value N2 (on) is substantially equal to the value N3 (on). When an affirmative determination is made in step S7803, the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7803, an abnormality notification is performed in step S7802, and the present process ends.

  The error allowances Na (off) and Na (on) are relatively small numerical values of 0 or more, and are stored in the hard disk 954, and are read out to the RAM area 953 at the ball number check process. The error allowances Na (off) and Na (on) can be appropriately changed by the input device 957.

  Next, fluctuation rate check processing will be described. The fluctuation rate check process is performed each time the variable display is performed by the same number as the predetermined value n in the low support mode or every time the variable display is performed by the same number as the predetermined value m in the high support mode. It is determined by the fluctuation rate check process whether or not the ball entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second starting winning device 33b is in the proper state. Further, in the present embodiment, the determination unit is configured by the function of the MPU 951 that executes the variation ratio check process.

  In the fluctuation rate check process, as shown in FIG. 66, first, in step S7901, the value K3 (off) is equal to the sum value of the low-sapo-time fluctuation fixed value Ks (off) at the pre-check time and the predetermined value n. It is determined whether or not it is. That is, in the low support mode, it is determined from the previous error check (processing of steps S7902 to S7912) whether or not determination of the variable display has been performed the same number as the predetermined value n. The pre-check low support time variation fixed value Ks (off) is a numerical value for determining the execution timing of the error check.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7901, since it is the check timing of the fluctuation determination ratio in the low support mode, the process proceeds to step S7902. On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S7901, it shifts to Step S7913. The predetermined value n is, for example, an integer of 5 or more, is stored in the hard disk 954, and is read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the fluctuation rate check process. Further, the predetermined value n can be appropriately changed by the input device 957, and is set to 10 in the present embodiment.

  In step S7902, the value K3 (off) is substituted into the pre-check low-sapapless variation fixed value Ks (off). That is, the value of the pre-check low-sappoon fluctuation determination value Ks (off) is updated to the current low-sappo third fluctuation confirmatory value K3 (off).

  In the following step S7903, the low-sap check first fluctuation determined value K1c (off) is updated to the value K1 (off) minus the current low-sap0st first variation fixed value K1c (off) from the value K1 (off). Do. The low support first fluctuation fixed value K1c (off) for check indicates an increase value of the value K1 (off) from the previous error check to the current error check, and the RAM area 953 and the hard disk 954 Is stored in

  In the following step S7904, the check low-sap second variation fixed value K2c (off) is updated to the value K2 (off) minus the current low-sapability second variation fixed value K2c (off) from the value K2 (off). Do. The second variable determined value K2c (off) at the time of low support for check indicates an increase value of the value K2 (off) from the time of the previous error check to the time of the current error check, and the RAM area 953 and the hard disk 954 Is stored in

  Subsequent to step S7904, in step S7905, a ratio [K2c (off) / (K1c (off) +1)] of the value K2c (off) to that obtained by adding 1 to the value K1c (off) is set in advance. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or less than the low support minimum change ratio Kmin (off). That is, in the low support mode, when the variable display is performed the same number as the predetermined value n, the number determined by entering the game ball to the second start winning device 33b among the variable display [value K2c (off)] However, whether or not the number due to the game ball entering the first starting winning device 33a among the variable display [value K1c (off)] is not excessively small or not (to the second starting winning device 33b Determine if there are too few game balls entering the game). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7905, the low-spo time fluctuation ratio excess fraction is increased by one in step S7906. On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S7905, it shifts to Step S7907. When the negative determination is made in step S7905, the low-sap0 temporal fluctuation ratio excess fraction may be decreased by 1 with 0 as the lower limit, or reset (a low sapo temporal fluctuation ratio excess number described later, The same applies to high-sap ratio fluctuation ratio excess fraction and high-sap ratio fluctuation ratio excess number).

  The low support minimum change ratio Kmin (off) is stored in the hard disk 954 and read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the change ratio check process. Furthermore, the ratio Kmin (off) can be appropriately changed by the input device 957, and is set to 0.10 in the present embodiment. In addition, the low support variation ratio excess fraction is a numerical value used to determine whether or not variation ratio underage error processing is performed in step S7910 described later, and 0 is set as an initial value.

  After step S7906, or when the determination in step S7905 is negative, in step S7907, the ratio [K2c (off) / (K1c (off) +1)] is a preset maximum fluctuation during low support. It is determined whether or not the ratio Kmax (off) or more. That is, in the low support mode, when the variable display is performed the same number as the predetermined value n, the number determined by entering the game ball to the second start winning device 33b among the variable display [value K2c (off)] However, whether or not the number due to the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a among the variable display [value K1c (off)] is not excessively large (to the second start winning device 33b Determine if there are too many game balls entering). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7907, the low-sap0 overtime fluctuation ratio excess number is increased by one in step S7908.

  The low support maximum change ratio Kmax (off) is stored in the hard disk 954, and read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the change ratio check process. Furthermore, the ratio Kmax (off) can be appropriately changed by the input device 957, and is set to 0.80 in the present embodiment. In addition, the low support variation ratio excess number is used to determine whether or not variation ratio excess error processing is performed in step S7912 described later, and 0 is set as an initial value.

  After step S7908, or when a negative determination is made in step S7907, the process proceeds to step S7909, and the low-sappo ratio fluctuation ratio excess fraction is a predetermined number (for example, 3), which is preset. It is determined whether or not it is the above that can be changed as appropriate. When a negative judging is carried out at Step S7909, it shifts to Step S7911. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S7909, fluctuation ratio under-error processing is performed in step S7910, and the process proceeds to step S7911. In this fluctuation ratio under-error processing, a fluctuation ratio under-error indicating that the ratio of fluctuation display by entering the gaming ball to the second starting winning device 33b in the low support mode is excessively small (for example, FIG. 69) The display output unit 958 displays an indication that the fluctuation ratio underrun error has occurred in the low support mode). In the fluctuation ratio under-error processing, the occurrence time of the error is stored in the hard disk 954 and displayed on the display output device 958. Furthermore, the low support time fluctuation ratio excess fraction is reset to the initial value (0).

  After step S7910, or when a negative determination is made in step S7909, the process proceeds to step S7911, and the low support period excess fluctuation ratio excess number is a predetermined number (for example, 3), which is preset. It is determined whether or not it is the above that can be changed as appropriate. When a negative judging is carried out at Step S7911, it shifts to Step S7913. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S7911, fluctuation ratio excessive error processing is performed in step S7912, and the process proceeds to step S7913. In this fluctuation ratio excessive error processing, a fluctuation ratio excessive error is informed to indicate that the ratio of fluctuation display by entering the gaming ball to the second starting winning device 33b in the low support mode is excessively large (for example, FIG. 69) The display output device 958 displays a message indicating that a fluctuation ratio excessive error has occurred in the low support mode). In the fluctuation ratio excessive error processing, the occurrence time of the error is stored in the hard disk 954 and displayed on the display output device 958. Furthermore, the low support variation ratio excess number is reset to the initial value (0).

  In the present embodiment, in the display output device 958, the determined number of variable display in the low support mode (that is, the value K3 (off)), the value K1c (off), the value K2c (off), and the ratio [ K2c (off) / (K1c (off) + 1)], low Sappo overtime fluctuation ratio over fraction, low Sappo overtime fluctuation ratio excessive number, information indicating presence or absence of fluctuation ratio underrun error or fluctuation ratio overrun error (for example, error And the occurrence time of the fluctuation ratio under error or fluctuation ratio over error is displayed (see FIG. 69). Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp a time when the ratio [K2c (off) / (K1c (off) +1)] exceeds the low support maximum fluctuation ratio Kmax (off).

  After step S7912 or when a negative determination is made in step S7901 or step S7911, the process proceeds to step S7913. In step S7913, it is determined whether or not the high-sap third variation fixed value K3 (on) is equal to the sum of the pre-check high-sapix variation fixed value Ks (on) and the predetermined value m. That is, in the high support mode, it is determined from the previous error check (processing of steps S7914 to S7924) whether or not the fluctuation determination has been performed the same number as the predetermined value m. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7913, it is the check timing of the fluctuation determination ratio in the high support mode, so the process moves to step S7914. On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S7913, this processing is ended. The pre-check high support time variation fixed value Ks (on) is a numerical value for determining the execution timing of the error check.

  The predetermined value m is, for example, an integer of 5 or more and is stored in the hard disk 954, and is read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the fluctuation rate check process. Further, the predetermined value m can be appropriately set by the input device 957, and in the present embodiment, is set to the same number (= 10) as the predetermined value n. In the high support mode, the variation in the high support mode is determined by setting the predetermined value m to a value larger than the predetermined value n in consideration of the fact that the game ball easily enters the start winning device 33a, 33b. It is also possible to reduce the processing load on the hall computer HC by reducing the frequency of occurrence of percentage check processing to some extent.

  In step S7914, the third high-spot fluctuation fixed value K3 (on) is substituted for the pre-check high-sapchron fluctuation determination value Ks (on). That is, the value Ks (on) is updated to the current value K3 (on).

  In the following step S7915, the first high deviation check value K1c (on) is determined from the first high deviation determination variable K1 (on), and the second high deviation confirmation point K1c (on) at the present time. Update to the value obtained by subtracting The check high support first variation fixed value K1c (on) indicates the increase value of the high support first variation fixed value K1 (on) from the previous error check to the current error check, and It is stored in the RAM area 953 and the hard disk 954.

  In the following step S7916, the second high deviation check value K2c (on) is checked from the second high deviation determination value K2 (on), and the second high deviation check point K2c (on) at the present time. Update to the value obtained by subtracting Second check variable high value second fluctuation finalized value K2c (on) indicates the increase value of high second error base second fluctuation fixed value K2 (on) from the previous error check to the current error check, It is stored in the RAM area 953 and the hard disk 954.

  Following step S7916, in step S7917, a ratio [K2c (on) / (K1c (on) +1)] of the value K2c (on) to that obtained by adding 1 to the value K1c (on) is set in advance. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or less than the high support minimum change rate Kmin (on). That is, in the high support mode, when the variable display is performed by the same number as the predetermined value m, the number determined by entering the game ball to the second start winning device 33b among the variable display [value K2c (on)] However, whether or not the number due to the game ball entering the first starting winning device 33a among the fluctuation display is the value [value K1c (on)] is not excessively small or not (to the second starting winning device 33b Determine if there are too few game balls entering the game). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7917, the high support variation ratio excess fraction is increased by one in step S7918.

  The high support minimum change ratio Kmin (on) is stored in the hard disk 954, and read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the change ratio check process. Further, the ratio Kmin (on) can be appropriately changed by the input device 957, and is set to 1.50 in the present embodiment. Further, the high speed change ratio excess fraction is used to determine whether or not to perform variation ratio undererror processing in step S7922 described later, and 0 is set as an initial value.

  After step S7918, or when a negative determination is made in step S7917, the process proceeds to step S7919, and the ratio [K2c (on) / (K1c (on) +1)] is a preset time of high support. It is determined whether or not the maximum fluctuation rate Kmax (on) or more. That is, when the variable display is performed in the same number as the predetermined value m in the high support mode, the fixed number [value K2c (on)] of the variable display due to entering the second start winning device 33b is the Whether or not the number due to entering the first start winning device 33a among the variable display [value K1c (on)] is not excessively large or not (entering the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b Is not too much). If an affirmative determination is made in step S7919, the high-sapplication time fluctuation ratio excess number is increased by one in step S7920.

  The high support maximum change ratio Kmax (on) is stored in the hard disk 954, and read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the change ratio check process. Furthermore, the ratio Kmax (on) can be appropriately changed by the input device 957, and is set to 10.00 in the present embodiment. In addition, the high support variation ratio excess number is used to determine whether or not processing such as abnormality notification is performed in step S7924 described later, and 0 is set as an initial value.

  After step S7920, or when a negative determination is made in step S7919, the process moves to step S7921, and the high-sap0 time change ratio excess fraction is a predetermined number set in advance (for example, 3 and the number is also appropriate). It is determined whether or not the change is possible. When a negative judging is carried out at Step S7921, it shifts to Step S7923. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S7921, fluctuation ratio under-error processing is performed in step S7922, and the process proceeds to step S7923. In this fluctuation ratio under-error processing, an under-error indicating that the ratio of the fluctuation display due to entering the gaming ball to the second starting winning device 33b in the high support mode is excessively small is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 69) Thus, the display output device 958 is displayed to indicate that the fluctuation ratio under error has occurred in the high support mode). Further, the time of occurrence of the fluctuation ratio undererror is stored in the hard disk 954 and displayed on the display output device 958. In addition, the high support variation ratio excess fraction is reset to the initial value (0).

  After step S7922 or when a negative determination is made in step S7921, the process moves to step S7923, and the high support period excess fluctuation ratio excess number is a predetermined number (for example, 3), which is preset. It is determined whether or not it is the above that can be changed as appropriate. If a negative determination is made in step S7923, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7923, fluctuation ratio excessive error processing is performed in step S7924, and then the present process ends. In this fluctuation ratio excessive error processing, a fluctuation ratio excessive error is notified that indicates that the ratio of fluctuation display due to entering the gaming ball to the second starting winning device 33b in the high support mode is excessively large. Further, the occurrence time of the fluctuation ratio excessive error is stored in the hard disk 954 and displayed on the display output device 958. Furthermore, the high support variation ratio excess number is reset to the initial value (0).

  In this embodiment, in the display output device 958, the determined number [K3 (on)] of the variable display in the high support mode, the value K1c (on), the value K2c (on), the ratio [K2c (on) ) / (K1c (on) +1)], high sapo fluctuation ratio excess fraction, high sapo fluctuation ratio excess number, information indicating the presence or absence of fluctuation ratio underrun error or fluctuation ratio overrun error, and fluctuation ratio undershoot error The occurrence time of the fluctuation ratio excessive error is displayed (see FIG. 69). Therefore, it is possible to easily know the time when the ratio [K2c (on) / (K1c (on) +1)] exceeds the maximum change ratio Kmax (on) at high support.

  Next, the ball entering ratio check process will be described. The ball entering ratio check process is performed each time the number of balls entering the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b is the same as the predetermined value s in the low support mode, or in the high support mode This is executed each time the number of entering game balls to the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b is equal to the predetermined value t. In the ball entering rate check process, it is determined whether or not the ball entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second starting winning device 33 b is in the proper state, as in the variation rate check process.

  In the ball entry ratio check process, as shown in FIG. 67, first, in step S8001, the value N3 (off) is the total value of the pre-check low drop-time ball entry value Ns (off) and the predetermined value s. It is determined whether they are equal. That is, in the low support mode, it is determined from the previous error check (processing of steps S8002 to S8012) whether or not the number of entering game balls to the start winning device 33a, 33b has been the same as the predetermined value s. . When an affirmative determination is made in step S8001, the processing proceeds to step S8002 because it is the check timing of the ball entry ratio in the low support mode. On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S8001, it shifts to Step S8013.

  The predetermined value s is, for example, an integer of 5 or more, is stored in the hard disk 954, and is read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the ball entry ratio check process. Further, the predetermined value s can be set as appropriate by the input device 957, and is set to 10 in the present embodiment. The pre-check low support time ball entry value Ns (off) is a numerical value for determining the execution timing of the error check.

  In step S8002, the value N3 (off) is substituted for the pre-check low-sap0 entering ball value Ns (off). That is, the pre-check low-sap o'clock entry sphere value Ns (off) is updated to the current low-sapo third entry sphere value N3 (off).

  In the subsequent step S8003, the check low-sap first-enter-ball value N1c (off) is updated to the value N1 (off) minus the current low-sap-use first enter ball N1c (off) Do. The first low-slow check ball entry value N1c (off) indicates an increase value of the value N1 (off) from the previous error check to the current error check, and the RAM area 953 and the hard disk 954 Is stored in

  In the subsequent step S8004, the check low-sap second-time ball entry value N2c (off) is updated to the value N2 (off) minus the current low-slow-time second fill ball value N2c (off) Do. The low support second support ball entry value N2c (off) indicates the increase value of the value N2 (off) from the previous error check to the current error check, and the RAM area 953 and the hard disk 954 Is stored in

  Subsequent to step S8004, in step S8005, the ratio [N2c (off) / (N1c (off) +1)] of the value N2c (off) to the value N1c (off) added with 1 is a preset low value. It is determined whether or not it is less than or equal to the support-time minimum ball entering ratio Nmin (off). That is, in the low support mode, when the number of entering game balls to the starting winning devices 33a and 33b is equal to the predetermined value s, the number of entering balls [value N2c (off)] to the second starting winning device 33b is It is determined whether the number of balls entered into the first start winning device 33a [value N1c (off)] is not excessively small. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8005, then the low-spo-time ball entry ratio excess fraction is increased by one in step S8006. On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S8005, it shifts to Step S8007. If the negative determination is made in step S8005, the low Sap ball entry ratio over-fraction may be decreased by 1 with 0 as the lower limit, or reset (a low Sap entry ball ratio ratio excess described later may be reset). The same is true for numbers, high support time when over ratio, high support time when over ratio).

  The low support time minimum ball entry ratio Nmin (off) is stored in the hard disk 954, and read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the ball entry ratio check process. Furthermore, the ratio Nmin (off) can be set by the input device 957, and is set to 0.10 in the present embodiment. Further, the low support time ball entry ratio excess fraction is used to determine whether or not the ball entry ratio undererror processing is to be performed in step S8010 described later, and 0 is set as an initial value.

  After step S8006, or when a negative determination is made in step S8005, the process proceeds to step S8007, and the ratio [N2c (off) / (N1c (off) +1)] is a preset low assistance time. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than the maximum ball hitting ratio Nmax (off). That is, in the low support mode, when the number of game balls entering the start winning device 33a, 33b is equal to the predetermined value s, the number of balls entering the second start winning device 33b [value N2c (off)] However, it is determined whether or not the number of balls entered to the first start winning device 33a [value N1c (off)] is not excessively large. When an affirmative determination is made in step S8007, the low-spo-time ball entry ratio excessive number is increased by one in step S8008.

  Note that the low support maximum pitch ratio Nmax (off) is stored in the hard disk 954, and read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the pitch ratio check process. Further, the ratio Nmax (off) is settable by the input device 957, and is set to 0.80 in the present embodiment. Further, the low support time ball entry ratio excessive number is used to determine whether or not the ball entry ratio excessive error processing is performed in step S8012 described later, and 0 is set as an initial value.

  After step S8008, or when a negative determination is made in step S8007, the process proceeds to step S8009, and the low support time ball entry ratio excess fraction is a predetermined number (for example, 3), which is set in advance. Can also be changed as appropriate). When a negative judging is carried out at Step S8009, it shifts to Step S8011. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S8009, a ball falling ratio undersize error process is performed in step S8010, and the process proceeds to step S8011. In this ball entering ratio under error processing, in the low support mode, the ratio of the ball entering number of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b to the ball entering number of the game balls to the starting winning device 33a, 33 b is excessively small An in-classification ratio under error indicating that is reported (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, the display output device 958 displays a message indicating that an under-population ratio under-error has occurred in the low support mode). Further, in this ball entry ratio under error processing, the occurrence time of the ball entry ratio under error is stored in the hard disk 954 and displayed on the display output device 958. In addition, the low support time ball entry ratio excess fraction is reset to the initial value (0).

  After step S8010, or when a negative determination is made in step S8009, the process proceeds to step S8011, and the low-spo time ball gathering ratio excessive number is a predetermined number (for example, 3), which is set in advance. Can also be changed as appropriate). If a negative determination is made in step S8011, the process moves to step S8013. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S8011, an excessive ball ratio error processing is performed in step S8012, and the process proceeds to step S8013. In this ball entry ratio excessive error processing, in the low support mode, the ratio of the number of ball entry to the second start prize device 33b to the number of ball entry to the start prize device 33a, 33b is excessively large. In the low support mode, the display output device 958 displays, for example, a message indicating that the over-filling ratio error has occurred in the low support mode. Further, in this ball entry ratio excessive error processing, the occurrence time of the ball entry ratio excessive error is stored in the hard disk 954 and displayed on the display output device 958. In addition, the low support probability ball entry ratio overrun number is reset to the initial value (0).

  In this embodiment, in the display output device 958, the number of balls entered into the start winning device 33a, 33b in the low support mode [ie, the value N3 (off)], the value N1c (off), the value N2c ( off), the ratio [N2c (off) / (N1c (off) + 1)], low support time ball ratio over-fraction, low support time ball ratio excessive number, ball ratio ratio under error or ball ratio over error Information indicating the presence or absence of an occurrence (for example, a symbol displayed in response to the occurrence of an error, etc.) and the occurrence time of an under-filling ratio under error or over-filling ratio over error are displayed.

  After step S8012, or when a negative determination is made in step S8001 or step S8011, the process moves to step S8013. In step S8013, it is determined whether the high-sap third-in-the-ball value N3 (on) is equal to the sum of the pre-check high-sapone entering ball value Ns (on) and the predetermined value t. That is, in the high support mode, it is determined whether or not the number of entering game balls to the start winning device 33a, 33b has been equal to the predetermined value t since the previous error check. The pre-check high-sap-time ball entry value Ns (on) is a numerical value for determining the execution timing of the error check (the process of steps S8014 to S8024).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8013, since it is the check timing of the ball entry ratio in the high support mode, the process moves to step S8014. On the other hand, when a negative judging is carried out at Step S8014, this processing is ended. The predetermined value t is, for example, an integer of 5 or more, is stored in the hard disk 954, and is read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the ball entering ratio check process. Further, the predetermined value t can be appropriately set by the input device 957, and is set to 10 in the present embodiment. In the high support mode, the predetermined value t is set to be larger than the predetermined value s in consideration of the fact that the game ball easily enters the start winning device 33a, 33b, thereby processing the hall computer HC. The burden may be reduced.

  In step S8014, a high speed third support ball number N3 (on) is substituted into the pre-check high speed support ball count Ns (on). That is, the value Ns (on) is updated to the current value N3 (on).

  In the following step S8015, the first check ball value N1c (on) at check high sapo is changed from the first fall ball value N1 (on) at high sapo to the first check ball value N1 c at check at present. Update to the value obtained by subtracting The check first high pitched first ball entry value N1c (on) indicates the increase value of the first high pitched ball entry value N1 (on) from the previous error check to the current error check, It is stored in the RAM area 953 and the hard disk 954.

  In the following step S8016, the second check ball value N2c (on) is used for high check check, and the second check ball value N2c (on) check high check is performed from the second check ball value N2 (on) at check Update to the value obtained by subtracting The check high support second-time ball entry value N2c (on) indicates the increase value of the high-support-time second ball entry value N2 (on) from the previous error check to the current error check, It is stored in the RAM area 953 and the hard disk 954.

  Following step S8016, in step S8017, a ratio [N2c (on) / (N1c (on) +1)] of the value N2c (on) to that obtained by adding 1 to the value N1c (on) is set in advance. It is determined whether or not the high speed support minimum ball entering ratio Nmin (on) or less. That is, in the high support mode, when the number of entering the game balls to the start winning device 33a, 33b is equal to the predetermined value t, the number of balls entered to the second start winning device 33b [value N2c (on)] However, it is determined whether or not the number of balls entered into the first starting winning device 33a [value N1c (on)] is not excessively small. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8017, the high-sap. Ball gathering ratio excess fraction is increased by one in step S8018.

  Note that the high support minimum hit pitch ratio Nmin (on) is stored in the hard disk 954, and read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the hit percentage check process. Furthermore, the ratio Nmin (on) can be appropriately changed by the input device 957, and is set to 1.20 in the present embodiment. Further, the high-sap-time ball entry ratio excess fraction is used to determine whether or not the ball entry ratio under-error processing is performed in step S8022 described later, and 0 is set as an initial value.

  After step S8018, or when a negative determination is made in step S8017, the process proceeds to step S8019, and the ratio [N2c (on) / (N1c (on) +1)] is a preset high support time. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or greater than the maximum ball hitting ratio Nmax (on). That is, in the high support mode, when the number of entering game balls to the start winning device 33a, 33b is equal to the predetermined value t, the number of balls entered to the second start winning device 33b [value N2c (on)] However, it is determined whether or not the number of balls entered into the first start winning device 33a [value N1c (on)] is not excessively large. When an affirmative determination is made in step S8019, in step S8020, the high speed support ball gathering ratio excess number is increased by one.

  Note that the high support maximum maximum ball entering ratio Nmax (on) is stored in the hard disk 954 and read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the ball entering ratio check process. Furthermore, the ratio Nmax (on) can be appropriately changed by the input device 957, and is set to 10.00 in the present embodiment. In addition, the high support time ball entry ratio excessive number is used to determine whether or not the ball entry ratio excessive error processing is to be performed in step S8024 described later, and 0 is set as an initial value.

  After step S8020, or when a negative determination is made in step S8019, the process proceeds to step S8021, and the high-sapeo ball entry ratio excess fraction is a predetermined number (for example, 3), which is set in advance. Can also be changed as appropriate). If a negative determination is made in step S8021, the process moves to step S8023. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S8021, a ball entry ratio under error process is performed in step S8022, and the process proceeds to step S8023. In this ball entering ratio under error processing, in the high support mode, the ratio of the ball entering number of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b to the ball entering number of the game balls to the starting winning device 33a, 33 b is excessively small. An in-classification ratio under error indicating that is reported (for example, as shown in FIG. 70, the display output device 958 displays a message indicating that the under-population ratio under-error has occurred in the high support mode). Further, the occurrence time of the ball entry ratio under error is stored in the hard disk 954 and displayed on the display output device 958. Furthermore, the high support ratio ball falling ratio over-fraction is reset to the initial value (0).

  After step S8022 or when a negative determination is made in step S8021, the process proceeds to step S8023, and the high support time upper limit ball entry ratio number is a predetermined number (for example, 3), which is set in advance. Can also be changed as appropriate). If a negative determination is made in step S8023, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S8023, an excessive ball ratio error processing is performed in step S8024, and then this process ends. In this ball entry ratio excessive error processing, in the high support mode, the ratio of the number of ball entry to the second start prize device 33b to the number of ball entry to the start prize device 33a, 33b is excessively large. An over-filling ratio excess error indicating that is reported. Further, the occurrence time of the ball entry ratio excessive error is stored in the hard disk 954 and displayed on the display output device 958. Furthermore, the high support ratio ball entry ratio excess number is reset to the initial value (0).

  In the present embodiment, in the display output device 958, the number of ball entry into the start winning device 33a, 33b in the high support mode [N3 (on)], the value N1c (on), the value N2c ( on), the ratio [N2c (on) / (N1c (on) +1)], high support time ball ratio over-fraction, high support time ball ratio excessive number, ball ratio ratio under error or ball ratio ratio error Information indicating the presence or absence of an occurrence, and the occurrence time of the ball entry ratio under error or the ball entry ratio over error are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp a time when the ratio [N2c (on) / (N1c (on) +1)] exceeds the maximum landing ratio Nmax (on) at the time of high support.

  Next, the total number check process will be described. The total number check process is executed each time the number of entering game balls to the second starting winning device 33b is the same as the predetermined value p in the low support mode. In the total number check process, the second start winning device based on the number of game balls entering the second starting winning device 33b and the determined number of variation displays by the entering of the game balls to the second starting winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not the ball entry state of the gaming ball with respect to 33b is the proper state.

  In the total number check process, as shown in FIG. 68, first, in step S8101, the second low-spo second ball entry value N2 (off) is determined to be a pre-check low-secondary second ball input value N2s (off). It is determined whether or not it is equal to the sum with the value p. That is, it is determined whether it is time to execute the error check process (the process of steps S8102 to S8107). If a negative determination is made in step S8101, the process ends because it is not yet time to execute an error check.

  The predetermined value p is, for example, an integer of 10 or more and is stored in the hard disk 954, and is read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the check of the total number of pairs. Further, the predetermined value p can be appropriately set by the input device 957, and is set to 30 in the present embodiment. The second check value N2s (off) at the time of pre-check low support is a numerical value used to determine the execution timing of the error check.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S8101, the process proceeds to step S8102, and the second check value N2s (off) at the time of pre-check low support is set to the second decrease value at the current low support N2 (off Update to). Next, in step S8103, the difference value K2d (off) is updated to a value obtained by subtracting the current difference value K2d (off) from the second variable determined value K2 (off) at the time of low support. The difference value K2d (off) indicates an increase value of the second low-spo, second fluctuation determined value K2 (off) from the time of the previous error check (processing of steps S8102 to S8107).

  Next, in step S8104, it is determined whether or not a value obtained by subtracting the difference value K2d (off) from the predetermined value p is equal to or greater than a predetermined low support excess threshold T (off). That is, whether or not the number of ball entry [p-K2d (off)] of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b which does not become an execution trigger of the variable display is excessively large (for example, to the second starting winning device 33b It is unnaturally unjudged continuously whether or not the game ball is entering the ball). If a negative determination is made in step S8104, that is, if the number of game balls entered per unit time with respect to the second start-up winning device 33b is within the appropriate range, then the flow shifts to step S8106.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S8104, the value of the low drop-over-time excessive ball number is increased by one in step S8105, and the process proceeds to step S8106. The low support time falling ball overrun number is used to determine whether or not the lower speed falling ball overrun error process is to be performed in step S8107 described later, and 0 is set as an initial value. When the negative determination is made in step S8104, the low-sappo ratio fluctuation ratio excess fraction may be decreased by 1 with 0 as the lower limit, or reset. “off” is stored in the hard disk 954 and read out to the RAM area 953 at the time of the check of the total number of pairs. Furthermore, the threshold value T (off) can be appropriately changed by the input device 957, and is set to 10 in the present embodiment.

  In step S8106, it is determined whether or not the low support reduction low ball entry excessive number is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 3 and can be appropriately changed). If a negative determination is made in step S8106, the present process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S8106, a drop-in-ball oversize error process is performed in step S8107, and the process ends. In this lower ball excessive error processing, an abnormality notification for notifying that the lower ball excessive error has occurred (for example, turning on the abnormal lamp in the game hall or as shown in FIG. 70, display output In the device 958, a display indicating that the over-slow ball error has occurred is displayed, storage of the occurrence time of the under-ball over-ball error in the hard disk 954 etc. . Furthermore, in the lower entering excessive ball error processing, the lower supporting occasion lower entering upper number is reset to the initial value (0).

  In the total count check process, in addition to or in place of the above-described process, the number of game balls entering the second start winning device 33b and the number of game balls entering the second start winning device 33b in high support mode It may be made to determine whether or not the ball entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second starting winning device 33b in the high support mode is the proper state based on the determined number of the fluctuation display by the ball entering.

  As described above, in the error check process of the hole computer HC in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of determined changes (variation ratio check process) and the number of ball entry (population ratio check process) and the number of determined variables and the number of balls Based on the total number check process), it is judged in a superimposed manner whether or not the ball entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second start winning device 33b is the proper state.

  As described above in detail, according to the present embodiment, the second determination signal indicating the determination of the variation display by the entry of the gaming ball to the second start-up winning device 33b is independently output externally. Therefore, in the hall computer HC, it can be detected without performing extra processing that the variable display due to the game ball entering the second starting winning device 33b is determined. In addition, in the hall computer HC, processing regarding fluctuation indication due to the entry of the game ball to the 2nd starting winning a prize device 33b (for example, the decision timing of the fluctuation indication due to the ball entry of the game sphere to the 2nd starting prize device 33b is detected Or to determine the number of determined variable displays, etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the usability for the hall side, the manufacturer side of the hall computer HC, and the like.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, the game ball is relatively easy to enter the second start winning device 33b, and the variation display by the entry of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b is relatively easy to occur. In this case, the processing load of the hall computer HC may be extremely increased. However, according to the present embodiment, even in such a case, the increase of the processing load can be effectively suppressed.

  Furthermore, since a different confirmation signal is output according to each ball entry state, in the hall computer HC, the fluctuation display by the ball entry of the gaming ball to the second start winning device 33b occurs in which ball entry state You can easily understand what you are doing. Moreover, it becomes easy to divide and perform the process regarding the fluctuation | variation display by the ball entering of the game ball to the 2nd starting winning a prize device 33b in a high ball entering state and a low ball entering state. For example, as described above, the finalized number of fluctuation indication by entering the second starting winning device 33b in the high entering state and the entering of fluctuation indication by the second starting winning device 33b in the low entering state It becomes easy to separate and count the numbers. Thereby, the usability for the hole side etc. can be further improved.

  In addition, in the hall computer HC, based on the finalized number of variation display by the game ball entering the second starting winning device 33b in each ball entering state, the game ball to the second starting prize device 33b in each ball entering state It is possible to easily grasp the ball entry condition. Therefore, based on the obtained data, on the hole side, adjustment (for example, even in the low ball entering state) pertaining to the ball entering the second starting winning device 33b in at least one of the low ball entering state and the high ball entering state It becomes possible to easily perform adjustment etc. to make the configuration that entry of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b is relatively easy to occur. Thereby, the usability for the hole side can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in the hall computer HC, a second confirmation signal (more specifically, information about determination of fluctuation display by entering the game ball to the second start winning device 33b, obtained directly from the second confirmation signal) is used. It is determined whether or not the entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second start winning device 33b is a predetermined proper state. Therefore, for example, the process for indirectly obtaining the information on the determination of the fluctuation display by entering the gaming ball to the second start winning device 33b is unnecessary from the first determination signal and the third determination signal, and the determination process is performed. The burden can be reduced.

  In addition, on the hall side, it is possible to detect an illegal act or to judge whether or not the entering state of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b is appropriate, from the judgment result by the hall computer HC. It is easily possible. Thereby, on the hole side, appropriate processing according to the determination result can be more reliably performed. For example, it is possible to more easily perform adjustment and the like related to the ball entering of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether or not the entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second starting winning device 33b is the predetermined proper state based on both the determination signal and the entering signal. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the ball entry state of the gaming ball with respect to the second start winning device 33b is the proper state. In addition, based on the obtained high-precision data, the hole side can perform more appropriate processing according to the determination result. For example, it is possible to more accurately perform adjustment and the like related to the entry of the gaming ball to the second start winning device 33b.

  Further, in the hall computer HC, the determination as to whether or not the ball entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second starting winning device 33b is the proper state is executed separately for each of the high ball entering state and the low ball entering state. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately grasp the entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second start winning device 33b in each of the high entering state and the low entering state. Therefore, on the hole side, processing according to the determination result can be performed more appropriately. For example, it is possible to accurately perform adjustment or the like related to the game ball entering the second starting winning device 33b in the low ball entry state.

  In addition, even in the case where entry of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33b is likely to occur as in the present embodiment, the second starting winning on the hole computer HC is based on the number of inputs of the second confirmation signal. It is possible to grasp the approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the device 33b. Furthermore, as in the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the first start winning device 33a, and the gaming being paid out by entering the gaming balls into the second start winning device 33b. Even when the number of balls is different, the approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the first start winning device 33a, which is grasped based on the number of inputs of the first determination signal, and the second From the approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the second starting winning device 33b, which is grasped based on the number of inputs of the confirmation signal, by entering the gaming balls into both starting winning devices 33a, 33b It is possible to accurately grasp the total number of game balls paid out. Therefore, the usability for the hole side can be further enhanced.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are unitized as the start winning unit 401, and the start winning unit 401 includes the first start winning device 33a and the second start. A front decoration portion 403 is provided to collectively cover the front of the winning device 33b. For this reason, the visibility of the gaming ball moving around the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is relatively lowered, and thus the gaming ball is the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device. It also becomes unclear as to which of the devices 33b has entered the ball. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, even in the low ball entry state, the second start winning device 33b is relatively easily opened, and the variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 although the game ball is fired If the time zone during which the player feels stress-free is reduced, the player is only required to make the game ball enter the back side of the front decoration 403. A ball can enter either of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b, and the game can be progressed with the feeling that a winning lottery is received. That is, even if the ball entering rate of the game ball to the first start winning device 33a is low, if the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b relatively easily, the acceptance lottery is constantly received Therefore, there is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it becomes difficult to visually identify which of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b the game ball has entered. Also, it does not matter whether the game ball easily enters the first start winning device 33a. As a result, even if the ease of entering the gaming ball into the first starting winning device 33a is reduced, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression resulting from that.

  Also, as a matter of course, if the wing member 37 is in the closed position, it is not possible to cause the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b. For this reason, the player who has admitted that the wing member 37 is in the closed position shifts his eyes to the first start winning device 33a and observes whether or not the gaming ball enters the first start winning device 33a. I tend to.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, the functional position which is disposed in front of the blade member 37 and can cover the front of the blade member 37 in the open position, and the standby which can cover the front of the blade member 37 in the closed position. The game ball passes through the game area behind the pseudo blade member 431 when the pseudo blade member 431 is displaceable between the positions, the blade member 37 is in the closed position, and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position. It is configured to be possible.

  That is, even if it is not the timing to make the second start winning device 33b open (displace the blade member 37 to the open position), as if the blade member 37 is displaced by displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position. A quasi-vane release aspect is derived as if it were in the open position. Thereby, the opportunity which the predetermined | prescribed action related to the blade member 37 from the visual recognition aspect in which the 2nd start winning prize apparatus 33b is made into a closed state can occur can be increased. Therefore, if it is a player who is interested in the second start winning device 33b being in the open state, if it is recognized that some action has occurred in the second start winning device 33b in the closed state, the second start winning is achieved. It is also conceivable to turn the line of sight to the second start winning device 33b if the device 33b is in the open state. However, in practice, there may be a pseudo-vane release mode (operation of only pseudo-vane member 431), and the pseudo-vane release mode is an aspect as if the wing member 37 is in the open position. Therefore, with regard to the second start winning device 33b, it is only if the blade member 37 is in the open position or the pseudo blade open mode is derived only by looking at or looking into the end of the field of view. It is difficult to distinguish whether the blade member 37 is in the closed position, or it may be mistaken (instantly) for the blade member 37 being displaced to the open position.

  As described above, the pseudo-vane release mode is merely to make it look as if the vane member 37 was opened, and although it appears that the vane member 37 is opened, the second start winning device 33b Under the condition that there is no sign that the gaming ball has entered the ball, the entering state of the gaming ball of the second starting winning device 33b and the appearance of the second starting winning device 33b do not necessarily coincide. Then, if the pseudo-feather opening mode is repeated to a certain extent, the gaming ball is constantly entering the second starting winning device 33b etc. and there is no delay in the game (the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device). Unless you are in a state where you are forced to play a disadvantageous game due to the game ball entering the game 33b too much in total), it does not care much about whether or not the wing member 37 is opened You can get it to your heart condition. As a result, even if the ease of entering the game ball to the first start winning device 33a is reduced, the effect that the deterioration of the impression caused by that can be suppressed is more It will be played more.

  Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing at which the second start winning device 33b is brought into the open state (or the closed state) by the pseudo blade open mode. Therefore, the advanced player who can play a game such as firing the game ball only at the timing when the second start winning device 33b is opened and the game ball can enter the ball, and the player of the beginner It is possible to suppress the situation that the gap is open.

  In addition, it is possible to perform effects as mere liveliness regardless of the opening and closing of the blade member 37 and the opening and closing of the blade member 37 using the pseudo blade open mode. In addition, when the game is in progress, the pseudo-feather open mode becomes part of the game scene, and becomes accent and bustling in the game, or becomes a rhythm (feeling lonely when lost), and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Furthermore, the pseudo-vane opening aspect can be made more realistic by deriving the pseudo-vane opening aspect using the pseudo-vane member 431. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide a pseudo-vane opening means imitating the aspect of the wing member 37 at the rear of the wing member 37, but in this case, such pseudo-vane opening means is disposed relatively backward. There is a concern that the pseudo-vane opening means may not be visible even if it is in the pseudo-vane opening mode. In addition, the game ball may pass in front of the artificial feather opening means in the artificial feather opening mode. By these, there exists a possibility that it may be grasped | ascertained immediately that pseudo | simulation blade open | release aspect is pseudo | simulation. In this respect, by providing the artificial blade member 431 in front of the blade member 37, the above concern can be eliminated.

  In addition, since the pseudo blade member 431 can be displaced to the functional position while the blade member 37 is in the closed position, the pseudo game ball is not caused to enter the second start winning device 33b more than necessary. The mode in which the wing member 431 operates (a mode in which the whale moves the forelimbs, a mode in which the second start-up winning device 33 b (subtlely) opens and closes, etc.) can be sufficiently used for effecting and the like.

  In particular, when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the standby position to the functional position so as to cover the front of the blade member 37. It is done. Furthermore, when the blade member 37 in the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is also configured to be displaced from the functional position to the standby position so as to cover the front of the blade member 37. It is done. Therefore, when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the blade member 37 is viewed from the front, and although the blade member 37 is in the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, the pseudo blade member 431 is Can be the same as in the front-viewing aspect (the pseudo-vane members 431 in the functional position are both visible). Furthermore, since the blade member 37 in the middle of displacement is also covered by the pseudo blade member 431, it is difficult to understand that the blade member 37 is displaced. Therefore, the reality of the false blade open mode can be further enhanced.

  Further, by adopting a configuration in which the front surface side of the blade member 37 is not directly exposed to the front, the aspect on the front surface side of the blade member 37 does not have to be the same as the embodiment of the pseudo blade member 431. For example, it is not necessary to perform processing such as drawing a figure in particular (in this example, it is not necessary to make the forelimb of the whale into a shape that simulates it). For this reason, the configuration of the blade member 37 can be simplified, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member 37, the figure or the like rubs against the pseudo blade member 431, It is possible to prevent a decrease in sex and the like.

  Furthermore, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are configured to be rotatable, and the pseudo shaft to be connected to the pseudo blade member 431 inside the substantially cylindrical blade shaft 425 connected to the blade member 37 433 is inserted. Thereby, the rotation axis of the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 can be extended on the same straight line. For this reason, the operation of the blade member 37 and the operation of the dummy blade member 431 can be relatively easily synchronized. Therefore, for example, even during the displacement of the blade member 37 between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member 37 to make the front of the blade member 37 It can be covered reliably. Therefore, the operation and effect such as making the whereabouts of the blade member 37 indistinct can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the blade member 37 is made of a colorless and transparent material, and the upper surface (guide surface) of the blade member 37 in the open position is positioned lower than the upper side of the dummy blade member 431 in the functional position. Also by doing this, it is possible to make the blade member 37 difficult to visually recognize (the operation and location of the blade member 37 become difficult to confirm). Therefore, the effect of enhancing the reality of the pseudo-blade open mode is further enhanced.

  In addition, by providing the front decoration portion 403, the sense of unity of the peripheral portions of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b can be enhanced. For this reason, if the game ball is shot to aim at the front decoration part 403, it will be a relatively easy-to-understand visually recognizable image that one of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b will enter. Can. In addition, more dynamic decoration and the like can be performed on the front decoration portion 403 that covers the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b collectively, and the design can be improved.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, the fore decoration part 403 includes the character display part 441 in the shape of a whale excluding the forelimb, and the pseudo feather member 431 is formed to simulate the forelimb of the whale. And, by displacing the artificial feather member 431 to the functional position, the whole image of the whale is configured to come up. For this reason, while gathering attention to the aspect of the whale that the forelimb moves, the player's interest in the appearance that the game ball enters the start winning device 33a, 33b decreases the visibility of the back side of the front decoration 403 Can be lowered. Therefore, the operation and effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression caused by the decrease in the ease of entering the gaming ball into the first start winning device 33a will be further exhibited.

  Furthermore, the front of the wing member 37 in the closed position is configured to be covered by the character display portion 441 of the front decoration portion 403. For this reason, it becomes more difficult to determine whether the false blade open mode is only derived or whether the blade member 37 is also in the open position (whether or not the blade member 37 is in the closed position), The artificial blade member 431 is provided, and the effect by deriving the effect that the second start winning device 33b may be in the open state is further achieved.

  In addition, the tip end portion of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is positioned outward of the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403. Thereby, it can be made easy to recognize that the false blade member 431 has been displaced to the functional position. Therefore, while concealing the operation of the wing member 37 as much as possible, by actively appealing the operation of the false blade member 431, the user can enjoy the change of the visual recognition mode in the start winning unit 401 or The effect (pseudo feather effect processing etc.) to be executed using the operation of 431 can be made easier to understand.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the opening and closing control (starting winning apparatus control processing) of the blade member 37 of the second starting winning apparatus 33b is executed by the main controller 261, and the opening and closing control of the pseudo blade 431 (pseudo blade opening control processing The pseudo blade effect process is configured to be executed by the sub control device 262. For this reason, the control load on the main control device 261 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the main control device 261 performs an open confirmation command (step for indicating that the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position) prior to the processing (step S2410 etc.) for displacing the blade member 37 to the open position While outputting S2307) to the sub controller 262, the sub controller 262 is configured to displace the pseudo blade member 431 to the standby position (step S4604) when the release confirmation command is received. For this reason, when the blade member 37 in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member 431 in the middle of the displacement can not be covered by the pseudo blade member 431 because the pseudo blade member 431 is already in the functional position It is possible to avoid situations such as

  In addition, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to have a larger front surface area than the blade member 37, and when the blade member 37 is in the open position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position, The side portion on the standby position side of the pseudo blade member 431 is located closer to the closed position side than the side surface. Furthermore, when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position, the side portion on the functional position side of the pseudo blade member 431 is more than the surface on the open position side of the blade member 37 , Located on the open position side. That is, since the blade member 37 is controlled by the main controller 261 and the pseudo blade member 431 is controlled by the sub controller 262, the operation start timing of the blade member 37 and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member 431 are slightly There is a possibility of shifting. In this respect, even if the blade member 37 is displaced slightly in advance by configuring the operation direction side of the blade member 37 that can operate earlier to be additionally covered with the pseudo blade member 431, the pseudo blade member 431 is used. It will fall within the covered range. Therefore, it is easy to understand whether or not the blade member 37 is displaced, or to prevent the deterioration of the design due to the difference between the operation of the blade member 37 and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431. can do.

  In the present embodiment, when the detection of the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b is performed, the corresponding storage lamp 46a or 46b is turned on, and the decorative symbol display device is turned on. A hold icon 461 is configured to be displayed in the 42 hold display areas 462. Therefore, even if the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are not directly viewed, the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b can be played by visually recognizing the holding icon 461 etc. It is possible for the ball to enter the ball and to grasp (or rather to grasp) that the right to receive the acceptance lottery is obtained. Therefore, the opportunity to directly visually recognize the start winning devices 33a, 33b is reduced, and even if the ball entering rate to the first starting winning device 33a is relatively low, the first and second starting winning devices 33a, 33b If you don't care about entering the game ball into either of the first start winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b if the overall pitch is not low It is possible to prevent the situation (the first start winning device 33a does not fall into a situation). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress a situation in which a decrease in interest is caused due to the game ball not readily entering the first start winning device 33a. On the other hand, even if it becomes somewhat difficult to see how the game ball enters the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b, it is firmly held with the holding icon 461 etc. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

  Further, in the covered area (inside area of the start winning unit 401) of the game area covered with the front decoration portion 403 in the front, a pseudo winning detection switch 445 capable of detecting the game ball moving in the covered area is provided. It is done. In this embodiment, when the detection of the pseudo prize detection switch 445 is performed, the decoration symbol display device 42 is different from the hold icon 461 (the full hold icon 463) that simulates the hold icon 461 (the full hold icon 463). A pseudo hold icon 466 of the aspect is configured to be derivable. In addition, when detection of the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b is performed, the temporary holding icon 462 corresponding to the detection is temporarily output in the same manner as the pseudo holding icon 466. The hold icon 464 may be derived. Therefore, based on the detection of the pseudo prize detection switch 445, it is possible to perform an effect such as the gaming ball entering the covered area (start winning unit 401) may enter the start winning devices 33a and 33b. . Therefore, it is possible to increase presentation opportunities and types of presentation, and to achieve diversification of presentation and the like. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of deriving the pseudo feather open mode (representation of whether the game ball has entered the start winning device 33a, 33b), and it is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are displayed as if the main hold icon 463 is blurred and are derived with a dynamic bubble display 467 displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side. Therefore, it can be reliably grasped that the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are not the main hold icon 463. Therefore, for example, if the pseudo holding icon 466 and the temporary holding icon 464 are different from the real holding icon 463 if they are viewed closely, the game may be played if it is in a similar or indistinguishable manner. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a person thinks that the false holding icon 466 is a true holding icon 463 to cause a feeling of distrust or the like.

  It should be noted that since the aspect of the present holding icon 463 is determined based on the contents of the corresponding variable display, it is possible to be interested by the aspect of the present holding icon 463. Therefore, the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 can further enhance the interest in directing whether or not to become the main hold icon 463.

  In addition, the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is electrically connected to the sub controller 262. Therefore, by reducing the number of information input to the main control device 261 and the number of configurations for inputting information to the main control device 261 as much as possible, the control load on the main control device 261 can be reduced, or to the main control device 261. It is possible to curb fraud, etc.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the detection of the pseudo prize detection switch 445 is performed, the state in which the suspension of the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (the decorative symbol display device 42) is less than eight. That is, the pseudo hold icon 466 corresponding to the detection of the pseudo prize detection switch 445 is not newly displayed unless the detection by the start winning switches 224a and 224b is effective as a trigger for the success or failure lottery (step See S4506). Therefore, in a state where there is no habit of displaying the temporary holding icon 464 and the main holding icon 463, the false holding icon 466 is clearly displayed as the false holding icon 466 is displayed. It can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a decrease in interest is caused due to the apparent false holding icon 466 being drawn out indiscriminately.

  In addition, a guidance platform for guiding the game ball to the pseudo winning detection switch 445 at a position downstream of the second start winning device 33b in the covered region covered with the front decoration portion 403 in the gaming region. 446 are provided. Further, at a position adjacent to the lower side of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position, a guide nail 448 for changing the advancing direction of the gaming ball (in this example, guiding toward the guide stand 446) is provided.

  For example, it is assumed that the game ball has reached a guide point guided to the ball receiving portion 405 of the second start winning device 33b by the wing member 37 when the game ball enters the covered area and the wing member 37 is in the open position. Also, when the wing member 37 is in the closed position, the gaming ball naturally flows down the game area without being guided by the wing member 37 and is discharged to the outside of the covered area. At this time, when the track where the gaming ball has entered the covering area and the track after the gaming ball has been discharged from the covering area extend substantially in a straight line, the gaming ball that entered the covering area just before the first start winning Without entering the device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b, it is immediately grasped as being discharged from the covered area.

  In this respect, as described above, the provision of the guide stand 446 and the guide nail 448 changes the traveling direction of the gaming ball in the covered area, or delays the advancing speed of the gaming ball, so It becomes difficult to track the whereabouts of the game ball after entering. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence relationship between the game ball entering the covered area and the game ball jumping out of the covered area to a place easily visible outward, and the game ball becomes the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning combination It is possible to create more situations in which the device 33b may or may not be entered.

  In particular, by visually recognizing the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, it is possible to grasp whether or not the game ball has entered the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. Of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b, so that the decorative symbol display device 42 is held rather than checking whether the game ball has entered the ball or not. It can be made easy to shift to the game property which confirms the ball entering the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b by the icon 461. For this reason, it is possible to suppress that the player can not concentrate on the effect, stress buildup, etc. by visually recognizing that the game ball does not easily enter the first start winning device 33a.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A: Shape and design of front decoration portion, etc.) In the above embodiment, the front decoration portion 403 is formed in a substantially disk shape, but the shape, design, etc. of the front decoration portion 403 Can be changed as appropriate. For example, the part that covers the first start winning device 33a and the part that covers the second start winning device 33b may be configured as separate bodies (separate bodies may be combined) And those separately constructed may be arranged adjacent to each other). Further, for example, “a reef” may be drawn on the front decoration part 403, and a “fish school” may be drawn on the artificial feather member 431. The design of the front decoration 403 may be completely unrelated to the design of the artificial feather member 431.

  Furthermore, for example, model information (model name, probability of winning lottery, etc.) may be displayed on the front decoration part 403. In addition, it teaches that the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b exist for the front decoration part 403, and the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. It is also possible to provide a display for teaching the position of the player, or teaching that the position for aiming the gaming ball is here. That is, since the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are unitized and a little confusing, it is feared that the player may be puzzled as to where to aim for the game ball, but Such an indication can suppress such a concern. Moreover, when it is difficult to understand only by the display guidance in the front decoration part 403, guidance is displayed also in other parts (for example, display in which fluctuation display of the normal screen is not performed from the demonstration display screen in the decorative symbol display device 42) In such a case, the display screen may be configured to provide a display for guiding the aiming position of the gaming ball. In addition, in the above embodiment, the front decoration portion 403 is configured to be transparent by configuring the front decoration portion 403 with a transparent or translucent resin. By forming a plurality of slits or holes, transparency may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the front decoration portion 403 (character display portion 441), an index portion is provided so as to be a reference for determining whether the distance between the nails of the life nail 406 provided in a pair on the left and right is wide or narrow. It may be configured. For example, as shown in FIG. 50, of the whales as the character display portion 441, the two divided tip portions of the tail 701 located in the vicinity of the life nail 406 are sharpened, and the tip portions are respectively a pair of life nails. It may be configured to be disposed immediately below 406. In this case, the portion of the tail 701 of the whale where the distance between the tip parts is almost the same as the distance between the nails 406 constitutes the index part.

  In this case, by comparing the pair of left and right life nails 406 and the tail 701 of the whale, it can be accurately and quickly judged whether the interval between the life nails 406 is wide or narrow. . Therefore, the proper position of (the head of) the life nail 406 can be grasped instantaneously, and it can be relatively judged whether or not the maintenance for the life nail 406 is necessary, or the player can When the interval of the life nail 406 is narrow compared with the tail 701 of the whale, the game can be avoided so as not to be disadvantageous to oneself. As a result, the distance between the nails 406 can be made as constant as possible, and the variation of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced with respect to the ease of entering the gaming ball into the first start winning device 33a. . In particular, since the indicator (the tail 701 of the whale) is provided in the front decoration 403, it is close to the tip (head) of the nail 406, thereby more reliably grasping the tilt of the nail 406. can do.

  The mode of the index portion is not particularly limited. For example, the index portion having the same width as that between the pair of life nails 406 may be provided immediately below the pair of life nails 406. Under the nail 406, an indicator may be provided to indicate the position of each game nail 406, and the character display 441 or the like does not constitute the indicator, but the indicator in the shape of the front decoration 403. It is also possible to constitute a part. In addition, an index portion may be provided on the pseudo blade member 431 or the blade member 37.

  The shape or the like of the base plate 402 of the start winning unit 401 is not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the slider 411 may be omitted. Further, the ball receiving portion 405 can be configured separately from the front decoration portion 403.

  (B: Target covered by the front decoration part) In the above embodiment, the front decoration part 403 is configured to collectively cover the front of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b. It may be configured to cover only the front, or may be configured to cover other winning devices (variable winning device 32) and the like. In the above embodiment, the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are arranged vertically, but such arrangement is not particularly limited. For example, they are arranged horizontally You may Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the first start winning device 33a is configured so that the game ball can always enter the ball, and the second start winning device 33b can not enter the ball in the open state in which the game ball can enter the ball. Although the state is changed to the closed state, for example, both game balls may be able to always enter the ball, or both may be changed to the open state and the closed state.

  In addition, the front decoration portion 403 may be configured to also cover the front and upper sides of the pair of left and right nails 406. In this case, it can be made more difficult to visually recognize that the gaming ball enters the first start winning device 33a. Therefore, the determination that the game ball has entered the first start winning device 33a is based on various things (display of the hold icon 461, etc.) derived as a result of the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a. You can get them to go. As a result, it is possible to further promote the game that is not particularly concerned with the pace at which the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a. In the case where this configuration is adopted, the projection length of the life nail 406 from the front of the game board 30 is shortened or the front decoration area 403 is avoided in order to avoid interference between the life nail 406 and the front decoration 403. Alternatively, a nail hole may be formed to allow the nail 406 to be inserted.

  (C: Operation of pseudo blade member, etc.) In the above embodiment, when the blade member 37 is in the open position or in the middle of displacement, the front is covered by the pseudo blade member 431, but for example, The blade member 37 may be configured to be in the open position while the pseudo blade member 431 may be in the standby position.

  Furthermore, the effect using the pseudo blade member 431 and the trigger for operating the pseudo blade member 431 are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, in the case of variation display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42, a display to the effect that the production button 125 is desired to be operated is derived at the timing of whether the reach state occurs, and the production button 125 is operated. The pseudo blade member 431 operates according to the contents of the variable display (for example, when the transition to the reach state is not performed, the pseudo blade member 431 operates small each time by operating the effect button 125, Even if it operates, it is constituted so that false blade member 431 does not reach a functional position, when it shifts to a reach state, false blade based on operation of production button 125 once or a predetermined number of times, false feather The member 431 may be configured to be displaced to the functional position). However, the wing members 37 do not operate along with the effects using the pseudo wing members 431 and are maintained at the closed position unless winning in the ball entry support lottery.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, it does not specifically limit about composition for operating blade member 37 and false blade member 431 of the 2nd starting winning a prize device 33b. For example, in the above embodiment, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 are operated by the motor, but may be operated using another drive means such as a solenoid. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the motor is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the pair of blade members 37 and the pseudo blade members 431. However, for example, a single drive means a pair of blade members 37 and the pseudo blade members 431 May be configured to operate. In the case where the pseudo side motor 432 is provided in a one-to-one relationship with the pseudo blade member 431 as in the above embodiment, only one of the pair of pseudo blade members 431 can be used for rendering using the pseudo blade member 431. It is also possible to move, or to perform separate operations on the left and right.

  Further, although the area of the front surface of the pseudo blade member 431 is larger than the area of the front surface of the blade member 37, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to be able to substantially cover the front of the blade member 37. For example, it may be configured to have substantially the same area (the same shape in front view). As in the above embodiment, when the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is above (the standby position side and the closed position side) the upper surface of the blade member 37 in the open position, the main Even if the blade member 37 controlled by the control device 261 precedes the pseudo blade member 431 and starts displacement to the closed position side, the blade member 37 is exposed in a region where the front is not covered by the pseudo blade member 431 In addition, it is possible to prevent the situation where it is possible to prevent the start winning unit 401 from being seen by the player generally positioned above the position where the start winning unit 401 is provided. When the blade member 37 is worn as it is, the blade member 37 can be hidden as much as possible by the pseudo blade member 431.

  In the above embodiment, a predetermined panel may be interposed between the pseudo blade member 431 and the blade member 37, or the pseudo blade member 431 may be provided in front of the front decoration portion 403. In this case, the game ball collides with the step formed on the rear surface of the front decoration 403 and the false blade member 431 in the functional position (the upper side of the false blade member 431) and the ball is repelled. You can avoid the situation.

  (D; Material of pseudo-vane member) Further, in the above embodiment, the vane member 37 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, but for example, the pseudo-vane member viewed from at least the front side of the vane member 37 It may be configured to be the same as the aspect of the front face of 431 (corresponding to the above embodiment, in a visual aspect imitating a forelimb of a whale). In this case, when the wing member 37 is in the open position, the picture of the whale is completed without the pseudo feather member 431 being displaced to the functional position, and the wing member 37 is in the open position. The mode of the start winning unit 401 when the 431 is in the standby position and the mode of the start winning unit 401 when the blade member 37 is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member 431 is in the functional position are substantially the same. it can.

  However, in the case of adopting such a configuration, the front and rear positions of the front surface of the blade member 37 and the front surface of the pseudo blade member 431 are shifted even if the shape in front view is the same. Therefore, as in the above embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the pseudo blade member 431 is also displaced to the functional position when the blade member 37 is in the open position, the blade member 37 may or may not be in the open position. However, the aspect of a front view can be made into the aspect of the front of the same pseudo-vane member 431, and the pseudo-vane opening aspect can be made more realistic. In addition, for example, by making the color of the blade member 37 the same as the color of the base plate 402, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the location of the blade member 37 as much as possible.

  (E: Shape of pseudo-vane member etc.) In the above embodiment, the tip of the pseudo-vane member 431 in the functional position is configured to be positioned outward from the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403 You may comprise so that it may be settled inside inner periphery rather than a peripheral edge. In particular, when the tip end edge of the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced along the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403, the design can be improved. Even in the case where the tip end portion of the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to be fitted on the inner peripheral side relative to the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403, the pseudo blade is displaced to the functional position as in the above embodiment. The member 431 is configured to project to the rear position of the general part 442 having higher transparency than the character display part 441 in the front decoration part 403, so that, for example, the character display part 441 and the like have a relatively high transparency. As compared with the case where the displacement is performed only behind the low portion, it is possible to easily confirm the pseudo blade member 431 displaced to the functional position. Further, the three-dimensional shape of the pseudo blade member 431 is not limited to a plate shape, and for example, a substantially square frame shape which is open in the displacement direction of the pseudo blade member 431 and can accommodate the blade member 37 inside; It may be configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section in which a part of the square frame shape is cut away.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, a pressing recess 711 opened forward and downward is provided at the lower portion on the front side of the blade member 37, and the pressing can be inserted into the pressing recess 711 on the rear surface side of the dummy blade member 431. The projection 712 may be provided. In this case, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, the blade member 37 is mainly driven (the blade side motor 421 comes first, or only the blade side motor 421) is driven (a pseudo blade Even if the operation of the member 431 is slightly delayed, the pseudo blade member 431 is pressed by the blade member 37 and displaced from the standby position to the functional position.

  On the other hand, when the blade member 37 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the pseudo blade member 431 is mainly driven (the pseudo side motor 432 comes first or only the pseudo side motor 432), Even if the operation of 37 is slightly delayed), the blade member 37 is pushed by the pseudo blade member 431 and displaced from the open position to the closed position. As described above, by providing the pressing concave portion 711 and the pressing convex portion 712, the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 can be prevented from operating separately, and the blade member 37 and the pseudo blade member 431 can be It can be moved synchronously as if it were a single piece. Therefore, the operation of the blade member 37 displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member 431 displaced to the functional position deviate, and the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position or only the pseudo blade member 431 It is possible to more reliably avoid the situation where it is easy to see if it has just been displaced to the functional position.

  In addition, the dummy blade member 431 in FIG. 48 arranges the pressing convex portion 712 as much as possible on the axial center side of the dummy blade member 431 so that the dummy blade member 431 is displaced to the functional position alone. Due to the ball colliding with the pressing convex portion 712, the game ball is prevented from being repelled irregularly or damage to the pressing convex portion 712 is suppressed. However, the formation position of the pressing convex portion 712 is not particularly limited. For example, the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position is driven to push the blade member 37 in the open position and displace it to the closed position. In this case, by disposing the pressing convex portion 712 as far as possible from the axial center of the artificial blade member 431, the force required to push the blade member 37 in the open position and displace it to the closed position is minimized. it can.

  Even when the pressing concave portion 711 and the pressing convex portion 712 are provided, only the pseudo blade member 431 is on the function position side while the blade member 37 is in the closed position from the state where the pseudo blade member 431 is in the standby position. It is possible to displace. Further, by providing the pressing convex portion 712 on the rotation shaft side of the pseudo blade member 431 as much as possible, it is possible to minimize the decrease in the visibility of the game ball moving behind the translucent pseudo blade member 431. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper surface of the pressing recess 711 constitutes a blade side pressing part, and the pressing convex part 712 constitutes a pseudo side pressing part.

  In the above embodiment, the blade member 37 is configured to be accommodated on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration portion 403, but at least the tip of the blade member 37 in the open position is the front decoration portion. You may comprise so that it may be located outward rather than the outer periphery of 403. FIG. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the pseudo blade member 431 is configured to be able to cover the entire front of the blade member 37. For example, the tip of the blade member 37 is ahead of the tip of the pseudo blade member 431. You may employ | adopt the structure which can not be partially covered, such as protruding to (the centrifugal direction of a rotating shaft). That is, for example, the tip of the blade member 37 in the open position protrudes to the outer peripheral side than the outer peripheral edge of the front decorative portion 403 and protrudes more than the tip of the pseudo blade member 431 in the functional position. In the case of adoption, the tip end of the blade member 37 is exposed to the front, which makes it easy to confirm that the blade member 37 is in the open position.

  (F: Configuration in which the Pseudo-Vane Member is Omitted) In the above embodiment, the pseudo-vane member 431 capable of covering the front of the vane member 37 is provided, but it is also possible to omit the pseudo-vane member 431. In addition, in the case where the false blade member 431 is omitted, in order to make it difficult to understand whether the blade member 37 is in the open position or in the closed position, in the front decoration portion 403, the front of the blade member 37 in the open position Corresponding to the position, the character display portion 441 is configured to be drawn also for the forelimb of the whale, and the front of the wing member 37 in the open position is covered by the display (semi-transparent) of the forelimb of the whale It may be configured.

  The wing member 37 in the closed position may be configured to be covered by the body of a whale or the like, as in the above embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the forelimb of the whale constitutes the covering means (the covering part at the time of opening), and the display of the body of the whale constitutes the covering means (the covering at the time of closing). Incidentally, in the above embodiment, the artificial feather member 431 in the functional position constitutes the covering means at the time of opening, and the display of the whale's body (and the artificial feather member 431 in the waiting position) constitutes the covering means at the time of closing.

  (G; Modification of Pseudo-Vane Opening Mode) Also, instead of or in addition to the pseudo-vane opening mode as if the wing member 37 by the pseudo-vane member 431 is in the open position, another pseudo-vane opening is It is also possible to provide another pseudo-vane opening means which can derive the aspect.

  (G-1; light guide plate) For example, as shown in FIG. 50, in the front decoration part 403, by making light incident from the side, an aspect imitating a forelimb of a whale comes to the surface where light is incident. It may be configured as follows. More specifically, the front decoration portion 403 is incident on the front decoration portion 403 from the side with respect to the range surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 50A (hereinafter, referred to as “light emitting portion 721”). Processing is performed so as to make the reflection angle of the light different from that of the other portions (it is a light guide plate that is not totally reflected in the front decoration portion 403 and is irradiated forward). In the present embodiment, the light emitting unit 721 constitutes a pseudo open object.

  In addition, light is made to enter the light emitting portion 721 from a portion corresponding to the root of the forefoot of a whale. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, a cylindrical support portion 724 projecting from the front surface of the blade member 722 is provided corresponding to the front of a portion of the blade member 722 connected to the blade shaft 723. The bearing portion 724 is inserted into the bearing portion 438 (see FIG. 45 (b)) formed in a circular concave shape at a position corresponding to the root of the front leg of the whale on the rear surface side of the front decoration portion 403 and supported thereby. .

  The blade shaft 723 has a cylindrical shape, and a core rod 726 including a pseudo light source 725 is inserted through a part of the outer peripheral surface of the front (front) end of the blade shaft 723. The core rod 726 also has a cylindrical shape, and the wiring for the pseudo light source 725 is inserted through the inside. In the present embodiment, the front end portion of the core rod 726 is configured to project forward beyond the blade shaft 723 and be accommodated inside the pivotal support portion 724 of the blade member 722. That is, the pseudo light source 725 is positioned on the inner peripheral side of the bearing portion 438 of the front decoration portion 403.

  Further, the core rod 726 is also provided with a gear 727 connected to a motor (not shown), and is configured to be rotatable. In this embodiment, the core rod 726 is a position where the pseudo light source 725 faces the light emitting portion 721 (see FIG. 50 (b)) provided at the same position as the blade member 722 in the open position in front view. Of the light source 725 facing the light emitting portion 721 (see FIG. 50 (c)) provided at the same position as the blade member 722 at the intermediate position between the open position and the closed position in front view It is configured to be displaceable. In the state of FIG. 50A, the pseudo light source 725 is turned off.

  Then, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the above embodiment, the same condition as the condition for displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position alone is satisfied), the blade member 722 to be opened and closed is imitated After emitting the light emitting portion 721 imitating the blade member 722 in the middle of opening as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the light emitting portion 721 imitating the blade member 722 in the open position as shown in FIG. 50 (b). After a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 50C, the light emitting portion 721 imitating the wing member 722 in the process of closing is caused to emit light, and then the pseudo light source 725 is turned off.

  Even in the case of adopting the configuration as described above, the pseudo blade open mode can be derived. In addition, since the pseudo feather open mode can be derived in the front decoration portion 403, for example, compared to the case where the pseudo feather open mode is derived at the rear position than the wing member 722, The ease can be improved.

  When the blade member 722 operates, the light emitting portion 721 may be synchronized as much as possible to emit light. In this case, the mode in which the blade member 722 is displaced to the open position and the mode in which the pseudo blade is released can be as close as possible. Further, instead of rotating the pseudo light source 725, a plurality of pseudo light sources capable of emitting light from the respective light emitting portions 721 may be provided.

  (G-2: transmission hole) Further, for example, in the base plate 402 for attaching the start winning unit 401 to the game board 30, the light is incident from the rear to imitate the blade member 37 at the site where the light is incident. You may comprise so that the aspect which carried out may rise. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (c), the main body of the blade member 731 is made of an opaque resin, and a rectangular opening is formed on the front side, The prism plate 732 is fitted there. Further, the blade member 731 incorporates a light source.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), in the base plate 734, in a front view, a position where the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 located in the open position is located, and an intermediate position between the open position and the closed position. A transmission hole having the same shape as that of the prism plate 732 is formed in correspondence with the portion of the blade member 731 located at where the prism plate 732 is located, and the dummy prism plate 735 is fitted therein. Further, on the rear of each dummy prism plate 735, a dummy light source for making each dummy prism plate 735 emit light is installed. In the present embodiment, the light emitting prism plate 732 constitutes a light emitting means, and the pseudo prism plate 735 constitutes a pseudo open object.

  In this embodiment, when the blade member 731 is at a position other than the closed position, the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 emits light. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the above embodiment, the same condition as the condition for displacing the pseudo blade member 431 to the functional position alone is satisfied), the blade member 731 to be opened and closed is imitated. After the pseudo prism plate 735 imitating the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 in the process of opening is made to emit light, the pseudo prism plate 735 imitating the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 in the open position is made to emit light Thereafter, after the pseudo prism plate 735 imitating the prism plate 732 of the blade member 731 in the process of closing is made to emit light, the pseudo light source is turned off.

  Even in the case of adopting the configuration as described above, the pseudo blade open mode can be derived. In addition, in the rear of the blade member 731 (base plate 734), the pseudo blade open mode can be derived with a relatively simple configuration. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a prism plate 732 capable of deriving the light emission mode of the blade member 731 is provided, and the pseudo blade open mode simulates the light emission mode of the prism plate 732. In this manner, the vane member 731 is in the open position by setting the vane member 731 to a visible mode in which light is emitted by itself, and a pseudo-vane release mode using the pseudo prism plate 735. It is possible to connect more strongly (it is likely to be confused in the intuitive judgment of glance). In addition, it is possible to simplify the configuration (shape) for deriving the pseudo blade open mode (it becomes a sufficiently pseudo mode by imitating only the prism plate 732 instead of the entire blade member 731).

  In addition, the timing of derivation | leading-out of a pseudo | simulation blade open aspect is not specifically limited, For example, you may comprise so that it may be derived | led-out regularly (for example, almost always). In addition, for example, as the opening pattern of the second start winning device 33b, short open for a short time of open state and long open for a long time of open state are set. In order to make the operation of the blade member 37 relatively easy to understand, the operation of the blade member 37 is relatively incomprehensible, and the operation of the blade member 37 is inhibited in the case of a long open by disguising the operation of the blade member 37. It may be configured. However, as in the above embodiment, in the configuration in which the operation of the blade member 37 is easier to understand when the pseudo blade member 431 is operated together with the blade member 37, the pseudo blade member 431 is It will be made to operate with the blade member 37. In addition, long opening may be daringly made incomprehensible.

  (H: Movable Cover Means) In the above embodiment, a transparent movable movable part (movable cover means) such as the pseudo-vane member 431 is provided so as to cover the front of the vane member 37 However, the movable covering part guides the game ball to the periphery of a predetermined winning device, in particular, around (the game ball moving around) the winning opening, and guiding means for guiding the gaming ball to the predetermined winning device (slider of the above embodiment) It is configured to be able to cover the front of (the game ball moving around) the peripheral member of the above-mentioned embodiment such as 411, a game nail, etc. Note that the wing members 37 in the above embodiment correspond to the guide means. It is also good. Then, the movable covering part may be configured to be displaceable between a functional position covering the front of the covering object and a standby position for exposing the covering object forward.

  In this case, when the movable covering member is in the functional position, the game ball is exposed to the covering object covered with the movable covering member even though the movable covering means has transparency. Is it involved, ie, if the start winning device 33a, 33b is covered, whether or not the game ball has entered, or if the guide means is covered, the game ball by the guide means The visibility is relatively reduced as to whether or not the user is guided. In particular, when the movable covering character is in operation or immediately after the movement, the player's line of sight is drawn to the movable covering character, and this tendency becomes stronger. Therefore, a situation may occur in which a player loses an eye for a moment even after watching the game ball, or the player tries to grasp the movement of the game ball by another method (for example, the display of the hold icon 461 on the decorative symbol display device 42) It is conceivable that it will be easy to do and there will be an opportunity to add a new effect (pseudo hold icon 466 etc.) there. As a result, more dramatic development and effects can be generated with regard to entering the start-up winning devices 33a and 33b of the game ball (start-up winning), and it is possible to improve interest and the like.

  In addition, in the case of adopting such a configuration, as in the embodiment described above, a game in which the game area such as the guide nail 448 is moved to a position directly under the movable covering part (pse It is desirable to provide a course change means for changing the traveling direction of the ball.

  In the case of adopting such a configuration, it is easy for the game ball to enter the area (specific covering area) covered by the movable covering part (pseudo-vane member 431) in the functional position and for visual recognition outward from the specific covering area It may be difficult to understand the correspondence with the game ball that has jumped to a place, and the game ball enters the start winning device (the second start winning device 33b) or is guided by the guide means (vane member 37) You can create more situations where you may or may not do it. In this way, in the case of performing an effect to teach and suggest what happened to the gaming ball that has entered the specific covering area, such effect can be made more effective.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the guide nail 448 is set so as to further increase the driving amount to the game board 30 in the area (specific covering area) covered with the movable covering part in the functional position. It may be configured to be arranged. In addition, the game ball guided by the guide means (for example, the game ball moving on the upper surface of the wing member 37 in the open position as in the above embodiment) or the game after being guided by the guide means The front of at least a portion (or better as a whole) of the ball (e.g., the game ball that has bounced back to the upper side of the guide nail 448) is configured to be covered by the movable covering member in the functional position. Is desirable.

  Furthermore, when the target covered with the movable covering part in the functional position is the guiding means, the front of the peripheral portion of the starting winning device (second starting winning device 33b) to which the gaming ball is guided by the guiding means It is desirable to provide a front decoration 403 (general part of the front covering means) covering the In addition, it is desirable that the front decoration 403 and the movable covering part (pseudo-vane member 431) in the functional position are preferably arranged so as to be continuous or close to each other in front view, Furthermore, the game balls guided by the guiding means covered at the front by the movable covering character, and the game balls changed by the course changing means are at the front with the movable covering character in the functional position. It is configured to be able to move to the area covered by the front decoration 403 forward (generally covered area) without (approximately) exposing to the uncovered area (exposure time on movement is as short as possible). Is desirable.

  In addition, the behavior of the game ball in the general covering area and the specific covering area can be further grasped by providing a course changing means (for example, the guide stand 446) also in the area (general covering area) covered forward by the front decoration part 403. It becomes difficult to do so, and it is possible to make it difficult to understand the correspondence relationship between the gaming balls that have entered these covering areas and the gaming balls discharged from the covering areas. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations where the gaming ball having entered the covered area may or may not enter the starting winning device (the second starting winning device 33b). Furthermore, by providing the pseudo winning detection switch 445 in an area (generally covered area) covered with the front decoration portion 403 in the front, it is possible to improve the game and the effect.

(I; mode of pseudo hold icon)
(I-1) In the above embodiment, the modes of the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 or the second start winning switch 224b, the floating ring type pseudo holding icon 466 or the temporary holding icon 464 is a decorative symbol display device At 42, the display appears at a position on the right side of the hold display area 462 and moves (rolls) toward the left hold display area 462. When the second start winning switch 224b is detected, the temporary hold icon 464 reaches the specified position of the hold display area 462 and stops, thereby switching to the display mode as the main hold icon 463 and detecting a false prize In the case of the detection of the switch 445, the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed so as to disappear out of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 42 without stopping even when reaching the specified position of the hold display area 462 It may be configured as follows.

  Also, with regard to the main hold icon 463, a predetermined movement may be made. For example, the character constituting the main holding icon 463 may be configured to perform an operation such as waving the hand, changing an expression, or the like so as not to get out of the holding display area 462. In addition, when the pseudo hold icon 466 itself is operating, the temporary hold icon 464 is switched to the real hold icon 463 by displaying the main hold icon 463 so that the movement is connected. It can be made easy for the player to recognize. However, when differentiation between the temporary holding icon 464 and the false holding icon 466 and the main holding icon 463 is intended only by the magnitude of the operation, there is a concern that the difference may be difficult to understand depending on the degree It is desirable to achieve differentiation by changing aspects such as shape, pattern, and hue.

  Incidentally, from the viewpoint of enjoying the effect of whether or not the start winning is performed using the pseudo winning detection switch 445, at least one start winning device (second As long as the start winning device 33b) and the pseudo winning detection switch 445 are present, other configurations disposed in such a region, and a configuration for opening and closing the start winning device (second start winning device 33b), etc. Can be omitted.

  (I-2) Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the snowman 751 is adopted as the holding icon, and the holding display area 462 is displayed based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 or the second start winning switch 224b. While the display of falling snow etc. from above is started, a pseudo-hold icon or a snowman 752 being created as a temporary hold icon is displayed at a predetermined position of the hold display area 462, etc. It is good also as composition.

  Furthermore, for example, the motif of the holding icon 461 set for each model also as an additional display displayed in front of the pseudo holding icon 466 and the temporary holding icon 464 together with the pseudo holding icon 466 and the temporary holding icon 464 It can change suitably according to. For example, an additional display such as a curtain of a stage, or an additional display such as a work platform being installed around a pseudo-hold icon 466 and a worker performing a task while working is being performed. You may do it. It is also possible to omit the additional display of the bubble display 467 and the like.

  By adopting these configurations, it is strongly emphasized that the modes of the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 have not been determined, and that the pseudo hold icon 466 and the temporary hold icon 464 may be further changed. Can be given. Therefore, the occurrence of troubles (such as the fact that the display is not started while the hold is on or the hold disappears) caused by the false hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 being mistaken for the main hold icon 463 is suppressed can do.

  (J; winning history) Further, for example, detection history of the first start winning switch 224a (time of each detection), detection history of second starting winning detection switch (time of each detection), and detection of pseudo winning detection switch A detection history storage unit capable of storing a history (time of each detection) may be provided, and storage information of the detection history storage unit may be configured to be outputable. For example, the detection history storage means is provided in the control device electrically connected to the sub control device 262 or the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 is operated when a predetermined operation is performed by a person in charge of the hall. Alternatively, the stored information of the detection history storage means may be read out and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. Furthermore, the same information as the information stored in the detection history storage means may be output to the hall computer of the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

  In this case, for example, if the player misunderstands the pseudo hold icon 466 as the real hold icon 463 or the like, the data for explaining the circumstances etc. can be surely obtained in the event of trouble, etc. It is possible to avoid situations such as

  (K; Elimination of Pseudo Holding Icon) The erasing condition of the pseudo holding icon 466 in the above embodiment is not particularly limited. For example, in the above embodiment, when the detection of the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b is performed in a state where the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed, a temporary hold may be substituted for the pseudo hold icon 466. Although the hold icon 464 or the full hold icon 463 is configured to be displayed, even if the detection of the first start winning switch 224 a or the second start winning switch 224 b is performed (the number of pseudo holding icons 466 is added. Even if the holding limit is not reached, the pseudo holding icon 466 may continue to be displayed.

  Also, the pseudo hold icon 466 is configured to be displayed even when no variable display is held, or the pseudo hold icon 466 is not erased when the hold shift process is performed only once. You may In this case, a situation may occur in which only the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed in the hold display area 462, and accordingly, at the timing when the corresponding variable display is started with the temporary hold icon 464 corresponding thereto. Configure as you go. Furthermore, the effect when the timing of the start of the variable display is reached with the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 (for example, whether the hold icon 461 remains when the bubble display 467 becomes large ( It is desirable to perform an effect such as whether or not the main hold icon 463 is displayed.

  Furthermore, the number obtained by adding the hold icon 461 (the real hold icon 463, the temporary hold icon 464) displayed at one time in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the pseudo hold icon 466 The number may exceed (in the above embodiment, eight). In addition, based on the predetermined operation of the player, the pseudo hold icon 466 is erased, the temporary hold icon 464 changes to a real hold icon 463, urges such a change, or an effect accompanied by such a change is derived. It may be configured to be

  (L; Hold icon) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 does not teach which of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b the variable display based on entering the ball. However, for example, there may be a mode in which information as to which of the first change display and the second change display corresponds to the hold icon 461 or in such a case (predetermined Such a mode is derived when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as winning a lottery, or when a predetermined input operation is performed by a player, or when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a state where such an input operation is performed. May be configured).

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the decoration symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to display up to eight hold icons 461. For example, the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is a total of five or more hold Even in the case where it is set, the decoration symbol display device 42 may be configured to display only up to four hold icons 461. Also, for example, if the number of pending icons 461 can be displayed the same number (8 in the above example) as the upper limit of the number of pending variable displays, or if the pseudo pending icon 466 is included, more than that can be displayed. In order to reduce the display space (hold display area 462) of the hold icon 461 in the case, for example, the four hold icons 461 to be digested first are displayed larger than the hold icon 461 to be digested later. You may configure it. In addition, the aspect of the retention icon 461 to be digested later may be configured to be a simplified aspect that allows the number of retentions to be grasped.

  (M: Pseudo prize detection switch) In the above embodiment, the pseudo prize detection switch 445 is provided on the downstream side of the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b, but the first start winning device 33a and It may be provided on the upstream side of the second starting winning device 33b, or may be provided on the downstream side of one of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b and on the other upstream side. In addition, when the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is on the upstream side of the first start winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, the gaming ball detected by the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is the first starting winning device 33a or the first start winning device 33a. 2) It may be configured to be able to enter into the start winning device 33b, or may not be able to enter the ball (for example, the gaming ball that has passed the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is to the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b A game ball guided to a place where the ball does not enter or having a pseudo prize detection switch 445 installed in the covered area or an out port provided in the covered area, or a game ball having entered such a prize port or out port It may be configured to be configured to double as a detection switch to be detected. In particular, when adopting a configuration in which the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is installed in the covered area or in the out port, the game ball entering the starting winning unit 401 wins the starting winning devices 33a and 33b. It becomes more confusing as to whether or not

  (N: Movable Front Decoration Unit) In the above embodiment, the front decoration unit 403 is provided so as not to be displaceable relative to the game board 30, but may be provided to be capable of relative displacement. For example, as shown in FIG. 52, a rotating shaft 762 may be attached to the rear surface side of the front decoration 761 and the rotating shaft 762 may be configured to be rotatable by a motor 763 as a decoration driving means. Further, the motor 763 may be configured to drive based on the detection of the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b.

  In this case, the operation of the front decoration portion 761 can detect the entry of the game ball to the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, so the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning Even without confirming that the game ball enters the device 33b directly, the game can be progressed with a relatively sense of security. As a result, it is possible to pay attention by an effect or the like that teaches the result of the acceptance lottery.

  Further, for example, the front decoration portion 761 may be configured to be displaceable in the same manner, regardless of whether the first start winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b is detected. Furthermore, the motor 763 may be configured to be driven even when the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 is performed and the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed. In this case, it is possible to avoid the situation where the pseudo hold icon 466 is not immediately the temporary hold icon 464 (the full hold icon 463) by the operation mode of the front decoration 761.

  Further, as the rotating shaft 762 in FIG. 52, a portion attached to the front decoration 761 and a portion attached with the gear 766 engaged with the pinion 765 attached to the drive shaft 764 of the motor 763 are elastic means. It is connected by a coil spring 767. Therefore, the front decoration 761 is configured to be displaceable based on the contact of the game ball with the front decoration 761 even when the motor 763 is not driven.

  Therefore, it is possible to add interest to the operation of the front decoration 761. Furthermore, since the front decoration 761 is displaced only by the collision of the game ball with the front decoration 761, the game ball almost always enters the start winning devices 33 a and 33 b for a beginner player. It can be made to have a sense of expectation.

  The configuration of the front decorative portion 761 being displaceable by the motor 763 and being displaceable by the collision of the game balls without driving the motor 763 is not particularly limited. For example, when the motor 763 is not driven, the link mechanism (pinion 765 and gear 766) for interlocking the motor 763 and the front decoration 761 is not engaged, and when the motor 763 is not driven, the front decoration The portion 761 may be configured to be supported by an elastic body. In order to reduce the load on the coil spring 767, for example, it is desirable to provide a portion of the rotating shaft 762 attached to the front decoration 761 and a bearing for supporting the outer peripheral edge of the front decoration 761.

  Also, for example, a panel is installed in contact with or in proximity to the rear surface of the front decoration 761 so that the operation of the front decoration 761 does not affect other configurations (the bearing 438 is provided on the panel). Etc.) is desirable. Furthermore, a plurality of front decoration parts are provided so as to be overlapped, and different operations can be performed (for example, different pictures are drawn for each front decoration part, and the relative position changes, so that from the front) The pattern to be seen may also change. For example, when there is a front decoration part that always operates, the behavior of the gaming ball moving behind it becomes more difficult to see. For example, it is also possible to constitute so that predetermined information may be suggested and taught by combination of a position of a plurality of front decoration parts.

  (O: winning effect sound) Although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, for example, the first winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the first start winning switch 224a and the second corresponding to the detection of the second start winning switch 224b The second winning effect sound or the second winning effect sound or the second winning effect sound based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b is configured to be able to generate the 2 winning effect sound, the first winning effect sound and the confusion winning sound effect close to the second winning effect sound. The confusion winning effect sound may be generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 (in the case of being connected to the display of the pseudo hold icon 466) as well as the confusion winning effect sound. The functions of the sub controller 262 and the like that generate these sound effects constitute sound effect generating means.

  In this case, even if the start winning devices 33a and 33b are not viewed directly, it is possible to confirm the entrance of the gaming balls to the start winning devices 33a and 33b by sound effects, and make the game progress more smoothly. Can. Also, by configuring the confusion winning effect sound to be able to be generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445, even if the pseudo holding icon 466 is displayed, there is no effect sound, so the temporary holding icon 464 It is possible to prevent the situation in which the icon 463) is not immediately determined.

  Furthermore, the confusion winning effect sound may be derived also when the second start winning switch 224b is detected. Therefore, even if the pseudo hold icon 466 is displayed due to the difference in the sound effects, the sound sound is not accompanied, and the situation where the temporary hold icon 464 (the full hold icon 463) is not immediately identified is avoided. be able to. As a result, the effect that the game ball may have entered the second start winning device 33b can be made more realistic.

  The confusion winning sound effects may be created separately from the first winning sound effects and the second winning sound effects, or may be configured by simultaneously outputting the first winning sound effects and the second winning sound effects. Good. Further, based on the detection of the first start winning switch 224a, it may be configured to generate a first winning effect sound or a confusion winning effect sound. In addition, the confusion winning effect sound derived based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445 constitutes a pseudo winning mode.

  Further, for example, a sub-control is provided with a first start ball counting counter that counts the number of detections of the first start winning switch 224a, and a second start ball counting counter that counts the number of detections of the second start winning switch 224b. The device 262 compares the number of detections of the first start winning switch 224a per predetermined period with the number of detections of the second start winning switch 224b, and compares the number of detections of the second start winning switch 224b with the number of detections of the second start winning switch 224b. In the case where the ratio of the number of times of detection is equal to or less than the specified value, the confusion winning sound effect may be generated based on the detection of the second start winning switch 224b.

  In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is given the impression that the game balls are not entering the first start winning device 33a very much. The function of comparing the number of times of detection of the first start winning switch 224a per predetermined period of the sub control device 262 with the number of times of detection of the second start winning switch 224b constitutes an entering ratio determination means.

  In addition, for example, even when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position, an effect sound may be added (during a big hit state or during reach effect in the decorative symbol display device 42, etc. may be excluded or the volume may be lowered) You may configure it. As a mode example, when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position, either the first blade open effect sound or the second blade open effect sound is derived, and the blade member 37 is in the closed position. When only the pseudo blade member 431 is displaced alone to the functional position in the maintained state, the second blade open effect sound may be derived. In addition, the sound effect accompanying the operation of the artificial blade member 431 in the artificial blade effect is separately set.

  (P) In the above embodiment, based on the detection of the first start winning switch 224a, the detection of the second start winning switch 224b, or the detection of the pseudo winning detection switch 445, the game ball to the start winning device 33a or 33b. You may be comprised so that the suggestion display which suggests entering ball | balls may be performed in places other than the start winning combination unit 401 and the normal symbol display apparatus 41. FIG. For example, a predetermined light emitting means (the light emitting means contained in the center frame 47 or the annular illumination portion 102 of the front frame set 14) is made to emit light, or the holding icon 461 of the decorative symbol display device 42 is made to appear more prominently In the decorative symbol display device 42, a mode in which a smaller character appears or a mode (display, sound effect, etc.) scheduled to be originally derived may be derived at that timing. In this case, relying on such a display, the player does not see the game ball entering the start winning device 33a, 33b or does not have the opportunity to not look at the start winning unit 401 in order to visually recognize such a display. It can be increased. Therefore, the effect of having the game progress can be further achieved without worrying about the condition of the game balls entering the start winning device 33a, 33b.

  (Q; Proximity detection sensor) In the above embodiment, proximity detection means capable of detecting proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of places of the decorative symbol display device 42 and connected to the input / output port 554 of the sub controller 262 (For example, a proximity detection sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, a touch panel, or the like) may be provided. For example, when the player brings a finger or the like in proximity to the pseudo hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464 displayed in the hold display area 462 of the decorative symbol display device 42, the proximity is approached based on the detection of the finger or the like. If the target detected is the pseudo hold icon 466, it may be deleted, and if the target detected the proximity is the temporary hold icon 464, the main hold icon 463 may be switchably displayed. In this case, interest in the hold icon 461 can be improved, and a sense of closeness to an effect (such as false hold) that the game ball may enter the start winning device 33a, 33b can be further enhanced.

  (R) In the above embodiment, data exchange (so-called mobile interlocking game) is performed between the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a game machine maker or the like via a communication portable terminal or the like owned by the player. You may comprise so that it can do. Furthermore, when ending the mobile interlocking game, the two-dimensional code including the game information of this time is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with the portable communication terminal. In the configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 counts the number of balls entered into the first start winning device 33a, and the second start winning device It is equipped with the second entering counter to count the number of entering balls to 33b and the pseudo entering counter to count the number of detections of the pseudo winning detection switch 445, and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile interlocking game. The two-dimensional code is configured to include information indicating the value of the first entry counter, the value of the second entry counter, and the value of the pseudo entry counter. It may be that you are. Furthermore, information on the total number of game balls emitted may be included in the two-dimensional code. In this case, it is possible for the gaming machine manufacturer to grasp the condition of the ball entering each start winning device 33a, 33b.

  It should be noted that the value of the first entering ball counter, the value of the second entering ball counter, and the value of the pseudo entering ball counter are erased by being two-dimensional coded, and otherwise (even if the power is turned off May be stored. Further, with regard to the tendency of the behavior pattern of the artificial feather member 431, the player (with respect to the player who is playing a mobile interlocking game) may be configured to be able to select from among several types.

  (S) In the above embodiment, the second start winning device 33b is disposed below the first start winning device 33a. However, for example, the second start winning device 33b may be disposed side by side. . In the above embodiment, the front decoration portion 403 not only covers the front of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b, but also other winning devices etc. (eg, the variable winning device 32 and the through gate 34) It may be configured to cover the In addition, in the above embodiment, the number of start winning devices 33a and 33b, the number of variable winning devices 32, the number of through gates 34 and the like are not particularly limited, and can be set for each model. For example, two variable winning devices 32 may be provided, or three or more start winning devices 33a and 33b and three or more through gates 34 may be provided.

  Furthermore, although the second start winning device 33b of the above embodiment is provided with a pair of left and right wing members 37 whose central axis extends in the front-rear direction, for example, like the variable winning device 32, the central axis extends in the left-right direction The second start winning device 33b may be configured to be changed between the open state and the closed state by rotating and displacing the shutter. In the case of adopting the configuration, for example, the shutter may have a two-plate structure of a pseudo shutter on the front side (for example, decorated on the front side) and a main shutter on the rear side (for example, a transparent plate). Furthermore, in the case of adopting such a configuration, the folded-back portion that projects from the front to the front edge portion of the blade member 37 in the open position when the pseudo blade member projects to the rear side It may be configured to be provided. In the second start winning device 33b, as in the first start winning device 33a, it is also possible to always allow the game ball to enter the ball, or to omit the wing member 37.

  In the above embodiment, the number of gaming balls (prize balls) to be paid out when the game balls enter the first start winning device 33a, and the game balls paid out when the second starting winning device 33b enters. Although the number of game balls to be played is set to be the same, it may be set to be different. For example, as in the above embodiment, in the configuration in which the game ball easily enters the second start winning device 33b, the number of winning balls corresponding to the first start winning device 33a may be increased. Good.

  (T) In the above embodiment, the timing at which the gaming balls are paid out from the payout device 358 (see FIG. 5) to the ball tray such as the upper tray 19 via the payout passage 68 (see FIG. 3) It is also possible to provide means for adjusting the possible delivery time. In this case, even if the pseudo feather member 431 and the pseudo storage icon 466 are provided, the start winning unit is obtained depending on the presence or absence of the game ball payout (prize ball) based on the game ball entering the start winning device 33a, 33b. It is taught whether the game ball entered into the 401 (cover area on the back side of the front decoration part 403) has entered the start winning device 33a, 33b or not (the false hold icon 466 or the temporary hold icon 464) It is possible to suppress the situation of being grasped before).

  As a mode example, as shown in FIG. 55, the dispensing time adjustment means 791 constituting a part of the dispensing passage 68 which allows the dispensing device 358 and the upper plate 19 to communicate with each other in the left-right direction A relatively short distance connects a main passage 792 as a first passage extending in a serpentine manner, a predetermined position (first position) of the main passage 792 and a position downstream thereof (second position) And a connecting portion between the main passage 792 and the bypass passage 793 (the inlet of the bypass passage 793), which guides the gaming ball to the main passage 792 in the closed state (the second passage). A shutter 794 serving as switching means is provided which can be switched between (1) guiding state) and a second guiding state in which the gaming ball is guided to the bypass passage 793. Also, the gaming balls dispensed by the dispensing device 358 pass through the main passage 792 (without passing through the bypass passage 793) to the upper tray 19 (or the lower tray 15 when the upper tray 19 is full of gaming balls). The second time required for the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 to be paid out to the upper tray 19 via the bypass passage 793 is shorter than the first time required for the payment.

  Then, for example, the shutter 794 is opened in a jackpot state or a probability change mode in which gaming balls are paid out relatively frequently, and the shutter 794 is basically closed in a normal mode that is relatively easy to notice even with a small payout of gaming balls ( It may be configured so as not to keep closing but opening properly. In this case, it becomes difficult to determine when and to which winning device the game ball paid out to the upper plate 19 etc corresponds to which winning device, and by the payout of the game ball, the start winning device 33a, 33b It is possible to suppress a situation in which it is possible to guess a winning.

  Moreover, it is also possible to perform various effects using the payout time adjusting means 791. Furthermore, when such a configuration is adopted, the shutter 794 may be opened based on an operation of the effect button 125 or the like. For example, there are a plurality of jackpot types different in the number of rounds, basically the shutter 794 is closed, and the gaming balls to be paid out corresponding to the wins on the variable winning device 32 in the previous round meandered main When flowing down the passage 792 and the round continues, the shutter 794 is opened based on the player's operation of the effect button 125 (and the game ball is paid out at once in the upper plate 19). It may be configured. In this case, it is possible to impart exhilaration that the game ball is paid out by the player's own operation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, the shutter 794 may be configured to be maintained in the closed state when the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (the decorative symbol display device 42) is not stored pending. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player stops playing and leaves the seat before the gaming balls are paid out to the upper tray 19.

  The configuration of the dispensing time adjustment means 791 is not particularly limited, and, for example, the first passage extending in a serpentine manner, the second passage juxtaposed to the first passage, and the second passage extending substantially linearly, and the dispensing device 358 And a switching valve capable of switching between a first guiding state for guiding the gaming balls paid out from the first to the first passage and a second guiding state for guiding the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 358 to the second passage. It may be configured to be equipped. Further, the time required for the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 to be dispensed onto the upper tray 19 via the payout passage varies depending not only on the distance of the payout passage but also on the angle, shape (course), etc. .

  (U) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the open / close patterns of the various jackpot types of the variable winning device 32, etc. are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the variable winning device 32 may perform the same operation as the "2 RS" jackpot state, and set the jackpot to which the "normal mode" is given after the jackpot state ends. Further, in the above embodiment, the “probable change mode” is given after the end of the “2 RS” jackpot state, but instead, it is a low ball entry state and a high probability state, and further in the decorative symbol display device 42 May be configured to be provided with a “latency mode” that is not taught as to which of the high probability state and the low probability state.

  It should be noted that in the decorative symbol display device 42, the teaching about having won the probability variation big hit (15 RS) with the balls may be configured to be always performed at the latest until the corresponding big hit state ends. Not performed even when the corresponding jackpot state ends (Even in the definite variation mode internally, the decorative symbol display device 42 shifts to the same pullback stage as the time reduction mode, and the special display device 43L in the time reduction mode When the variable display of 43 R exceeds the upper limit number (100 times) of the time reduction mode, the process may shift to the probability change stage.

  In addition, in the above embodiment, although the winning probability in the success or failure lottery changes, the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period of the high ball-in state given after the big hit state ends ( The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns of fluctuation numbers) are prepared. Furthermore, in the winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a (and the second start winning device 33b), while the variable winning device 32 performs the same operation as the jackpot state of "2RS", the game mode is You may be comprised so that it may be elected by the "small hit" which does not change.

  In addition, the probability of winning in the entry support lottery, the opening / closing pattern of the second starting winning device 33b when winning, etc. can be appropriately set for each model. For example, the winning upper limit of the gaming ball in one opening to the second start winning device 33b may be set. More specifically, there is provided a start winning upper limit counter for counting the number of times the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b until the winning upper limit is reached, and the second start winning switch 224b is detected. (For example, after step S503 of the start winning process), the value of the start winning upper limit counter is decremented by 1 and the second start winning device 33b is opened (for example, the step of the common drawing determination information setting process After S2405 and step S2407, the value corresponding to the winning upper limit is set to the starting winning upper limit counter (for example, if there is one winning upper limit, 1 is set), the open state of the second starting winning device 33b In the case where the timing for setting the closed state has not yet arrived (for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2204 of the start winning device control process), It is determined whether the value of the counter has become "0", and if the determination is negative, the start winning device control process is ended as it is, while if the determination is affirmative, the second start winning device is immediately performed. The processing shifts to a process (step S2205) for setting 33b in the closed state, and also in the process (for example, after step S2218) performed when the second startup winning device 33b has obtained the right to be opened a plurality of times. A value corresponding to the winning upper limit is set to the start winning upper limit counter (for example, if there is one winning upper limit, 1 is set).

  (V) In the above embodiment, the first variation display based on the entry of the gaming ball to the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display based on the entry of the game ball to the second startup prize device 33b Regardless of which one is selected, the corresponding variable display is suspended in the order of entering the gaming balls to the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b, and is sequentially digested from the variable display previously suspended. Although it is configured as described above, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, the second change display, which is suspended after the first change display, which has already been suspended, is arranged before or after the suspension order so that it is digested before the first fluctuation display. The second variation display may be configured to be digested preferentially over the first variation display.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, it is performed based on entering the second start winning device 33b and when winning a big hit in the lottery that was performed based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a. The distribution ratio of jackpot types that can be awarded is configured to be the same depending on when the jackpot is won in the lottery, but if the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a Different big hit type tables may be referred to in the lottery and the winning lottery performed when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b, and the distribution of the big hit types may be different. For example, when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the second start winning device 33b, compared to the case where the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first start winning device 33a. The percentage with which the jackpot jackpot is high increases, and the percentage with which the probability variation mode (not the latent mode) is given is high (the percentage with which the high probability state is given is the same) It is also possible that the jackpot is selected if the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the winning on the first start winning device 33a when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery based on the winning on the second starting winning device 33b. It may be configured such that no type of jackpot can be given.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the winning balls to be awarded to the player when entering the first starting winning device 33a and when entering the second starting winning device 33b. Although the numbers are configured to be different, they may be configured to be the same.

  (W) In the above embodiment, after the main processing (see FIG. 9) is performed by the main control unit 261, the normal processing (see FIG. 10) is performed, but the present invention is particularly limited to such a configuration is not. For example, after step S111 of the main processing, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S209 to S218 of the normal processing in the above embodiment is performed, for example, in the timer interrupt processing performed every 2 msec. The process performed in steps S201 to S208 of the normal process in the embodiment and the process of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt process in the above embodiment may be performed. As the process of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, There is a configuration that turns on a flag indicating the occurrence of Further, the processing of step S401 may be separately performed as NMI interrupt processing as in the above embodiment.

  (X) In the above embodiment, the information as to whether or not the big hit state occurs in the pass / fail random number storage area storing the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is overwritten. It is not limited to For example, it is possible to provide a storage area for storing information on whether or not a big hit state occurs separately from the execution area of the special variation reserve area and each reserve area for the winning random number storage area, or the special variation reserve Aside from the area, a storage area corresponding to an execution area of each special variation reserve area and each reserve area may be provided, and information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs in the storage area may be stored. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the type of big hit may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3 Alternatively, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. Further, in the above embodiment, at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, it is confirmed again whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, and the result of the confirmation process The pattern of the variable display etc. may be determined according to.

  (Y) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, movable means that can be changed to a specific area where game balls moving in the game area can enter the ball, an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits the ball to enter the specific area ( A variable ball entry means having a wing member), a specific ball entry means and a non-specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball entering a specific area, and a game ball entering a specific ball entry means Special entering detection means (condition satisfaction detecting means) to be detected, a special starting means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving the game area, and detecting the game ball entering the special starting means Special start detection means and main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game ball is specified ball entering means and non-specific ball entering means A predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player regardless of which of the The main control means is a small hitting state in which the variable ball entering means is opened one or more times for a first time based on the detection of the special start detecting means, or the variable ball entering means is the first time Whether or not to generate a jackpot state which repeats this a specified number of times, with a predetermined number of game balls entering the open variable winning means, for a second round, until the second time is opened for a longer period of time If you win a small hit in the win lottery, will generate a small hit state, if you win a big hit in the win lottery, and if there is a detection of the specific entering detection means The present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that generates a jackpot state.

  (Aa) In the above embodiment, the first definite signal, the second definite signal and the third definite signal, and the first incoming ball signal, the second incoming ball signal and the third incoming ball signal, respectively, according to the type of the support mode Although two different types (for example, the first determination signal for low support, the first determination signal for high support) are set and output, only one type is set regardless of the type of support mode. May be set and output. For example, when the variation display by entering the game ball to the second start winning device 33b is determined, one type of second determination signal is set even in the low support mode or the high support mode. -It may be configured to be output. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load relating to the setting / output of signals in the main control device 261.

  In addition, when only one type of determination signal or the like is output, the hole computer HC is configured to be able to determine whether the high support mode or the low support mode so that the support mode of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped. The information on the mode storage area may be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 240. In this case, in the hall computer HC, on the basis of the input determination signal and the like and the information of the mode storage area, the number of determinations of the variation display by the entering of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b etc. It can be understood every time.

  (Ab) In the above embodiment, the first determination signal, the second determination signal, and the third determination signal are set, and each determination signal is externally output to the hall computer HC. It is sufficient that the second determination signal is set and the second determination signal is output to the outside. Therefore, only the first determination signal and the second determination signal may be set, and both signals may be output to the outside, or only the second determination signal and the third determination signal may be set, and both signals may be set to the outside. It may be configured to be output, or only the second determination signal may be set, and the second determination signal may be configured to be output to the outside.

  (Ac) In the above embodiment, although the third definite signal is output separately from the first definite signal and the second definite signal, only the first definite signal and the second definite signal are externally output. In the hall computer HC, when the first determination signal or the second determination signal is received, the processing when the third determination signal is received may be performed together. That is, the first determination signal and the second determination signal may be combined with the third determination signal.

  (Ad) In the above embodiment, the first incoming ball signal, the second incoming ball signal, and the third incoming ball signal are output to the outside, but one or two of these incoming ball signals May be output to the outside, or only the determination signal (for example, the second determination signal) may be output to the outside, and the incoming sphere signal may not be output to the outside.

  (Ae) The fluctuation number signal including the number information of the fluctuation display may be externally output together with the confirmation signal each time the fluctuation display is determined a predetermined number of times.

  For example, in the number signal setting process following the confirmation signal setting process (FIG. 19: step S800-A), as shown in FIG. 71, the fluctuation display by entering the gaming ball to the second start winning device 33b is determined Step S8201: If the low support mode is selected (step S8203: NO), the low support second count value C2 (off) is increased by one (step S8204), and the value C2 (off) is predetermined. When the threshold value X2 (off) (for example, 20 and can be appropriately changed) or more (step S8205: YES), the second variable number signal for low support is set (step S8206). The low support second fluctuation number signal includes information on the value C2 (off), that is, information on the determined number of fluctuation displays due to the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b in the low support mode. . Incidentally, when the low support second variation number signal is set, the value C2 (off) is reset to the initial value (0) (step S8207). A part of the second variation count information grasping means is configured by the main control device 261 that executes the process of grasping the low support second count value C2 (off) in step S8204.

  In addition, when the fluctuation display due to entering the game ball to 2nd starting winning a prize device 33b is decided, (step S8201: NO), when it is high support mode (step S8203: YES), high support second count value When C2 (on) is increased by one (step S8208) and the value C2 (on) becomes equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value X2 (on) (for example, 20 and can be appropriately changed) (step S8209: YES) The high support second variation number signal is set (step S8210). The high support second fluctuation number signal includes information on the value C2 (on), that is, information on the determined number of fluctuation displays due to the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b in the high support mode. . Incidentally, when the second high fluctuation support second fluctuation number signal is set, the value C2 (on) is reset to the initial value (0) (step S8211). A part of the second variation count information grasping means is configured by the main control device 261 that executes the process of grasping the high support second count value C2 (on) in step S8208.

  Further, when the variation display by entering the gaming ball to the first start winning device 33a is determined (step S8201: YES) and the low support mode is set (step S8212: NO), the first count value at the time of low support When C1 (off) is increased by one (step S8213) and the value C1 (off) becomes equal to or more than a predetermined threshold X1 (off) (for example, 20, which can be appropriately changed) (step S8214: YES) The low support first fluctuation number signal is set (step S8215). The low support first variation number signal includes information on the value C1 (off), that is, information on the determined number of variation displays due to the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a in the low support mode. . When the low support first fluctuation number signal is set, the value C1 (off) is reset to the initial value (0) (step S8216).

  At the same time, when the variable display by entering the gaming ball to the first start winning device 33a is determined (step S8201: YES) and it is in the high support mode (step S8212: YES), the first count at the time of high support The value C1 (on) is increased by one (step S8217), and when the value C1 (on) becomes equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value X1 (on) (for example, 20, which can be appropriately changed) (step S8218: YES And the high support first fluctuation number signal is set (step S8219). The high support first fluctuation number signal includes information on the value C1 (on), that is, information on the determined number of fluctuation displays due to the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a in the high support mode. . Incidentally, when the high support first variation number signal is set, the value C1 (on) is reset to the initial value (0) (step S8220).

  When the variable display is determined in the low support mode (when the determination in step S8203 or step S8212 is negative), the low-sap third counter value C3 (off) is increased by one (step S8221). When the value C3 (off) becomes equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value X3 (off, for example, 40 and can be appropriately changed) (step S8222: YES), the low-s apoge third fluctuation number signal is set (step S8223) ). The low support third fluctuation number signal includes information on the value C3 (off). When the low support time third fluctuation number signal is set, the value C3 (off) is reset to the initial value (0) (step S8224).

  Furthermore, when the variable display is determined in the high support mode (when the determination in step S 8203 or step S 8212 is affirmative), the high support third count value C 3 (on) is increased by 1 (step S 8225) When the value C3 (on) becomes equal to or more than a predetermined threshold value X3 (on) (for example, 40 and can be appropriately changed) (step S8226: YES), a high speed third change number signal is set (step S8227) ). The high support third fluctuation number signal includes information on the value C3 (on). When the high support third variation number signal is set, the value C3 (on) is reset to an initial value (0) (step S8228).

  Then, in the next external output process (step S201), the set various fluctuation number signal is output. Note that the second variable number of times signal and the second variable number of time signals at high supporting time correspond to the second number of fluctuation times signal, and the main control unit 261 that outputs these signals constitutes a second number of fluctuation times output unit. Ru.

  In addition, in the external output, a terminal for outputting the variation frequency signal may be provided to the external terminal board 240 separately from the signal terminals 2301 to 2313. In addition, the variation frequency signal may be output using the terminals 2308 to 2313 for outputting the determination signal and the ball entry signal. For example, when outputting the fluctuation count signal by using the fact that the first definite signal and the second definite signal are not output at the same time, for example, from the first definite signal terminal 2308 and the second definite signal terminal 2309 A signal may be output at the same time, and the hall computer HC may process as if the fluctuation number signal is input when the signal is input at the same time from both the definite signal terminals 2308 and 2309. .

  In addition, the hall computer HC that has received the variation count signal is configured to receive each start winning device 33a, 33b in each support mode based on the information on the values C1 to 3 (off) and C1 to 3 (on) included in the variation count signal. It is good also as grasping the total of the number of decision of the change display resulting from the ball entry of the game ball to. In this case, in the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the finalized number of the variable display by entering the gaming balls into the respective start winning devices 33a, 33b, which are grasped by the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the hall computer HC, based on the first determination signal, the second determination signal, and the third determination signal, as the determination number of the variation display by the entry of the game ball to each starting winning device 33a, 33b, Variation number signal (corresponding to the first low variation signal variation number signal and the first high variation number variation signal), second variation number signal and third variation number signal (low variation third variation number signal and Can be grasped both on the basis of the high support third fluctuation number signal) and the data accuracy can be further secured. In addition, since more reliable data can be obtained, the usability on the hole side can be further enhanced. Furthermore, based on the obtained highly reliable data, it is possible to more accurately perform, for example, the adjustment relating to the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b on the hole side.

  In addition, in the hole computer HC, the total number of the determined numbers determined by the various variation number signals may be compared with the respective variation determined values K1 to 3 (off) and K1 to 3 (on). In this case, based on the number of fluctuations [values C1 to 3 (off), C1 to 3 (on)] grasped on the pachinko machine 10 side, the number of fluctuations grasped on the hall computer HC side can be checked. , Can further ensure the accuracy of the data.

  (Af) In the above embodiment, although the determination signal setting process (step S800-A) is performed in the special display control process (FIG. 19) in the normal process, the execution time of the determination signal setting process is It is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 72, the determination signal setting process (step S200-A) may be performed following the main process (steps S201 to S208) executed in the normal process. In addition, when the processing load in the processing performed before the finalization signal setting processing is relatively large in one cycle of the normal processing in order to reduce the processing load (for example, the first start winning in the timer interrupt processing) In the normal process, the setting process of the confirmation signal is not executed in this normal process, and the setting process of the confirmation signal in the subsequent normal processes is performed in the case where the entry of the gaming ball to the device 33a or the second start winning device 33b is detected. It is good also as execution.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, when the entry of the game ball to the second start winning device 33b is detected in the start winning processing of the timer interrupt processing (step S501: YES) or the first start When entry of the game ball to the winning device 33a is detected (step S509: YES), the winning flag is turned on in step S500-C or step S500-D. The winning flag is state determination information used to determine whether or not to execute a process for setting a determination signal.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 74, in the information storage process of step S800-B following the stop display setting of the special display control process (step S815), the first information relating to on / off of the first variation flag in the execution area The change flag information and the mode storage area information which is information of the mode storage area are stored in the information storage area. The information storage area is provided in the RAM 503, and includes one execution area and one information reserve area. One set of the first change flag information and the mode storage area information is stored in the information reserve area. Note that the number of information holding areas may be appropriately changed according to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing, etc., so that a plurality of sets of information can be stored.

  Subsequent to the information storage process (step S800-B), in step S800-C, the determination signal non-setting flag is turned on. The determination signal non-setting flag is state determination information used to determine whether or not to execute processing for setting various determination signals in the determination signal setting process (step S200-A).

  Furthermore, in the determination signal setting process (step S200-A), as shown in FIG. 75, first, in step S7400-A, it is determined whether the determination signal non-setting flag is on. That is, processing for setting various determination signals [steps S7401 to S7410. In these processes, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to execute the same process as the determination signal setting process (FIG. 59) in the above embodiment. If the determination signal non-setting flag is off (step S7400-A: NO), that is, if there is no determination signal not being set, the determination signal setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the determination signal non-setting flag is on (step S7400-A: YES), it is determined in step S7400-B whether the winning flag is on or off. That is, during one cycle of the normal processing, the game ball enters the start winning device 33a, 33b before the finalization signal setting processing, and the ball entering signal setting processing (steps S500-A, S500-B) or It is determined whether a success or failure determination process or the like has been performed. If the winning flag is on (step S7400-B: YES), the determination signal setting process is ended in order to prevent a further increase in the processing load during one cycle of the normal process. On the other hand, if the winning flag is off (step S7400-B: NO), the process proceeds to step S7400-C because it is the timing at which the process for setting the determination signal can be performed.

  In step S7400-C, the determination signal non-setting flag is turned off, and in the subsequent step S7400-D, the winning flag is turned off.

  Following step S7400-D, in step S7400-E, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the flag information reserve area to the execution area. Thereby, information on on / off of the first change flag and information on the mode storage area are expanded in the execution area.

  In the processing after step S7400-E, the first variation flag on / off determination processing (step S7401) is executed based on the information on the on / off of the first variation flag shifted to the execution area, and the execution area is Based on the information of the shifted mode storage area, determination processing (steps S7402 and S7408) is performed to determine whether the value stored in the mode storage area is "12" or "21". And the process (steps S7401-S7410) for setting a definite signal is performed, and a 1st definite signal or a 2nd definite signal and a 3rd definite signal are set.

  In the above, in the determination signal setting process, when the processing load is relatively small, the first determination signal or the second determination signal and the third determination signal are set, but various determination signals are used. (For example, the third determination signal output to the data counter device) is set in the normal process when the stop display setting (step S815) is performed regardless of the size of the processing load It is also assumed that other decision signals are set in the next and subsequent normal processes according to the magnitude of the processing load (that is, according to the decision signal non-setting flag and the on / off state of the winning flag). Good. Further, the configuration of shifting the setting timing of the signal according to the processing load as described above may be applied to the setting of the entering signal.

  Further, when the common view variation setting process (step S2105) or the common view determination information setting process (step S2110) is executed in the normal display control process (see FIG. 24) to reduce the processing load, that is, the main control When the processing load in the normal processing in the device 261 is relatively large, the setting processing of the finalization signal and the ball entry signal may be shifted to the subsequent normal processing. In particular, as in the above embodiment, when entering the game ball to the second start winning device 33b is relatively easy to occur and the setting process frequency of the second confirmation signal tends to increase, main setting control of the second confirmation signal is performed. By being configured to be able to shift according to the processing load in the device 261, the processing load can be effectively reduced.

  (Ag) In the above embodiment, the external terminal board 240 is provided with a first determination signal terminal 2308 for outputting a first determination signal and a second determination signal terminal 2309 for outputting a second determination signal. However, since both decision signals are not usually output simultaneously, even if the configurations of both decision signals are different, even if both decision signals are output from one terminal, Good.

  (Ah) In the above embodiment, the various signals are externally output from the main controller 261 to the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 240, but devices other than the main controller 261 (for example, , And may be externally output from the sub controller 262 or the like. In this case, the setting processing of the various signals may be performed by a device other than the main control device 261 (for example, the sub control device 262 or the like).

  (Ai) In the above embodiment, in the fluctuation ratio check process, a ratio based on the first fluctuation fixed value K1 (off), K1 (on) and the second fluctuation fixed value K2 (off), K2 (on) [for example, K2 c (Off) / (K1c (off) + 1)], it is determined whether the ball entry state of the gaming ball for the second starting winning device 33b is the appropriate state, but the second start by other methods It may be determined whether or not the entering state of the gaming ball to the winning device 33b is in the proper state.

  For example, based on the difference between the first fluctuation determined value K1 (off), K1 (on) and the second fluctuation determined value K2 (off), K2 (on) or a value corresponding thereto, the second start winning device 33b It may be determined whether or not the ball entry state of the game ball is in an appropriate state. In addition, it is good also as judging whether the ball entering state of the game ball to the 2nd starting winning a prize device 33b is a proper state by the method different from the above-mentioned embodiment also about the ball entering ratio check processing.

  (Aj) In the higher-order machine embodiment, the variation ratio check process is performed based on the first variation determined values K1 (off) and K1 (on) and the second variation determined values K2 (off) and K2 (on). , Based on the second variation determined value K2 (off), K2 (on) and the third variation determined value K3 (off), K3 (on), the variation ratio check process is performed, and the game ball for the second start winning device 33b is It may be determined whether or not the ball entering state is the proper state. In the same manner, the ball entering ratio check process is based on the second ball entering value N2 (off), N2 (on) and the third ball entering value N3 (off), N3 (on) to determine the ball entering state. May be performed.

  (Ak) In the above embodiment, the hall computer HC is configured to execute the error check process, but the error check process may not be executed, and only the process of counting the number of confirmed variations etc. may be performed. Good.

  Further, the process executed in the error check process is not limited to the above embodiment, and any one of the above check processes (FIG. 63: steps S7601 to S7605), for example, only the fluctuation ratio check process is performed. May be configured to be selectively executed. In addition, the hall computer HC is configured to be able to grasp the total number of gaming balls fired in the game area, and, for example, based on the determined number of variable displays obtained by the second determination signal and the grasped total number. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the ball entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second start winning device 33b is the proper state.

  Furthermore, depending on the ball entry state, execution / non-execution of the fluctuation rate check processing or the ball entry ratio check processing may be switched. For example, in the high support mode, in the case where entering of the game ball to the first start winning device 33a does not occur or hardly occurs (a type in which a so-called right strike is performed), the fluctuation rate check process only in the low support mode (step S7901 The process of step S7912) may be performed.

  (Al) The process corresponding to the error check process executed by the hall computer HC described in the above embodiment and the like may be executed by the pachinko machine 10 (main controller 261 or sub controller 262). In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to externally output the result of the error check process or to indicate it in a notification means (for example, a lamp, a sound generation means, etc.) provided in itself.

  (Am) A sound generator for emitting sound in response to an external output of a confirmation signal or a ball entry signal to the pachinko machine 10, a lighting device (lamp or decoration for lighting in response to an external output of a confirmation signal or an ball entry signal A symbol display device 42 or the like may be provided.

  In addition, the sound generation mode may be different depending on the type of the confirmation signal or the ball input signal output to the outside. For example, the amount, the height, the melody, and the like of the sound generated from the sound generation device may be different between the case where the first determined signal is output to the outside and the case where the second determined signal is output.

  Furthermore, the lighting device may be configured to have different lighting modes according to the type of the confirmation signal or the ball entry signal output to the outside. For example, the lighting color, the lighting operation (lighting timing, presence or absence of blinking, etc.), the light emission amount, and the like are different depending on whether the first determination signal is output to the outside or the second determination signal is output. May be

  (An) Output history confirmation means capable of confirming the external output history of the first determination signal and the second determination signal from the outside (such as a player) may be used. In this case, the variation display by entering the game ball to the first start winning device 33a, and the occurrence frequency and generation state (such as the order of occurrence) of the variation display by entering the game ball to the second start winning device 33b The player or the like can grasp it more accurately. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a trouble caused by misinterpreting the pseudo entering detection corresponding display with the entering detection corresponding display.

  In addition, as the output history confirmation means, for example, the first confirmation signal and the second confirmation signal are input, and the number of times of variation display due to the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a; There can be mentioned a data counter device configured to be able to separately display the number of variation displays due to the game ball entering. In addition, as output history confirmation means, for example, it is provided in pachinko machine 10 and arranged in one or a plurality of rows so as to be able to confirm the generation order of the variable display, and lights up corresponding to the output of the confirmation signal. A lighting device comprising a plurality of light emitting means, wherein the light emission mode (lighting color) in the light emitting means differs between the case where the first definite signal is outputted to the outside and the case where the second definite signal is outputted to the outside, The display content displayed on one light emitting means is shifted to the adjacent light emitting means and displayed (so-called shift register) whenever one of the first and second determined signals is outputted to the outside And the like. Incidentally, by providing the output history confirmation means in the pachinko machine 10 or in the vicinity thereof, it is possible to explain on the spot (the side of the pachinko machine 10) that it is a misunderstanding even if the trouble as described above occurs. , Early resolution of trouble can be aimed at.

  (Ao) In the above embodiment, when the external output process (step S201) of the normal process is executed, if the determination signal or the ball entry signal is already set, the determination signal or the like is always output. Although configured, according to output information such as a command or signal to be output in the external output processing (for example, according to the number of output information, the amount of data, etc.), the external output timing of the decision signal or the input signal May be configured to be changed. For example, when the determination signal and the ball entry signal have been set, and when the external output processing (step S201) is reached, there is a relatively large amount of output information such as a command or signal externally output other than the determination signal and the like. In the present external output processing, the determination signal or the like may not be output, and the determination signal or the like may be output in the next or subsequent external output processing.

  (Ap) In the above embodiment, the confirmation signal and the ball entry signal are externally output to the hall computer HC and the data counter device, but the external output destination such as the confirmation signal is limited to these. It is possible to change as appropriate.

[Supplementary note]
The technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

Means 1. A game area in which game balls fired by a predetermined launch means are guided;
A first start winning (entering) means capable of entering game balls in the game area;
The game area is provided separately from the first start winning means in the game area, and it is possible to switch between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or unable to enter the ball and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. 2 start winning combination (entry) means,
First start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the first start winning means;
Second start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the second start winning means;
Based on the detection of the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means, perform a lottery of whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, based on the result of the lottery Main control means for generating the special game state;
Special symbol display means for performing final display of the special symbol in a mode based on the lottery result of the acceptance lottery after the variation display of the predetermined special symbol is performed;
Special symbol display control means for controlling the special symbol display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
A game machine characterized by comprising second confirmation signal output means for externally outputting a second confirmation signal indicating that a variable display associated with entry of a game ball to the second start winning means is determined.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is possible that a lottery is made to determine whether or not the special gaming state (big hit state) is generated by the launched gaming ball flowing down the game area and entering the start winning means. It has become. In addition, after the predetermined special symbol display means is subjected to the variable display of the predetermined special symbol, the final display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to simply as the confirmation of the variable display or Sometimes referred to as fluctuation determination).

  As the start winning means, the first start winning means in which the game ball can always enter in the game area, the open state in which the game ball can enter easily, and the game ball can not enter or is difficult to enter. There may be provided second start winning means that can be switched to the state. In a normal state (e.g., a low ball entry state), it is generally set such that the game ball does not frequently enter the second start winning means.

  In addition, in the gaming machine, when a special game state (big hit state) occurs, when a game ball enters a start winning means, when a prize ball is paid out, when an error such as opening a door occurs, etc. There is one which externally outputs various signals to the processing means. Conventionally, a signal (hereinafter referred to as a first determination signal) indicating the determination of the variable display by entering the game ball to the first start winning means (the first start winning means and the second start winning means) Regardless, there may be a case where a signal (hereinafter, referred to as a third determination signal) indicating the determination of the fluctuation display by entering the gaming ball into any of the two start winning means is output to the outside. On the other hand, it is normal that a signal (referred to as a second determination signal) indicating the determination of the variable display due to the entering of the game ball to the second start winning means is not externally output. This is because, as described above, normally, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning means, and it is also difficult for the variation display due to the game ball to enter the second start winning means.

  However, in the gaming machine of the type which externally outputs only the first confirmation signal, the external processing means can not detect the confirmation of the fluctuation display due to the game ball entering the second start winning means. Further, in the gaming machine of the type that externally outputs only the third confirmation signal, it is not possible to determine which of the start-up winning means the variable display is due to the entry of the game ball. Further, in the gaming machine of the type which externally outputs the first determination signal and the third determination signal, the determination of the fluctuation display by the game ball entering the second start winning means is detected based on both signals in the external processing means. Although it is possible, the processing load will increase. Therefore, these types of gaming machines are not easy to use for the hall side or the maker side of the external processing means. Therefore, a gaming machine capable of performing more convenient external output is desired.

  In this respect, according to the means 1, the second determination signal indicating the determination of the variable display by the ball entry of the gaming ball to the second starting winning means is independently output externally. Therefore, it is possible to detect in the external processing means that the variable display due to the game ball entering the second start winning means is determined without performing extra processing. Also, in the external processing means, processing relating to fluctuation display by entering the game ball to the second start winning means (for example, detecting the determination timing of fluctuation display by entering the game ball to the second start winning means, It becomes possible to perform more easily by measuring the fixed number of the said fluctuation display etc.). As a result, it is possible to improve the usability of the hall side or the manufacturer side of the external processing means.

  In addition, the game ball enters the second start winning means (corresponding to the opening and closing start winning means in the means B-1) relatively easily in the means A-1-a, the means B-1, etc. described later. In the conventional method, when the configuration is relatively easy to cause fluctuation display due to the ball entering the second start winning means, the processing load of the external processing means or the like may extremely increase. According to the above means 1, even in the case where variation display due to entering the game ball to the second starting winning means is relatively easy to occur, it is possible to effectively suppress an increase in processing load. In other words, the above means 1 is particularly effective in the means A-1-a, the means B-1 and the like described later.

  By the way, it is conceivable that in the external processing means, it is possible to grasp the total approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the starting winning means, based on the confirmation signal inputted from the gaming machine. Here, in the normal time (low ball entry condition), almost no game balls enter the second starting winning means, and consequently, almost all payouts of the game balls due to the game balls entering the second starting winning means In the case of a configuration that does not occur, the external processing means grasps the total approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into both start winning means in the normal time based on only the first determination signal or the third determination signal. I can do it. However, when entering the game ball into the second starting winning means is likely to occur at normal time (low entering state), entering the game ball into both starting winning means in the normal time based on the first confirmation signal The total number of game balls paid out can not be grasped. Also, in order to grasp the total approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into both starting winning means at the normal time based on the third confirmation signal, for example, payout is made when the gaming balls enter the ball The condition that the number of game balls to be played is set to the same number for both start winning means is required.

  On the other hand, according to the above means 1, in the external processing means, based on the number of inputs of the second determination signal, the total approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the second starting winning means is grasped be able to. As a result, in the external processing means, it is possible to grasp the total approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into both start winning means in the normal time more easily and more accurately. Therefore, the usability for the hole side can be further enhanced. That is, the means 1 is likely to cause the game ball to enter the second starting winning means (for example, in the means A-1-a and the means B-1 described later, even if the ball is in a low entering state, the second starting winning is achieved) This is particularly effective in the case where entry of the game ball to the means is relatively easy to occur.

Means 2. Triggered by entering the game ball to the first start winning means or the second start winning means, a high entering ball that the game ball can enter the second start winning means more easily than a predetermined low entering state It has ball entry state switching means that can be switched to the state,
The second finalized signal output means includes, as the second finalized signal, a low final entering second finalized signal indicating that the variable display has been established in the low entering state, and a variable display in the high entering state. The gaming machine according to the means 1, characterized in that it is possible to externally output a high entry-time second decision signal indicating that the game has been decided.

  According to the above means 2, in the external processing means etc., the variation display by entering the game ball to the second start winning means does not obtain information on the entering state separately from the second determination signal, either of which is entered It can be grasped whether it occurred in the ball state. Moreover, it becomes easy to divide and perform the process regarding the fluctuation | variation display by the ball entering of the game ball to a 2nd start winning means in a high ball entering state and a low ball entering state. For example, the number of determinations of variation display by entering the second starting winning means in the high entering state and the number of determination of variation displays by entering the second starting winning means in the low entering state are separately counted. Things will be easier. Thereby, the usability for the hole side etc. can be further improved.

  Furthermore, based on the finalized number of the fluctuation display by entering the second starting winning means in each entering state, it is possible to easily grasp the entering state of the gaming ball to the second starting winning means in each entering state it can. Therefore, based on the obtained data, on the hole side, adjustment related to the entry of the game ball to the second starting winning means in at least one of the low entering state and the high entering state (for example, means A-1 described later) In the case of -a, means B-1, etc., it becomes possible to easily carry out adjustment etc.) to make it relatively easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning means even in a low ball entry condition. . Thereby, the usability for the hole side can be further improved.

  Means 3. A means according to the means 1 or 2 is characterized in that it has a first definite signal output means for externally outputting a first definite signal indicating that a variable display accompanying the entry of the gaming ball to the first starting winning means has been finalized. Gaming machine.

  According to the above-mentioned means 3, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation determination by the entering of the game ball to the first starting winning means in the external processing means or the like. Thereby, the usability for the hole side etc. can be further improved.

Means 4. It has a payout means to pay out the game ball,
The number of gaming balls paid out by the entry of one gaming ball to the first starting winning means, and the number of gaming balls paid out by the entry of one gaming ball to the second starting winning means The gaming machine according to the means 3 characterized in that it is different.

  In addition, the number of gaming balls paid out by entering one of the gaming balls into the first starting winning means, or the number of gaming balls paid out by entering of one gaming ball into the second starting winning means , 0 may be.

  It is conceivable that in the external processing means, it is possible to grasp the total approximate number of gaming balls paid out by the entry of the gaming balls into the starting winning means, based on the confirmation signal inputted from the gaming machine.

  Here, when only the first determination signal is externally output, the external processing means is an approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the game ball into the first start winning means based on the number of inputs of the first determination signal. However, it is impossible to grasp the approximate number of gaming balls to be paid out by entering the gaming balls into the second starting winning means. In addition, when only the third determination signal is externally output, the number of gaming balls paid out by the entry of one gaming ball to the first starting winning means (hereinafter referred to as the first starting winning payout number), If the number of gaming balls to be paid out by entering one of the gaming balls to the second starting winning means (hereinafter referred to as the second starting winning payout number) is the same number, the external processing means is the third confirmation signal It is possible to grasp the total approximate number of gaming balls paid out by the entry of the gaming balls into both start winning means based on the number of inputs of. However, when the number of first start winning payouts is different from the number of second starting winning payouts, it is not possible to grasp the total approximate number of gaming balls paid out by the entry of the gaming balls into both starting winning means.

  In this respect, according to the above means 4, although the number of first start winning payouts and the number of second starting winning payouts are different, since the first determination signal and the second determination signal are externally output, In the processing means, based on the number of inputs of the first determination signal, it is possible to grasp the approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the first start winning means, and also the number of inputs of the second determination signal It becomes possible to grasp the approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the second starting winning means based on the above. That is, the approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the starting winning means, the number due to entering the gaming balls into the first starting winning means, and the entering of the gaming balls into the second starting winning means It can be divided and grasped. Furthermore, from the number of payouts due to entering the game ball to the first start winning means and the number of payouts due to entering the game ball to the second start winning means, the game balls are paid out by entering the game balls to both start winning means The total number of game balls can be grasped relatively easily and accurately. As a result of these, the convenience for the hole side and the like can be further enhanced.

  In addition, in normal time (low ball entry state), almost no game ball entry to the second start winning means occurs, and consequently there is almost no payout for the game ball by entering the game ball to the second start winning means In the case of the configuration, the external processing means can grasp the approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the two start winning means at the normal time based on only the first determination signal or the third determination signal. . However, when entering the game ball into the second starting winning means is likely to occur at normal time (low entering state), the first starting winning payout number is different from the second starting winning payout number. And, based on only the first determination signal or the third determination signal, it is not possible to grasp the approximate number of gaming balls paid out by entering the gaming balls into the two start winning means in normal times. On the other hand, according to the above means 4, even if it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the second starting winning means, it is paid out by entering the game ball to both starting winning means as described above. It is possible to accurately grasp the total number of game balls. In other words, the means 4 is likely to cause the game ball to enter the second starting winning means (for example, in the means A-1-a and the means B-1 described later, even if the second ball is in the low ball entry state) This is particularly effective in the case where entry of the game ball to the start winning means is relatively easy to occur.

  Means 5. The first start winning means or the second start winning means is characterized by having third decision signal output means for externally outputting a third decision signal indicating that a variable display associated with entering the game ball has been decided. A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.

  According to the above-mentioned means 5, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation determination by the entry of the game ball to any of the two start winning means in the external processing means or the like. Therefore, the usability for the hole side and the like can be further improved.

Means 6. Second fluctuation number information grasping means for grasping second fluctuation number information indicating the number of times of determination of fluctuation display caused by the game ball entering the second starting winning means;
A game machine according to any one of the means 1 to 5, further comprising second fluctuation number output means for externally outputting a second fluctuation number signal based on the second fluctuation number information.

  According to the means 6, the second fluctuation number signal indicating the determined number of fluctuation display due to the game ball entering the second starting winning means is externally output. Therefore, in the external processing means or the like, it is possible to obtain the fixed number information (the second fluctuation number information) of the fluctuation display by the game ball entering the second starting winning means, which is grasped by the gaming machine. Thereby, in the external processing means etc., the fixed number of the fluctuation display by the entering of the game ball to the second starting winning means is both based on the second confirmation signal and the one based on the second fluctuation number signal. It can be grasped by this, and the accuracy of data can be secured more. In addition, since more reliable data can be obtained, usability for the hole side and the like can be further enhanced. Furthermore, when adopting means A-1-a, means B-1 and the like to be described later based on the obtained highly reliable data, an adjustment relating to the entering of the game ball to the second start winning means etc. It can carry out more precisely.

Means 7. The gaming machine described in the means 3;
A gaming machine system comprising: external processing means for receiving the first determination signal and the second determination signal from the gaming machine;
The external processing means can determine whether or not the entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second start winning means is a predetermined proper state based on the input first confirmation signal and the input second confirmation signal. A game machine system characterized by comprising determination means.

  According to the above-mentioned means 7, in the external processing means, the second confirmation signal (more specifically, relates to the determination of the fluctuation display by entering the gaming ball to the second start winning means obtained directly from the second confirmation signal It is determined using the information) whether or not the entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second starting winning means is a predetermined proper state. Therefore, for example, processing for indirectly obtaining information on determination of the fluctuation display by entering the game ball to the second starting winning means from the first determination signal and the third determination signal becomes unnecessary, and the determination process can be performed. The burden can be reduced.

  Furthermore, on the hole side, it is easy to detect an illegal act or to judge whether or not the entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second start winning means is appropriate, from the determination result by the external processing means. It becomes possible. Thereby, on the hole side, appropriate processing according to the determination result can be more reliably performed. For example, when means A-1-a, means B-1 and the like to be described later are adopted in the gaming machine, it is possible to more easily perform adjustment and the like related to the entry of the game ball to the second starting winning means.

Means 8. The external processing means is
First variation determined number grasping means for grasping the finalized number of variation displays associated with the game ball entering the first start winning means based on the input first decision signal;
A second variation fixed number grasping means for grasping the finalized number of the variable display associated with the game ball entering the second starting winning means on the basis of the input second definite signal;
The determination means
Based on the determined number of the fluctuation display grasped by the first fluctuation determined number grasping means and the settled number of the fluctuation display grasped by the second fluctuation determined number grasping means, the entry of the game ball to the second starting winning means It is possible to determine whether or not the ball state is a predetermined proper state, and the gaming machine system according to the means 7.

  According to the above-mentioned means 8, it can be more easily judged whether or not the entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second starting winning means is the proper state.

Means 9. The gaming machine is
First entry signal output means for externally outputting a first entry signal indicating entry of game balls to the first start winning means;
And second ball entry signal output means for externally outputting a second ball entry signal indicating the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning means,
The determination means is a game ball for the second start winning means based on the input first determination signal and the second determination signal, and the input first entering ball signal and the second entering ball signal. It is possible to determine whether or not the ball entry state of is a predetermined proper state, or the game machine system according to the means 7 or 8.

  According to the means 9, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second starting winning means is the predetermined proper state based on both the determination signal and the ball entering signal. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second start winning means is in the proper state. Further, when means A-1-a, means B-1 and the like to be described later are adopted in the gaming machine, it is possible to more accurately adjust the ball for entering the game ball to the second starting winning means.

Means 10. The gaming machine described in Means 5;
A gaming machine system comprising: external processing means for receiving the second determination signal and the third determination signal from the gaming machine;
The external processing means can determine whether or not the entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second start winning means is in a predetermined proper state, based on the input second determination signal and the third determination signal. A game machine system characterized by comprising determination means.

  According to the above means 10, substantially the same function and effect as the above means 7 is exerted.

Means 11. The external processing means is
Second variation confirmed number grasping means for grasping the finalized number of the variable indication accompanying the ball entry of the game ball to the second starting winning means, based on the input second deciding signal;
And third variation fixed number grasping means for grasping the finalized number of the variable display accompanying the ball entry to the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means based on the inputted third deciding signal. ,
The determination means
Based on the determined number of the variable display grasped by the third variation finalized number grasping means and the finalized number of the variable indication grasped by the second variation finalized number grasping means, the entry of the game ball to the second starting winning means It is possible to determine whether or not the ball state is a predetermined proper state, and the gaming machine system according to the means 10.

  According to the means 11, substantially the same effect as that of the means 8 is exerted.

Means 12. The gaming machine is
First entry signal output means for externally outputting a first entry signal indicating entry of game balls to the first start winning means;
And third input signal output means for externally outputting a third input signal indicating the entry of the game ball to the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means,
The determination means is a game ball for the second start winning means, based on the input second determination signal and the third determination signal, and the input second entering ball signal and the third entering ball signal. It is possible to determine whether or not the ball entry state of is a predetermined proper state, or the game machine system according to the means 10 or 11.

  According to the above means 12, basically the same function and effect as the above means 9 is exerted.

Means 13. The gaming machine is subordinate to the above means 2, and
The determination means determines whether or not the ball entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second starting winning means is a preset proper state, in the case of the high entering state and in the low entering state A gaming machine system according to any one of the means 7 to 12, which can be separately implemented in certain cases.

  According to the means 13, the determination as to whether or not the entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second starting winning means is the proper state can be separately executed for each of the high entering state and the low entering state. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately grasp the entering state of the gaming ball with respect to the second start winning means in each of the high entering state and the low entering state. Therefore, the usability for the hole side and the like can be further enhanced, and the processing according to the determination result can be more appropriately performed on the hole side. For example, when means A-1-a, means B-1 and the like described later are adopted in the gaming machine, it is possible to more accurately adjust the ball for entering the game ball to the second starting winning means.

  In addition, it is also possible to combine suitably the invention described in this specification including the following each means AE in the means 1-13 mentioned above.

  A. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the firing means enters the start winning means provided on the game board, a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a hit state is performed, and the variable display means performs the lottery The variable display for teaching the result of is performed (for example, refer to JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, as the start winning means, for example, the first start winning means capable of constantly entering the game ball, and the second capable of entering the game ball only when winning in a predetermined opening lottery In the configuration provided with start winning means, if it is difficult to enter the game ball in the first start winning means without winning in the opening lottery, it becomes relatively difficult to smoothly play the game At the same time, there is concern that the image of the gaming machine will deteriorate and the gaming intention will be significantly reduced.

  On the other hand, for example, by arranging the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means close to each other and increasing the opportunity for opening the second starting winning means, it is possible to use the first starting winning means, for example. Even if the game ball is difficult to enter, the second start winning means can easily enter the game ball, and it is possible to avoid a reduction in the ease of entering the start winning means as a whole. It is conceivable to adopt

  However, in general, in pachinko machines, a game in which a game ball is shot out aiming at a first start winning means capable of always entering a game ball is basically used. For this reason, an impression as to whether or not the gaming ball is likely to enter the first starting winning means tends to be stronger for the player. Therefore, by improving the ease of entering the second starting winning means, it is possible to compensate for the difficulty in entering the gaming ball into the first starting winning means (even the first starting winning means). Even if the ease of entering the game ball into the game is reduced, the ease of entering the game ball as a whole to the first and second start winning means is not inferior or rather improves. Even if it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start winning means, and (almost) it is not repeated, the impression on the game machine, the game hall where the game machine is installed, etc. There is concern that it will deteriorate.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its object is to deteriorate the impression caused by the decrease in the ease of entering the game ball into the first starting winning means. Providing a gaming machine capable of suppressing

Means A-1-a. Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and to which a game ball fired by the launch means is guided;
First start winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
The game ball moving in the game area is configured to be changeable between an open state in which the ball can enter the ball and a closed state in which the ball can not enter the ball or in which it is difficult to enter the ball. A second start winning means disposed downstream of the area);
First start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the first start winning means;
Second start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the second start winning means;
Based on the detection of the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means, perform a lottery of whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, based on the result of the lottery It is a gaming machine provided with a main control means for generating the special game state,
The game area is provided at a distance allowing game balls to pass between the game board and the game board, and is provided with a front covering means that collectively covers at least the first start winning means and the second start winning means. A game machine characterized by having

  According to the means A-1-a, by providing the front covering means for collectively covering the front of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means, around the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means The visibility of the game ball moving through is relatively lowered, and it becomes difficult to understand which of the first start winning means and the second start winning means the game ball has entered. Therefore, the second start winning means is set to be opened with a balance such that the time zone in which the player is likely to feel stress is reduced, such as not being able to receive a lottery due to firing game balls. If the player has made the game ball enter the back side of the pre-covering means, the game ball enters either the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means. It becomes possible to advance the game in the sense that the acceptance lottery is received. That is, even if the ball pitch of the game ball to the first starting winning means is low, if the game ball enters the second starting winning means relatively easily, since the winning or losing lottery can be received constantly Since there is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it becomes difficult to visually identify which of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means the game ball has entered, the first starting gradually It doesn't bother about whether it is easy for the game ball to enter the winning means. As a result, even if the ease of entering the gaming ball to the first starting winning means is reduced, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression resulting from that, and to receive much stress Can play the game without

  Further, by providing the pre-covering means, the sense of unity of the peripheral portions of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means can be enhanced. That is, if the game ball is shot with the aim of the front covering means, a relatively easy-to-understand visual image of entering either of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means can be obtained. Further, it is possible to perform more dynamic decoration and the like in the pre-covering means which collectively covers the first start winning means and the second start winning means, and the design can be improved.

  The pre-covering means may be formed integrally with the part covering the first starting winning means and the part covering the second starting winning means (integrally formed or combined separately). And those separately configured may be arranged adjacent to each other. In addition, “a part of the front covering means through which game balls can pass through at least the rear game area (for example, covers the front of winning means such as the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means) In the region other than the region), it may be configured to be transparent (made of a transparent or translucent material, or to form a slit, etc.). In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation where a player or the like who is playing a game for the first time becomes uneasy because he can not see what is happening behind the front covering means. Also, for example, the pre-covering means may be used as a place to teach the player predetermined information. For example, it may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning lottery, etc.) on the pre-covering means, or to display an image character or the like. In addition, "pre-covering means may be attached to the game board".

Means A-1-b. The first start winning means is disposed upstream of the game area with respect to the second start winning means,
The game nails erected on the front of the game board include a pair of left and right nails provided above the left and right sides of the winning opening of the first start winning means, and passes between the pair of life nails A game ball entering the first starting winning means,
The gaming machine according to the means A-1-a, wherein the pre-covering means is configured to cover also the front of the nail.

  According to the means A-1-b, it can be made more difficult to visually recognize that the gaming ball enters the first starting winning means. Therefore, the determination that the game ball has entered the first start winning means can be made based on various matters derived as a result of the game ball entering the first start winning means. . As a result, it is possible to further promote the game that is not particularly sensitive to the pace at which the game ball enters the first starting winning means.

Means A-2-a. The second start winning means includes a blade member which is displaceable between an open position for allowing game balls to enter the second start win means and a closed position for restricting the game ball.
The front covering means is provided so as to cover the front of at least a portion of the blade member in the closed position and a portion of the blade member in the open position. The gaming machine described in -1.

  According to the means A-2-a, the second start winning means is in the open state where the entry of the game ball moving in the game area is permitted by the blade member being in the open position, and the blade member is in the closed position It will be in the closed state which regulates the ball entry of a game ball by being made.

  "The second start winning means receives a game ball moving in the game area, and moves the ball reception section guiding the outside of the game area, and the game area on the side of the ball reception section. Between the open position for guiding the game ball to the ball receiving portion and the closed position for restricting the movement of the game ball moving the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion to the ball receiving portion side And “displaceable blade members”. In addition, a part of the start winning means (for example, a front wall of a ball receiving portion for receiving a game ball moving in the game area and guiding it to an opening formed in the game board) is formed by the front covering means. It may be

Means A-2-b. The pre-covering means comprises a first object display which shapes a first object;
The blade member (a pseudo blade member corresponding to means A-3-b described later) includes a second object display unit that shapes a second object,
The second object is achieved by the blade member (corresponding to the means A-3-b being a false blade member) being brought into the open position (corresponding to the means A-3-b being a functional position) Becomes a complete display state that shapes the third object together with the first object,
The second object is achieved by the blade member (corresponding to the means A-3-b being a false blade member) being brought into the closed position (corresponding to the means A-3-b being a standby position). The gaming machine according to the means A-2-a, which is an incomplete display state in which all or most of the characters are hidden behind the first object.

  According to the means A-2-b, the first object display unit is provided for the front covering means, and the blade member (a pseudo-feather member corresponding to the means A-3-b described later) By providing a second object display unit that displays a second object in which the third object is shaped together with the first object when in the open position, the third object moves partially along with the movement of the wing member. While gathering the line of sight, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the pre-covering means or to reduce the player's interest in the game ball entering the start winning means. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression caused by the decrease in the ease of entering the game ball into the first start winning means is further exhibited.

  Means A-2-c. That the tip end of the blade member (the pseudo blade member corresponding to the means A-3-b) in the open position is located outward of the outer peripheral edge of the front covering means The gaming machine according to the means A-2-a or A-2-b characterized by the above.

  According to the means A-2-c, it is easy to recognize that the blade member has been displaced to the open position (corresponding to the means A-3-b, that the pseudo blade member has been displaced to the functional position) it can.

  Means A-2-d-1. It comprises: an open-time covering means disposed forward of the blade member and covering the front of the blade member in the open position; and a closed-means covering the front of the blade member in the closed position. The gaming machine according to the means A-2-a characterized by the above.

  According to the means A-2-d-1, since the blade members in the closed position and the open position are concealed, it can be made difficult to grasp which of the open position and the closed position the blade member is in.

Means A-2-d-2. The pre-covering means comprises an object display which shapes a predetermined object;
The object display unit includes an open covering portion as the open covering means for covering the front of the wing member in the open position, and a closing covering means for covering the front of the wing member in the closed position. A game machine described in means A-2-d-1 comprising a closed cover portion.

  According to the means A-2-d-2, by providing the object display unit to the pre-covering means, while focusing on the pre-covering means, the visibility of the back side of the pre-covering means is reduced or the start-up is caused. It is possible to reduce the player's interest in the game ball entering the winning means. Further, since the blade member is concealed by the covering portion at the time of opening and the covering portion at the time of closing, it can be made difficult to grasp which of the open position and the closed position. In addition, as the object display unit, it is possible to derive an aspect as if the object is moving (by the afterimage effect) by using the displacement of the blade member.

Means A-2-e. The first start winning means is disposed upstream of the game area with respect to the second start winning means,
The game nails erected on the front of the game board include a pair of left and right nails provided above the left and right sides of the winning opening of the first start winning means, and passes between the pair of life nails A game ball entering the first starting winning means,
The object display unit of the pre-covering unit has an index unit that indicates an appropriate position of the (head of the nail) at a position near the pair of nails. The gaming machine according to any one of 2-b to A-2-d.

  According to the means A-2-e, it is accurately and promptly judged whether the interval between the life nails is wide or narrow compared with the pair of left and right life nails and the index part. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to relatively judge whether or not maintenance is necessary for the life nail, or when the player looks at the indicator section and the distance between the life nails is narrow and so on. The game can be avoided so as not to be disadvantageous. As a result, the distance between the nails can be made as constant as possible, and the variation of the gaming machines among the machines can be reduced with respect to the ease of entering the gaming balls into the first starting winning means. In particular, since the index part is provided in the pre-covering means, it is close to the tip (head) of the nail, which makes it possible to grasp the inclination of the nail more reliably.

Means A-3-a. At least a portion of the pre-covering means is transparent;
In the state where the blade member is in the closed position, the device includes pseudo blade opening means capable of deriving a pseudo blade open mode as if the blade member is in the open position (a position other than the closed position) The gaming machine according to the means A-2 characterized in that:

  If the wing member is in the closed position, it is not possible to cause the game ball to enter the second starting winning means. For this reason, a player who admits that the wing member is in the closed position tends to shift his eyes to the first start winning means and observe whether or not the game ball enters the first start winning means. .

  In this respect, according to the means A-3-a, even when it is not the timing at which the second start winning means is opened, the pseudo-blade open mode is derived as if the blade member is in the open position. Thereby, the opportunity for the predetermined | prescribed action related to a blade member from the visual recognition aspect which the 2nd start winning means is made to close can be increased. Therefore, if the player who is interested in making the second start winning means open, the second start winning means recognizes that any action has occurred in the second start winning means in the closed state. It is also conceivable to turn the line of sight to the second start winning means as if it was in the open state. However, in fact, it may be a pseudo-vane release mode, and the pseudo-vane release mode is an aspect as if the wing member is in the open position, so It is possible to distinguish whether the blade member is in the open position or whether the blade member is in the closed position only when the pseudo blade release mode is derived, by just looking or entering the end of the field of view. It is difficult (or momentarily) to misunderstand that the blade member is displaced to the open position.

  As described above, the pseudo-feather opening mode is for the purpose of making the feather member appear as if it were released, which makes it appear that the feather member is opened, but the game ball is in the second start winning means In the condition that there is no sign of entering the ball, the entering state of the gaming ball of the second starting winning means and the appearance of the second starting winning means do not necessarily coincide. Then, if the pseudo-feather opening mode is repeated to a certain extent, the gaming ball is constantly entering the second starting winning means etc. and there is no delay in the game (the gaming ball is not entering the starting winning means too much) (If it is not in a state of being forced to play a disadvantageous game), it can lead to a feeling that the user is not bothered as to whether or not the wing members are opened. As a result, even if the ease of entering the gaming ball into the first starting winning means is reduced, the effect that the deterioration of the impression resulting from that can be suppressed can be further enhanced. It will be played.

  Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing at which the second starting winning means is brought into the open state (or the closed state) by the pseudo blade open mode. Therefore, the gap between the advanced player who can play the game that the second starting winning means is opened and the game ball is fired only at the timing when the game ball can enter and the difference between the beginner player and the player Can prevent the situation that

  In addition, it is possible to perform an effect as mere liveliness regardless of the opening and closing of the blade members and the effect related to the opening and closing of the blade members using the pseudo blade open mode. In addition, when the game is in progress, the pseudo-feather open mode becomes part of the game scene, and becomes accent and bustling in the game, or becomes a rhythm (feeling lonely when lost), and it is possible to improve the interest.

  In the state where the false blade open mode is derived (for example, the false blade member described later is in the functional position), the blade member in the closed position is positioned regardless of whether the blade member is in the closed position or not. It is desirable to be configured so that the change in the visual aspect of the place to be done is reduced. For example, if a cover is provided to cover the front of the blade member (and the pseudo blade member) in the closed position, or if the blade member is displaced to the open position corresponding to the rear position of the blade member in the closed position. It may be configured to be visible and to be designed to imitate (the front surface shape of) the blade member. In this case, it is more difficult to determine whether the false blade open mode is only derived or whether the blade member is also in the open position (whether or not the blade member is in the closed position), and false feather By providing the means, the operation and effect can be further enhanced.

Means A-3-b-1. The false blade opening means may be disposed in front of the blade member, and may cover a front of the blade member in the closed position and a functional position capable of covering the front of the blade member in the open position. It has a dummy blade member that can be displaced between the standby position and
A game ball is configured to be able to pass through the game area behind the pseudo blade member when the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. The gaming machine described in A-3-a.

  According to the means A-3-b-1, it is possible to more accurately derive the pseudo-blade opening mode. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide a pseudo-vane opening means imitating the aspect of the wing member at the rear of the wing member, but in this case, such pseudo-vane opening means is disposed relatively backward. There is a concern that the blade opening means is difficult to see even if it is in the pseudo blade opening mode. In addition, the game ball may pass in front of the artificial feather opening means in the artificial feather opening mode. By these, there exists a possibility that it may be grasped | ascertained immediately that pseudo | simulation blade open | release aspect is pseudo | simulation. In this respect, the above-mentioned concern can be eliminated by providing the artificial blade member in front of the blade member.

  In addition, since the artificial feather member can be displaced to the functional position while the feather member is in the closed position, the artificial feather member can be used without causing the game ball to enter the second start winning means more than necessary. Make full use of effects such as the mode in which the character operates (eg, the mode in which the second start winning means opens (slightly) when the pseudo feather member is part of the character display). Can.

  The shape of the pseudo-vane member is not limited to a plate shape, and for example, it is an open in the displacement direction of the pseudo-vane member, and has a quadrangular frame shape capable of accommodating the vane member inside, It may be configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section with a part cut away. In addition, regarding the means A-2-c, the pseudo-vane member in the functional position may protrude outward beyond the outer edge of the front covering means. That is, while making the whereabouts of the blade members unclear, while making the whereabouts of the pseudo blade members easy to understand, the effect using the pseudo blade members is recognized, while the opening and closing of the blade members takes care. It is possible to have the game progress while suppressing being played.

  Means A-3-b-2. In the case of the means A-3-b-1, characterized in that the pseudo blade opening means displaces the pseudo blade member also to the functional position when the blade member is displaced to the open position. Gaming machine.

  According to the means A-3-b-2, when the blade member is in the open position, an aspect in which the blade member is viewed from the front, and although the blade member is in the closed position but the pseudo blade member is in the functional position An aspect in which the pseudo blade member is viewed from the front can be made the same (the pseudo blade member in both functional positions is visually recognized). Therefore, the reality of the false feather open mode can be further enhanced. In addition, when the configuration is adopted, it is not necessary to make the aspect on the front surface side of the blade member the same as that of the pseudo blade member, and processing such as drawing a figure on the front surface of the blade member etc. It does not have to be done. For this reason, simplification of the structure of the blade member can be achieved, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member, the figure or the like is rubbed with the pseudo blade member and the designability is reduced. It is possible to prevent doing things etc.

  Means A-3-b-3. The blade member and the pseudo blade member are configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the blade member and the rotation axis of the pseudo blade member extend on the same straight line. The gaming machine described in 3-b-1 or A-3-b-2.

  According to the means A-3-b-3, the movement of the blade member and the movement of the pseudo blade member can be relatively easily synchronized. Therefore, for example, even while the blade member is being displaced between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member can be displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member to cover the front of the blade member. Therefore, the effects such as making the whereabouts of the blade members indistinct can be further enhanced. The pseudo shaft connected to the pseudo blade member may be inserted into the substantially cylindrical blade shaft connected to the blade member. In this case, it is possible to relatively easily extend the rotational axes of the blade member and the pseudo blade member on the same straight line.

  Means A-3-b-4. The blade member presses the pseudo blade member when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, thereby moving the pseudo blade member from the standby position to the functional position. A gaming machine according to any one of the means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-3, characterized in that it comprises a section.

  According to the means A-3-b-4, when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, when the blade member is driven first (mainly), the pseudo blade member follows it. Become. For this reason, it is avoided that each operate separately, and it is possible to move the blade members and the pseudo blade members in synchronization as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the functional position are deviated, and the blade member is displaced to the open position or only the dummy blade member is displaced to the functional position It is possible to avoid the situation where it becomes easy to understand whether it is only

  In the case of displacing the blade member from the closed position to the open position and displacing the pseudo blade member from the standby position to the functional position, blade side drive means for operating the blade member, and the pseudo blade Among the pseudo side drive means for operating the member, the blade side drive means may be driven.

  Means A-3-b-5. The pseudo blade member presses the blade member when the pseudo blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, thereby causing the blade member to be displaced from the open position to the closed position. A game machine according to any one of the means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-4, characterized in that it comprises a section.

  According to the means A-3-b-5, when the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, and the pseudo blade member is driven first (mainly), the blade member follows it. Become. For this reason, it is avoided that each operate separately, and it is possible to move the blade members and the pseudo blade members in synchronization as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the closed position and the operation of the artificial blade member displaced to the standby position are deviated, and whether the blade member was in the open position or only the artificial blade member is functional position It is possible to avoid the situation where it becomes easy to understand if it was only present in

  In the case of displacing the blade member from the open position to the closed position and displacing the pseudo blade member from the functional position to the standby position, blade side drive means for operating the blade member, and the pseudo blade Among the pseudo side drive means for operating the member, the pseudo side drive means may be driven.

  Means A-3-b-6. The blade member is made of a material that is colorless and transparent, or a material having a hue similar to the color of the member located behind the blade member in the open position. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to A-3-b-5.

  According to the means A-3-b-6, it is possible to make the blade member difficult to visually recognize (the operation and location of the blade member become difficult to check). Therefore, the effect of enhancing the reality of the pseudo-blade open mode is further enhanced.

Means A-3-b-7. A sub control unit capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control unit;
The opening and closing control of the second start winning means is executed by the main control means.
Means A-3- characterized in that drive control of the pseudo-blade opening means is executed by the sub-control means (corresponding to information on opening and closing of the second start winning means from the main control means). The gaming machine according to any one of b-1 to A-3-b-6.

  According to the means A-3-b-7, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control means.

Means A-3-b-8. The pseudo-blade opening means is
When the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member in the standby position is displaced to the functional position;
When the blade member in the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo blade member in the functional position is displaced to the functional position.
The main control means outputs, to the sub control means, release schedule information to the effect that the blade member is displaced to the open position prior to the process of displacing the blade member to the open position.
The gaming machine according to the means A-3-b-7, wherein the sub control means displaces the pseudo blade member to the standby position when receiving the release schedule information.

  According to the means A-3-b-8, when the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member is already in the functional position, so that the blade member in the middle of displacement is a pseudo blade member. It is possible to avoid the situation where it can not be covered.

Means A-3-b-9. The area of the front surface of the pseudo blade member is larger than that of the blade member,
When the blade member is in the open position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the side portion of the pseudo blade member on the standby position side than the surface on the closed position side of the blade member Is located on the closed position side,
When the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the standby position, the side portion of the pseudo blade member on the functional position side than the surface on the open position side of the blade member The gaming machine according to the means A-3-b-7 or the means A-3-b-8, characterized in that one is located on the open position side.

  When the opening and closing control of the blade member and the drive control of the pseudo blade member are performed by different control means, there is a possibility that the operation start timing of the blade member and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member may be slightly deviated. In this respect, according to the means A-3-b-9, the operation direction side of the blade member that can operate first is configured to be additionally covered with the false blade member, and the blade member is displaced slightly ahead Even if it does, it will be settled in the range covered with the false blade member. Therefore, it is easy to understand whether or not the blade member is displaced, or to prevent the deterioration of the design due to the difference between the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo blade member. it can.

Means A-3-b-10. The wing members and the pseudo feather members are disposed below the central portion of the game board,
When at least the blade member is in the open position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member disposed forward of the blade member is greater than the upper surface of the blade member. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-3-b-1 to A-3-b-9, which is also configured to be positioned above.

  Generally, when a player plays a gaming machine, the player's face is in such a positional relationship that the central portion of the gaming board faces. And, when the wing member and the pseudo feather member are disposed below the central portion of the game board, the line of sight of the player with respect to the feather member and the pseudo feather member faces obliquely downward (the feather member and the false feather member are oblique It looks like you're looking from above) For this reason, even if it arrange | positions a blade member and a pseudo | simulation blade member back and front, it is feared that discrimination | determination with a blade member and a pseudo | simulation blade member will be carried out for an instant.

  On the other hand, according to the means A-3-b-10, since the upper side of the artificial blade member in the functional position is located above the upper surface of the blade member in the open position, the blade in the open position is When viewed from the front upper side, the member and the artificial blade member in the functional position can be arranged relative to each other so that they overlap as much as possible. Therefore, the effect of enhancing the reality of the pseudo-blade open mode is further enhanced.

Means A-3-c-1. The pseudo-blade opening means is
A pseudo open object provided at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the blade member in the open position, the pseudo open object imitating the blade member in the open position;
A gaming machine according to the means A-3-a or A-3-b, comprising: a pseudo light source for emitting light to the pseudo open object.

  According to the means A-3-c-1, it is possible to derive the pseudo blade open mode while adopting a relatively simple configuration. In addition, it is good also as using together the pseudo | simulation blade member as described in means A-3-b.

  Means A-3-c-2. At least a part of the pre-covering means is configured as a light guide plate, and light is incident from the end to the light guide plate by the pseudo light source, whereby the blade member in the open position of the light guide plate The gaming machine according to the means A-3-c-1, wherein the pseudo open object is configured to float up at a position covering the front.

  According to the means A-3-c-2, the false blade open aspect can be derived in the pre-covering means, and the visibility of the false blade open aspect can be improved. In addition, in the pre-covering means, it is possible to visually recognize the pseudo blade open mode only when the pseudo light source emits light.

  Means A-3-c-3. The pseudo open object is provided at a position (in a base plate for attaching the second start winning means to the game board) to be covered forward by the blade member in the open position. The gaming machine according to the means A-3-c-1 or A-3-c-2.

  According to the means A-3-c-3, in the rear (base plate) of the blade member, the pseudo blade open mode can be derived with a relatively simple configuration.

Means A-3-c-4. The blade member (in the case where the configuration of the means A-3-b is used in combination, the pseudo blade member) includes a light emitting means that can be viewed from the front,
The pseudo open object of the pseudo blade opening means is formed to at least imitate the light emitting means, described in any of the means A-3-c-1 to A-3-c-3. Of gaming machines.

  According to the means A-3-c-4, the vane member is brought into the open position by providing a visual recognition mode in which the vane member (pseudo-feather member) emits light, and the pseudo-open object Further, it is possible to more strongly link the pseudo-blade release mode by the pseudo-blade release means using the pseudo-use light source (in the intuitive judgment of the glance, which will be confused). In addition, simplification of the configuration (shape) of the pseudo open object of the pseudo blade open means can be realized (it becomes a pseudo mode sufficiently by imitating only the light emitting means, not the whole).

Means A-3-c-5. The pseudo open object is not only at a position overlapping with the blade member in the open position in the front-rear direction, but also with a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with the blade member in the closed position and with the blade member in the open position It is also provided at the position between the overlapping position,
In any one of the means A-3-c-1 to A-3-c-4, the pseudo light source is configured to be capable of sequentially emitting light to each of the pseudo open objects. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means A-3-c-5, it is possible to derive an aspect that imitates the opening and closing operation of the blade member. Therefore, it is possible to derive more realistic and versatile pseudo-blade opening modes.

  Means A-4-a. When the detection of the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means is performed, the ball entering detection corresponding display means capable of deriving the ball entry detection corresponding display (for example, the pending icon) corresponding to the detection A game machine according to any one of the means A-1 to A-3, wherein the game machine is provided.

  According to the means A-4-a, even if the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means are not directly viewed, the first starting winning means or the second can be recognized by visually recognizing the entering detection corresponding display means. The game ball enters the start winning means, and it can be grasped (rather easily grasped) that the right to receive the lottery will be obtained. Therefore, the opportunity to directly view the start winning means decreases, and even if the ball entering rate to the first starting winning means is relatively low, the overall rate of ball entering to the first and second start winning means If it is not low, putting yourself in a situation where the game ball will not bother to enter either the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means Be able to avoid the situation). Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress a situation in which a decrease in interest is caused due to the fact that the game ball does not easily enter the first start winning means. On the other hand, even if it becomes difficult to see how the game ball enters the ball to the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means, it is an entering detection corresponding display means as to whether or not it entered the ball. The player can be given a sense of security because he or she can confirm it securely.

Means A-4-b-1. In the covered area of the gaming area covered by the front covering means in the front, pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
The game according to the means A-4-a is characterized in that it is possible to derive a pseudo prize mode as if the detection of the start winning detection means was performed based on the detection of the pseudo prize detection means. Machine.

  According to the means A-4-b-1, in the covered area covered with the front covering means at the front, the pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the start winning means. That is, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not the game ball has entered the start winning means is relatively lowered by providing the pre-covering means, the pre-covering means is based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means. Deriving a pseudo prize mode that the game ball entering the covered area on the back side may enter the start winning means (for example, for detecting the pseudo prize detection means installed in the covered area as well as the start winning means) On the basis of the above, the same reaction as in the case where the detection of the start winning detection means is performed is derived, and when derived, it is suggested that the reaction is due to the detection of the start winning detection means, etc.) Can. Therefore, as an action of the game ball for the starting winning means, in addition to "entered" and "not entered", a pattern "may be entered" can be added, and a presentation opportunity and The types of effects can be increased, and diversification of effects can be achieved. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of providing a pre-covering means and making it difficult to determine whether or not the game ball enters the start winning means (representation of whether the game ball enters the start winning means). And can improve the interest.

  The pseudo winning detection means may be provided downstream of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means, or may be provided upstream of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means Alternatively, the first start winning means and the second start winning means may be provided on one downstream side and the other upstream side. In addition, when the pseudo winning detection means is on the upstream side of the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means, the game ball detected by the pseudo winning detecting means is the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means It may be configured to be capable of entering a ball or may be configured to be not capable of entering a ball. Further, as the pseudo winning mode, a display mode in a predetermined display means, a sound mode by an audio output means, a light emission mode by a predetermined light emitting means, a combination thereof, and the like can be mentioned. Furthermore, when the detection by the first start winning means, the second start winning means, and the pseudo winning detection means is performed as the pseudo winning mode, for example, the ball entry detection correspondence display in the ball entry detection corresponding display means When we derive aspect (including false prize mode) that right to be able to be received lottery may be obtained as pre-step of, and then it is detection by the first start winning means and the second start winning means In the case of the false prize detection means, it is not possible to obtain the right to receive the acceptance lottery, in the case where it is detected by the pseudo prize detection means. It is possible to produce an effect such as deriving an aspect indicating an event.

  Means A-4-b-2. When the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is performed, the display of the ball entering detection corresponding display means, the pseudo ball entering detection correspondence display of an aspect different from the ball entering detection correspondence display imitating the ball entry detection correspondence display ( The gaming machine according to A-4-b-1, characterized in that the pseudo holding icon) is derived.

  In the configuration where the entry detection correspondence display is displayed if the game ball enters the start winning means, even if it is difficult to see the appearance of entering the start prize means of the game ball by the pre-covering means, etc., When the ball entry detection corresponding display is not displayed, it is grasped that the game ball has not entered the start winning means directly. In this respect, as in the means A-4-b-2, the game ball can still be displayed as the start winning means even at the timing when the ball entry detection correspondence display is displayed by enabling display of the pseudo entry detection correspondence display. It is possible to extend the understanding of the result as to whether or not the ball has entered, and it is possible to perform, for example, which one of the display corresponding to the detection of entering a ball or the display corresponding to a simulated entering of a ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the start winning means more interesting. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of deriving the pseudo feather open mode (representation of whether the game ball has entered the starting winning means), and it is possible to improve the interest.

  It should be noted that “in the case where the detection of the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means is performed in a state where the pseudo insertion detection correspondence display is displayed, the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is displayed. Instead, it may be configured to be able to derive the entry detection correspondence display. In this case, it is possible to make the visual recognition mode of the area in which the entering detection correspondence display and the pseudo entry detection correspondence display are displayed relatively clear. In addition, "the pseudo entering detection correspondence display may be erased after being displayed for a predetermined time". That is, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is displayed indefinitely and the role of the pseudo entering detection correspondence display becomes difficult to understand.

  Means A-4-b-3. When the detection of the first starting winning detection means or the second starting winning detection means is performed, the pseudo entering detection is performed before the entry detection corresponding display (the full suspension icon) corresponding to the detection is performed. A gaming machine according to the means A-4-b-2, characterized in that it is configured to be able to derive a precursor display (temporary hold icon) in the same manner as the corresponding display (pseudo hold icon).

  According to the means A-4-b-3, the ball entering detection is performed while securing the enjoyment of whether or not the pseudo entering detection corresponding display or the precursor display is changed to the ball entering detection corresponding display. It is possible to clarify the difference between the corresponding display and the mode of the pseudo entering detection corresponding display (to make it easy to understand that the pseudo entering detection corresponding display is not the entry detection corresponding display). In other words, if the ball entry detection correspondence display and the pseudo entry detection correspondence display are different, the player enters the false entry if the appearance is the same or the aspect is indistinguishable. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a feeling of distrust or the like may be felt by assuming that the display for ball detection correspondence is the display for detection of entering balls to the last.

Means A-4-b-4. Variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
The variable display means is provided with a display control means for variably displaying the identification information, and after a predetermined time, for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the acceptance lottery.
An information acquisition means for acquiring information used for the acceptance lottery when the first start winning detection means and the second start win detection means are detected;
And a hold storage unit capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
When the detection of the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means is performed during the variable display of identification information in the variable display means, the change display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is A configuration to be performed after the variable display of the identification information being executed,
Means A- The means A- is characterized in that the mode for ball-insertion detection corresponding display of the ball-insertion detection corresponding display means is determined based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the suspension storage means. The gaming machine described in 4-b-3.

  According to the means A-4-b-4, it is possible to perform more versatile effects using the ball entry detection correspondence display and the pseudo ball entry detection correspondence display. For example, when the pseudo entering detection correspondence display of a predetermined type is derived based on the detection of the first starting winning detection means and the second starting winning detection means, the case is changed to the entering detection correspondence display Suggestive effects such as an increase in the degree of expectation to the occurrence of the special gaming state can be performed. "In the state where the number of pieces of information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the suspension storage means has reached the upper limit, even when detection by the pseudo prize detection means is performed, It is also possible not to derive the detection correspondence display.

  Means A-4-b-5. When the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is displayed, the additional indication different from the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is displayed in such a manner that at least a part of the pseudo entry detection correspondence display overlaps in front of the display. A game machine according to any one of the means A-4-b-2 to A-4-b-4 characterized in that

  According to the means A-4-b-5, the mode of the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is not determined by setting the mode of the pseudo entering detection correspondence display to the aspect in which at least a part is not clarified. As a result, it is possible to strongly give the impression that there is a possibility of further change in the pseudo entering detection correspondence display. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player confuses the false entering detection correspondence display and the entering presence detection correspondence display, and misunderstand the false entry detection correspondence display with the entry detection correspondence display. Problems that may occur in (for example, processing that can be performed when entering detection detection correspondence display is performed by misinterpreting this as false detection detection correspondence display is performed. Can prevent the occurrence of such troubles as not being executed. Note that “the additional display is derived also to the precursor display”, “in the case where the ball entry detection corresponding display is derived instead of the precursor display, the corresponding to the pseudo ball entering detection corresponding display And the additional display displayed may be deleted.

  Means A-4-b-6. Detection history storage means capable of storing the detection history (time of each detection) of the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means and the detection history (time of each detection) of the pseudo prize detection means are provided. A gaming machine according to any one of the means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-5, wherein the storage information of the detection history storage means can be output.

  According to the means A-4-b-6, the player recognizes that the game ball has entered the start winning means by recognizing the pseudo prize mode (for example, the player enters the pseudo prize mode). If a problem occurs due to, for example, misinterpreting the ball detection compatible display with the ball entry detection compatible display, data can be reliably obtained when explaining circumstances etc. (For example, it can be displayed by a variable display means etc.) It can be sent to a hall computer), and the situation that the trouble is broken can be avoided.

Means A-4-b-7. A sub control unit capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-6, wherein the pseudo winning detection means is electrically connected to the sub control means.

  According to the means A-4-b-7, the control load on the main control means can be reduced or the number of configurations for inputting information to the main control means can be reduced as much as possible. In addition, it is possible to suppress the injustice to the main control means.

Means A-4-b-8. There are a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is effective as a trigger for the acceptance lottery, and an invalid state.
In the state where the detection by the start winning detection means corresponding to the predetermined start winning means among the start winning means covered forward by the front covering means, the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is validated.
Any of the means A-4-b-1 to A-4-b-7 characterized in that the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is invalidated in a state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is invalid. The game machine described in.

  According to the means A-4-b-8, the pseudo entering detection indication is displayed by displaying the false entry detection indication in the absence of a habit in which the entry detection indication is displayed. It is possible to avoid a situation where it is clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a decrease in interest is caused due to the apparent false entry detection correspondence display being derived indiscriminately.

  Means A-5. In the covered area covered forward by the front covering means in the gaming area, or in a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the covered area (corresponding to means A-2-a, The gaming machine according to any one of the means A-1 to A-4, characterized in that there is provided a course changing means for changing the advancing direction of the gaming ball at the lower position of the blade member in the open position. .

  For example, if the gaming ball enters the covered area and the wing member is in the open position, even if the gaming ball reaches the guide point guided to the start winning means (ball receiving portion) by the wing member, the wing member is When in the closed position, the gaming ball naturally flows down the gaming area without being guided by the wing members and is discharged to the outside of the covered area. At this time, when the track where the gaming ball has entered the covering area and the track after the gaming ball has been discharged from the covering area extend substantially in a straight line, the gaming ball that entered the covering area just before the first start winning Without entering the means and the second starting winning means, it will be immediately grasped as being discharged from the coated area.

  In this respect, as in the means A-5, by providing the course changing means in the covering area, the traveling direction of the gaming ball changes in the covering area, and the advancing speed of the gaming ball is delayed. It becomes difficult to track the whereabouts of the game ball after entering the area. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence relationship between the game ball entering the covered area and the game ball jumping out of the covered area to a place easily visible outward, and the game ball is the first start winning means or the second start winning means It is possible to create more situations such as entering the ball or not.

  In particular, in response to the means A-4-b-2, entering the ball is detected rather than directly observing the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means to check whether the gaming ball has entered or not. It can be made easy to shift to the game property which confirms the ball entry to the first start winning combination means and the second start winning combination means by the entry detection correspondence display of the correspondence display means. For this reason, it is possible to prevent concentration of effects or stress stagnation by visually recognizing how the game ball does not enter the first start winning means easily, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of the game involving the effects. Can be absorbed by

  In addition, corresponding to the above means A-4-b-1, "The course changing means is provided with pseudo winning guidance means for guiding the gaming ball moving the covered area to the pseudo winning detection means. It is good also as ". In this case, the game ball can be made to easily reach the pseudo prize detection means. For example, although the pseudo prize detection means is provided, the game ball must be installed at a position where it does not pass very much due to the installation space. It can avoid the situation that it hardly functions. Furthermore, after the game ball enters the covered area, the time lag until the game ball is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the start winning means becomes longer, and the game ball enters the covered area; The effect of making the correspondence with the gaming ball discharged from the covered area unclear is more prominent.

Means A-6-a. At least a portion of the pre-covering means is displaceably provided,
Decorative drive means are provided for displacing the pre-covering means,
In any of the means A-1 to A-5, the decoration driving means is configured to be drivable based on the detection of the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means A-6-a, since the entry of the game ball to the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means can be detected by the operation of the front covering means, the first starting winning means or the first starting winning means [2] Even without confirming that the game ball enters the start winning means directly, it is possible to advance the game with a relatively sense of security. As a result, it is possible to pay attention by an effect or the like that teaches the result of the acceptance lottery.

  It is to be noted that "the front cover means may be configured to be displaceable in the same manner, regardless of which of the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means is detected". Furthermore, in response to the means A-4-b-1, "the decoration drive means can be driven even when the detection of the pseudo prize detection means is performed". Good.

  Means A-6-b. The pre-covering means is configured to be displaceable based on the contact of the game ball to the pre-covering means even in the non-driving state of the decoration driving means, as described in the means A-6-a. Of gaming machines.

  According to the means A-6-b, it is possible to add interest to the operation of the pre-coating means. Furthermore, since the front covering means is displaced only by the collision of the game balls with the front covering means, it is expected that the game player has almost always entered the starting winning means for a beginner player. You can have it.

  In the non-driven state of the decorative drive means, the link mechanism linking the decorative drive means and the pre-covering means is not engaged, and in the non-driven state of the decorative drive means, the pre-covering means is supported by the elastic body. It may be configured to be performed. Further, the link mechanism for interlocking the decorative drive means and the pre-covering means transmits the driving force of the decorative drive means to the pre-covering means via the elastic means (for example, the pre-covering means is supported) A part of the shaft portion may be formed in a coil spring shape).

Means A-7-a. A first winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the first start winning detecting means;
A second winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the second start winning detecting means;
Sound effect generating means capable of generating the first winning effect sound and the confusion winning effect sound close to the second winning effect sound, comprising:
The sound effect generating means is
Based on the detection of the first start winning detection means, to generate the first winning effect sound (or the confusion winning sound effect; when used as an effect),
A game machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-6, which generates the second winning effect sound or the confusion winning effect sound based on the detection of the second start winning detection means.

  According to the means A-7-a, even if the start winning means is not directly viewed, the sound effect can confirm the entry of the gaming ball to the start winning means, and makes the game progress more smoothly be able to. The confusion winning sound effects may be created separately from the first winning sound effects and the second winning sound effects, or may be configured by simultaneously outputting the first winning sound effects and the second winning sound effects. Good. Furthermore, in response to the means A-4-b-1, "the confusion winning effect sound may be generated even when the detection of the pseudo prize detection means is performed". In this case, the effect that the game ball may enter the first starting winning means or the second starting winning means can be made more realistic.

Means A-7-b. The ball entering ratio determining means compares the number of detections of the first start winning detection means per predetermined period with the number of detections of the second start winning detection means,
When the ratio of the number of times of detection of the first start winning detection means to the number of times of detection of the second start winning detection means is less than or equal to a specified value, the sound sound generation means generates the second start The gaming machine according to the means A-7-a, wherein the confusion winning sound effect is generated based on the detection of the winning detection means.

  According to the means A-7-b, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is given the impression that the game ball is not entering the first start winning means very much.

  B. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the firing means enters the start winning means provided on the game board, a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a hit state is performed, and the variable display means performs the lottery The variable display for teaching the result of is performed (for example, refer to JP-A-2006-271480).

  In addition, as the start winning means, there is provided an opening / closing start winning means which is opened so as to allow the game ball to enter only when winning is made in a predetermined open lottery. By the way, although generally it is performed about the effect for teaching the result of the open lottery about whether or not the openable / closable start winning means is opened, as the openable start winning means itself, according to the open lottery Just opening and closing was lacking in interest.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having novel opening / closing start winning means.

Means B-1. Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and to which a game ball fired by the launch means is guided;
An openable / closable start winning means configured so as to be changeable between an open state in which the game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the ball can not enter or is difficult to enter.
Starting winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the opening / closing start winning means;
Main control means for generating a special gaming state based on the result of the success or failure lottery while performing a success or failure lottery whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the start winning detection means A gaming machine comprising
In the configuration in which the opening and closing start winning means includes a blade member that is displaceable between an open position that allows the ball to enter the opening and closing start winning means and a closed position to be restricted.
In the state where the blade member is in the closed position, the device includes pseudo blade opening means capable of deriving a pseudo blade open mode as if the blade member is in the open position (a position other than the closed position) A game machine characterized by having

  According to the means B-1, even if it is not the timing at which the openable / closable start winning means is in the open state, the pseudo blade open mode is derived as if the blade member is in the open position. Thereby, the opportunity for the predetermined | prescribed action relevant to a blade member from the visual recognition aspect which the open-close start-up winning means is made into the closed state can be increased. That is, as a visual recognition mode of the opening and closing start winning means, in addition to "open" and "closed", an aspect "may be open" can be added. Therefore, the aspect of the opening and closing start winning means becomes more colorful, and the pseudo-feather opening aspect is used to suggest an effect related to the opening and closing of the wing member and other states (suggestion of the gaming mode to stay or And the like as the suggestion of the result of the variable display, and the like as mere liveliness regardless of the opening and closing of the blade members. As a result, it is possible to mount a novel opening / closing start winning means capable of achieving diversification of presentation effects and game characteristics and the like, and it is possible to improve interest and the like.

  Furthermore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp only the timing at which the open / close start winning means is brought into the open state (or the closed state) by the pseudo blade open mode. Therefore, the gap between the advanced player who can play a game in which the openable / closable start winning means is opened and the game ball can be fired only at the timing when the game ball can enter the ball and the beginner player Can prevent the situation that

  In addition, for example, when the wing member is in the closed position, since the game ball can not be entered into the opening and closing start winning means, there is separately provided the regular start movement winning means capable of entering the game ball at all times. In such a case, the game ball will be launched aiming at such a regular start dynamic winning means. Here, if it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the regular start dynamic winning means, the image on the gaming machine may be deteriorated, and the game intention may be significantly reduced.

  On the other hand, by increasing the opportunity for opening and closing the start-up winning means, even if it is difficult for the game ball to enter the regular start moving winning means, the game ball is available for the opening and closing start-up means It is conceivable to adopt a configuration that makes it easy to enter the ball and that the ease of entering the starting winning means as a whole can be reduced.

  However, in general, in pachinko machines, a game in which a game ball is shot out aiming at a constantly-starting movable winning means capable of always entering a game ball is basically used. For this reason, the impression as to whether or not the gaming ball is likely to enter the regular start dynamic winning means tends to be stronger for the player. Therefore, by improving the ease of entering the opening / closing start winning means, it is possible to compensate for the difficulty in entering the game ball into the always starting moving winning means (even if always starting start winning means) Even if the ease of entering the game ball into the game is reduced, the ease of entering the game ball as a whole into the starting winning means is still comparable, or rather improved. If it is difficult to enter the game ball into the regular start dynamic winning means, and (almost) not repeated, the impression on the gaming machine or the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed is deteriorated. Are concerned.

  Therefore, in the above-mentioned means B-1, it is assumed that "a pseudo-blade release means capable of deriving a pseudo-blade release mode as if the blade member exists in the open position" is provided. For this reason, even when the wing member is in the closed position, when the pseudo-feather opening mode is derived, the player's interest is more toward the opening and closing start winning means than the always-start moving winning means. You can pull it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a decrease in interest is caused due to the game ball's difficulty in entering the regular start dynamic winning means.

  Furthermore, the pseudo-feather opening mode is for the purpose of making the feather member appear as if it were opened, and although it looks like the feather member is opened, the game ball enters the opening / closing start winning means In such a condition that there is no sign, the entering state of the game ball of the opening and closing start winning means and the appearance of the opening and closing start winning means do not necessarily coincide. And if the pseudo-feather opening mode is repeated to a certain extent, if the game ball is constantly entering the opening / closing start winning means etc. and there is no delay in the game (the game ball does not enter the starting winning means too much) If the player is not in a state of being forced to play a disadvantageous game), the mode of the wing member and the mode of opening the pseudo-vane can lead to an uneasy mind. As a result, even if the ease of entering the gaming ball to the regular start dynamic winning means is reduced, the effect that the deterioration of the impression resulting from that can be suppressed can be further enhanced. It will be played.

  In the state where the false blade open mode is derived (for example, the false blade member described later is in the functional position), the blade member in the closed position is positioned regardless of whether the blade member is in the closed position or not. It is desirable to be configured so that the change in the visual aspect of the place to be done is reduced. For example, if a cover is provided to cover the front of the blade member (and the pseudo blade member) in the closed position, or if the blade member is displaced to the open position corresponding to the rear position of the blade member in the closed position. It may be configured to be visible and to be designed to imitate (the front surface shape of) the blade member. In this case, it is more difficult to determine whether the false blade open mode is only derived or whether the blade member is also in the open position (whether or not the blade member is in the closed position), and false feather By providing the means, the operation and effect can be further enhanced. In addition, the opening and closing start winning combination means of the present means B-1 is configured by the second start winning combination device 33b and the pseudo blade member 431 corresponding to the above-described main embodiment.

  "The opening and closing start winning means receives a game ball moving the game area, and moves the ball reception section guiding the outside of the game area, and the game area on the side of the ball reception section. Between the open position for guiding the game ball to the ball receiving portion and the closed position for restricting the movement of the game ball moving the game area on the side of the ball receiving portion to the ball receiving portion side It is good also as "having a displaceable blade member."

Means B-2-a. The game area is provided at a distance allowing game balls to pass between the game board and the game board, and is provided with a front covering means that covers at least a front side of the opening / closing start winning means,
The front covering means is provided so as to cover the front of at least a part of the blade member in the closed position and a part of the blade member in the open position;
At least a part of the pre-covering means is transparent, and is configured such that the blade member can be viewed through the pre-covering means.

  According to the means B-2-a, by providing the front covering means for covering the front of the opening and closing start winning means, the visibility of the blade member and the visibility of the game ball moving around the opening and closing start winning means Relatively lower. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference between the pseudo-feather opening mode and the mode in which the wing member is actually placed in the open position, and the situation where the pseudo-feather opening mode is directly grasped by the movement path of the game ball. Can be suppressed.

Means B-2-b. The pre-covering means comprises a first object display which shapes a first object;
The blade member (a pseudo blade member corresponding to means B-4 to be described later) includes a second object display unit in which a second object is shaped;
When the blade member (corresponding to the means B-4, the pseudo blade member) is brought to the open position (corresponding to the means B-4, the functional position), the second object is the first object. It becomes a completed display state that shapes the third object together with the object,
By setting the blade member (corresponding to the means B-4, the pseudo blade member) to the closed position (corresponding to the means B-4, the standby position), the whole or the size of the second object is obtained. The part is hidden behind the first object, and
When the pseudo blade opening mode is derived by the pseudo blade opening means, the pseudo blade opening mode is in the completed display state in which the third object is shaped together with the first object. The gaming machine described in -2-a.

  According to the means B-2-b, the first object display unit is provided for the front covering means, and the third object is folded together with the first object when the blade member is in the open position. (2) By providing a second object display unit for displaying an object, while focusing on the third object operating with displacement of the wing member, the visibility of the back side of the front covering means is reduced, or the start winning means Can reduce the player's interest in the game ball entering the game. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression caused by the decrease in the ease of entering the game ball into the first start winning means is further exhibited.

  Moreover, even if it does not set a blade member to an open position, it can be set as the completion display state in which a 3rd object is displayed by a pseudo | simulation blade | wing open | release means. Therefore, it is possible to more positively perform the rendering using the third object. Furthermore, even when the pseudo-feather opening mode is derived, the third member (which is easy for the player to recognize as a shape) is displayed in the completed display state, so that the feather member may be displaced to the open position. The reality of the wing open mode can be further enhanced.

Means B-2-c-1. In the covered area of the gaming area covered by the front covering means in the front, pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
A means B-2-a or B-2 configured to be able to derive a pseudo prize mode as if the detection of the start winning prize detection means was performed based on the detection of the false prize detection means. The gaming machine described in -b.

  According to the means B-2-c-1, the pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the opening and closing start winning means in the covered area covered with the front covering means at the front. That is, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not the game ball has entered the opening / closing start winning means is relatively lowered by providing the pre-covering means, based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means, Deriving a pseudo winning mode such that the game ball entering the covered area on the back side of the covering means may enter the openable start winning means (for example, a pseudo installed in the covered area as well as the openable start winning means) Based on the detection by the winning detection means, a reaction similar to that when the detection by the starting winning detection means is performed is derived, or when derived, it is suggested that the reaction is due to the detection by the starting winning detection means And so on). Therefore, as an action of the game ball for the opening and closing start winning means, in addition to "entered" and "not entered", a pattern "may enter" may be added, and effects The types of opportunities and effects can be increased to diversify the effects. As a result, it is difficult to know whether the game ball enters the start winning means by providing the pre-covering means (representation of whether the game ball enters the opening / closing start winning means) dramatically It can be enhanced and the interest can be improved.

Means B-2-c-2. When the detection of the start winning combination detection means is performed, a means for detecting entering balls corresponding to the detection (for example, a hold icon) corresponding to the detection is provided, and the means for detecting entering balls is provided.
When the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is performed, in the ball entering detection corresponding display means, the pseudo ball entering detection corresponding display different from the ball entering detection corresponding display imitating the ball entering detection corresponding display The game machine according to B-2-c-1, which is configured to be able to be derived.

  In the configuration where the ball entry detection corresponding display is displayed when the game ball enters the opening / closing start winning means, it is difficult to see the appearance of the ball entering the opening / closing start winning means of the game ball by the front covering means, etc. Even when the entry detection correspondence display is not displayed, it is grasped that the game ball has not entered the opening / closing start winning means directly. In this respect, as in the means B-2-c-2, the game ball is still opening and closing start winning at the timing when the ball entry detection correspondence display is displayed by enabling display of the pseudo entry detection correspondence display. It is possible to extend the fact that the result of whether or not the ball has entered the means can be extended, and it is possible to perform, for example, which of the ball-in-placement detection corresponding display or the pseudo ball-in-round detection corresponding display. Therefore, the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the opening / closing start winning means can be made more interesting. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of deriving the pseudo feather open mode (representation of whether the game ball has entered the opening / closing start winning means), and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Means B-2-c-3. When the detection of the start winning detection means is performed, the same as the pseudo entering detection correspondence display (pseudo holding icon) before deriving the entering detection correspondence display (the full holding icon) corresponding to the detection. The gaming machine according to the means B-2-c-2, which is configured to be able to derive a precursor display (temporary hold icon) that is an aspect.

  According to the means B-2-c-3, the ball entering detection is performed while securing the enjoyment of whether or not the display changes to the ball entering detection corresponding display at the stage when the pseudo entry detection corresponding display or the precursor display is displayed. It is possible to clarify the difference between the corresponding display and the mode of the pseudo entering detection corresponding display (to make it easy to understand that the pseudo entering detection corresponding display is not the entry detection corresponding display). In other words, if the ball entry detection correspondence display and the pseudo entry detection correspondence display are different, the player enters the false entry if the appearance is the same or the aspect is indistinguishable. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a feeling of distrust or the like may be felt by assuming that the display for ball detection correspondence is the display for detection of entering balls to the last.

Means B-2-c-4. There are a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is effective as a trigger for the acceptance lottery, and an invalid state.
In the state where the detection by the start winning detection means corresponding to the predetermined start winning means among the start winning means covered forward by the front covering means, the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is validated.
Any of the means B-2-c-1 to B-2-c-3 characterized in that the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is invalidated in a state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is invalid. The game machine described in.

  According to the means B-2-c-4, the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is displayed in the absence of a habit that the entering detection correspondence display is displayed, and thus the false entering detection correspondence display It is possible to avoid a situation where it is clearly recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a decrease in interest is caused due to the apparent false entry detection correspondence display being derived indiscriminately.

Means B-3. First start winning means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
The game ball moving in the game area is configured to be changeable between an open state in which the ball can enter the ball and a closed state in which the ball can not enter the ball or in which it is difficult to enter the ball. A second start winning means as the open / close start winning means disposed downstream of the area;
First start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the first start winning means;
A second start winning detection means as the start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the second start winning means;
The main control means is configured to perform the acceptance lottery based on the detection of the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means,
The gaming machine according to the means B-2, characterized in that the front covering means collectively covers at least the front of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means.

  According to the means B-3, the game ball is made up of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning by the front covering means which collectively covers the front of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means (retractable starting winning means). It becomes difficult to understand which of the means entered the ball. Therefore, in the case where the second start winning means is set to be opened with a balance that allows the player to proceed with the game without much stress, the player is behind the front covering means. As long as the game ball is made to enter, the game ball can enter the ball to either the first start winning means or the second start winning means and proceed with the game in the sense that the winning lottery is received . That is, even if the ball pitch of the game ball to the first starting winning means is low, if the game ball enters the second starting winning means relatively easily, since the winning or losing lottery can be received constantly Since there is no substantial loss in advancing the game, and it becomes difficult to visually identify which of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means the game ball has entered, the first starting gradually It doesn't bother about whether it is easy for the game ball to enter the winning means. As a result, even if the ease of entering the gaming ball into the first starting winning means is reduced, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the impression resulting from that.

  In addition, by providing the pre-covering means, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the peripheral portions of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means. That is, if the game ball is shot with the aim of the front covering means, a relatively easy-to-understand visual image of entering either of the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means can be obtained. Further, it is possible to perform more dynamic decoration and the like in the pre-covering means which collectively covers the first start winning means and the second start winning means, and the design can be improved.

  The pre-covering means may be formed integrally with the part covering the first starting winning means and the part covering the second starting winning means (integrally formed or combined separately). And those separately configured may be arranged adjacent to each other. In addition, “a part of the front covering means through which game balls can pass through at least the rear game area (for example, covers the front of winning means such as the first starting winning means and the second starting winning means) In the region other than the region), it may be configured to be transparent (made of a transparent or translucent material, or to form a slit, etc.). In this case, it is possible to eliminate a situation where a player or the like who is playing a game for the first time becomes uneasy because he can not see what is happening behind the front covering means. Also, for example, the pre-covering means may be used as a place to teach the player predetermined information. For example, it may be configured to display model information (model name, probability of winning lottery, etc.) on the pre-covering means, or to display an image character or the like.

Means B-4-a. The false blade opening means may be disposed in front of the blade member, and may cover a front of the blade member in the closed position and a functional position capable of covering the front of the blade member in the open position. It has a dummy blade member that can be displaced between the standby position and
A game ball is configured to be able to pass through the game area behind the pseudo blade member when the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position. The gaming machine according to any one of B-1 to B-3.

  According to the means B-4-a, it is possible to more accurately derive the pseudo-blade opening mode. That is, for example, it is conceivable to provide a pseudo-vane opening means imitating the aspect of the wing member at the rear of the wing member, but in this case, such pseudo-vane opening means is disposed relatively backward. There is a concern that the blade opening means is difficult to see even if it is in the pseudo blade opening mode. In addition, the game ball may pass in front of the artificial feather opening means in the artificial feather opening mode. By these, there exists a possibility that it may be grasped | ascertained immediately that pseudo | simulation blade open | release aspect is pseudo | simulation. In this respect, the above-mentioned concern can be eliminated by providing the artificial blade member in front of the blade member.

  In addition, since the pseudo blade member can be displaced to the functional position while the blade member is in the closed position, more than necessary game balls enter the opening / closing start winning means (second start winning means). And the like (for example, the mode in which the character operates when the pseudo blade member is part of the character display, the mode in which the opening / closing start winning means (slightly) opens and closes, etc.) Can also be fully utilized.

  The shape of the pseudo-vane member is not limited to a plate shape, and for example, it is an open in the displacement direction of the pseudo-vane member, and has a quadrangular frame shape capable of accommodating the vane member inside, It may be configured to have a substantially U-shaped cross section with a part cut away. Further, with regard to the means B-2 and the means B-3, the pseudo-blade members in the functional position may protrude outward beyond the outer edge of the front covering means. That is, while making the whereabouts of the blade members unclear, while making the whereabouts of the pseudo blade members easy to understand, the effect using the pseudo blade members is recognized, while the opening and closing of the blade members takes care. It is possible to have the game progress while suppressing being played.

  Means B-4-b. The gaming machine according to the means B-4-a, wherein the pseudo-vane opening means displaces the pseudo-vane member also to the functional position when the wing member is displaced to the open position. .

  According to the means B-4-b, when the blade member is in the open position, an aspect in which the blade member is viewed from the front, and when the pseudo blade member is in the functional position although the blade member is in the closed position The aspect which carried out the plain view of the blade member can be made the same (the pseudo-blade member in which both are in a functional position is visually recognized). Therefore, the reality of the false feather open mode can be further enhanced. In addition, when the configuration is adopted, it is not necessary to make the aspect on the front surface side of the blade member the same as that of the pseudo blade member, and processing such as drawing a figure on the front surface of the blade member etc. It does not have to be done. For this reason, simplification of the structure of the blade member can be achieved, and when a predetermined figure or the like is drawn on the front surface of the blade member, the figure or the like is rubbed with the pseudo blade member and the designability is reduced. It is possible to prevent doing things etc.

  Means B-4-c. The blade member and the pseudo blade member are configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the blade member and the rotation axis of the pseudo blade member extend on the same straight line. The gaming machine according to 4-a or B-4-b.

  According to the means B-4-c, the movement of the blade member and the movement of the pseudo blade member can be relatively easily synchronized. Therefore, for example, even while the blade member is being displaced between the open position and the closed position, the pseudo blade member can be displaced in synchronization with the displacement of the blade member to cover the front of the blade member. Therefore, the effects such as making the whereabouts of the blade members indistinct can be further enhanced. The pseudo shaft connected to the pseudo blade member may be inserted into the substantially cylindrical blade shaft connected to the blade member. In this case, it is possible to relatively easily extend the rotational axes of the blade member and the pseudo blade member on the same straight line.

  Means B-4-d. The blade member presses the pseudo blade member when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, thereby moving the pseudo blade member from the standby position to the functional position. A gaming machine according to any one of the means B-4-a to B-4-c, characterized in that it comprises a section.

  According to the means B-4-d, when the blade member is displaced from the closed position to the open position, if the blade member is driven first (mainly), the pseudo blade member will follow it. For this reason, it is avoided that each operate separately, and it is possible to move the blade members and the pseudo blade members in synchronization as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the open position and the operation of the pseudo blade member displaced to the functional position are deviated, and the blade member is displaced to the open position or only the dummy blade member is displaced to the functional position It is possible to avoid the situation where it becomes easy to understand whether it is only

  In the case of displacing the blade member from the closed position to the open position and displacing the pseudo blade member from the standby position to the functional position, blade side drive means for operating the blade member, and the pseudo blade Among the pseudo side drive means for operating the member, the blade side drive means may be driven.

  Means B-4-e. The pseudo blade member presses the blade member when the pseudo blade member is displaced from the functional position to the standby position, thereby causing the blade member to be displaced from the open position to the closed position. A gaming machine according to any one of the means B-4-a to B-4-d, characterized in that it comprises a section.

  According to the means B-4-e, when the blade member is displaced from the open position to the closed position, if the pseudo blade member is driven first (mainly), the blade member will follow it. For this reason, it is avoided that each operate separately, and it is possible to move the blade members and the pseudo blade members in synchronization as if they were one member. Therefore, the operation of the blade member displaced to the closed position and the operation of the artificial blade member displaced to the standby position are deviated, and whether the blade member was in the open position or only the artificial blade member is functional position It is possible to avoid the situation where it becomes easy to understand if it was only present in

  In the case of displacing the blade member from the open position to the closed position and displacing the pseudo blade member from the functional position to the standby position, blade side drive means for operating the blade member, and the pseudo blade Among the pseudo side drive means for operating the member, the pseudo side drive means may be driven.

  Means B-4-f. The blade member is made of a material that is colorless and transparent, or a material having a hue similar to the color of a member positioned behind the blade member in the open position. To B-4-e.

  According to the means B-4-f, it is possible to make the blade member difficult to see (the operation and location of the blade member become difficult to check). Therefore, the effect of enhancing the reality of the pseudo-blade open mode is further enhanced.

Means B-4-g. A sub control unit capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control unit;
The opening and closing control of the opening and closing start winning means is executed by the main control means.
A drive control of the pseudo blade opening means is executed by the sub control means (corresponding to information on the opening and closing of the opening and closing start winning means from the main control means). The gaming machine according to any one of a to B-4-f.

  According to the means B-4-g, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control means.

B-4-h. The pseudo-blade opening means is
When the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member in the standby position is displaced to the functional position;
When the blade member in the open position is displaced to the closed position, the pseudo blade member in the functional position is displaced to the functional position.
The main control means outputs, to the sub control means, release schedule information to the effect that the blade member is displaced to the open position prior to the process of displacing the blade member to the open position.
The gaming machine according to the means B-4-g, wherein the sub control means displaces the pseudo blade member to the standby position when the release schedule information is received.

  According to the means B-4-h, when the blade member in the closed position is displaced to the open position, the pseudo blade member is already in the functional position, so that the blade member in the middle of displacement is covered with the pseudo blade member. Can be avoided.

Means B-4-i. The area of the front surface of the pseudo blade member is larger than that of the blade member,
When the blade member is in the open position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the side portion of the pseudo blade member on the standby position side than the surface on the closed position side of the blade member Is located on the closed position side,
When the blade member is in the closed position and the pseudo blade member is in the standby position, the side portion of the pseudo blade member on the functional position side than the surface on the open position side of the blade member The game machine according to the means B-4-g or the means B-4-h, characterized in that one is located on the open position side.

  When the opening and closing control of the blade member and the drive control of the pseudo blade member are performed by different control means, there is a possibility that the operation start timing of the blade member and the operation start timing of the pseudo blade member may be slightly deviated. In this respect, according to the means B-4-i, the operation direction side of the blade member which can be operated first is configured to be additionally covered with the pseudo blade member, and it is assumed that the blade member is displaced slightly ahead. Also, it will be in the range covered with the false blade member. Therefore, it is easy to understand whether or not the blade member is displaced, or to prevent the deterioration of the design due to the difference between the operation of the blade member and the operation of the pseudo blade member. it can.

Means B-4-j. The wing members and the pseudo feather members are disposed below the central portion of the game board,
When at least the blade member is in the open position and the pseudo blade member is in the functional position, the upper side portion of the pseudo blade member disposed forward of the blade member is greater than the upper surface of the blade member. The gaming machine according to any one of the means B-4-a to B-4-i, characterized in that the game machine is also positioned above.

  Generally, when a player plays a gaming machine, the player's face is in such a positional relationship that the central portion of the gaming board faces. And, when the wing member and the pseudo feather member are disposed below the central portion of the game board, the line of sight of the player with respect to the feather member and the pseudo feather member faces obliquely downward (the feather member and the false feather member are oblique It looks like you're looking from above) For this reason, even if it arrange | positions a blade member and a pseudo | simulation blade member back and front, it is feared that discrimination | determination with a blade member and a pseudo | simulation blade member will be carried out for an instant.

  On the other hand, according to the means B-4-j, since the upper side of the artificial blade member in the functional position is located above the upper surface of the blade member in the open position, the blade member in the open position and When viewed from the front upper side, the artificial blade members in the functional position can be arranged relative to each other so that they overlap as much as possible. Therefore, the effect of enhancing the reality of the pseudo-blade open mode is further enhanced.

  Means B-4-k. The direction of movement of the game ball moving in the game area at a specific covered area whose front is covered by the false feather member in the functional position among the gaming areas, or at a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the specified covered area. A game machine according to any one of the means B-4-a to B-4-j, characterized in that there is provided a course change means for changing.

  For example, even if the game ball enters a specific covering area and the wing member is in the open position, even if the game ball reaches a guide point guided to the opening and closing start winning means (ball receiving unit) by the wing member, When the wing member is in the closed position, the gaming ball naturally flows down the game area without being guided by the wing member and is discharged to the outside of the specific covering area. At this time, when the track where the gaming ball has entered the specific covering area and the track after the gaming ball has been discharged from the specific covering area extend substantially in a straight line, the gaming ball that has entered the covering area earlier is a wing member It is immediately grasped as having been discharged from the specific covering area without being guided by the vehicle and consequently entering the starting winning means.

  In this point, like the means B-4-k, the game ball after entering the specific coating area is provided by providing the course changing means at the specific coating area or a position adjacent to or downstream of the specific coating area. It becomes difficult to follow the whereabouts of Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the gaming ball that has entered the specific covering area and the gaming sphere that has jumped out of the specific covering area to a place where it can be easily seen outward, and the gaming sphere is guided by the wing members, and the opening and closing start is started. It is possible to create more situations in which the player may enter the winning means (second starting winning means) or may not enter the ball.

  Note that “the side portion on the standby position side of the pseudo blade member in the functional position is located closer to the closed position side than the surface on the closed position side of the blade member in the open position” It is good also as ". Further, "the gaming ball guided to the blade member in the open position may be configured to be covered forward by the pseudo blade member in the functional position". In this case, it can be made more unclear whether or not the gaming ball has been guided by the wing members.

  In addition, it is good also as "it is provided also in the coating | coated area | region covered by the said front coating means" corresponding to said means B-2. In this case, it becomes more difficult to grasp the behavior of the gaming ball in the covering area, and it is possible to make it difficult to understand the correspondence between the gaming ball entering the covering area and the gaming ball discharged from the covering area. Further, corresponding to the above-mentioned means B-2-d, "as the course change means is provided with the pseudo prize guidance means for guiding the game ball moving the covered area to the pseudo prize detection means". It is also good. In this case, the game ball can be made to easily reach the pseudo prize detection means. For example, although the pseudo prize detection means is provided, the game ball must be installed at a position where it does not pass very much due to the installation space. It can avoid the situation that it hardly functions. Furthermore, after the game ball enters the covered area, the time lag until the game ball is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the start winning means becomes longer, and the game ball enters the covered area; The effect of making the correspondence with the gaming ball discharged from the covered area unclear is more prominent.

Means B-5-a. The pseudo-blade opening means is
A pseudo open object provided at a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with respect to the blade member in the open position, the pseudo open object imitating the blade member in the open position;
A gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 or B-4, comprising a pseudo light source for irradiating the pseudo open object with light.

  According to the means B-5, it is possible to derive the pseudo blade open mode while adopting a relatively simple configuration. In addition, it is good also as using together the pseudo | simulation blade member as described in a means B-4. In addition, corresponding to the means B-2 and the means B-3, “at least a part of the pre-covering means is configured as a light guide plate, and light is incident from the end to the light guide plate by the pseudo light source By setting the light guide plate, the pseudo open object may be configured to be raised at a position covering the front of the blade member at the open position in the light guide plate. In this case, the false blade open mode can be derived in the pre-covering means, and the visibility of the false blade open mode can be improved. In addition, in the pre-covering means, it is possible to visually recognize the pseudo blade open mode only when the pseudo light source emits light.

Means B-5-b. The blade member (in the case where the configuration of the means B-4 is used in combination, "the pseudo blade member") includes a light emitting means that can be viewed from the front,
The gaming machine according to the means B-5-a, wherein the pseudo opening object of the pseudo feather opening means is formed to simulate at least the light emitting means.

  According to the means B-5-b, the blade member is in the open position by providing a visual recognition mode in which the blade member (quasi blade member) emits light itself, the pseudo open object, and the pseudo It is possible to more strongly link the pseudo-blade opening mode by the pseudo-blade opening means using the light source (in the intuitive judgment of the glance, which will be confused). In addition, simplification of the configuration (shape) of the pseudo open object of the pseudo blade open means can be realized (it becomes a pseudo mode sufficiently by imitating only the light emitting means, not the whole).

Means B-5-c. The pseudo open object is not only at a position overlapping with the blade member in the open position in the front-rear direction, but also with a position overlapping in the front-rear direction with the blade member in the closed position and with the blade member in the open position It is also provided at the position between the overlapping position,
The gaming machine according to the means B-5-a or B-5-b, wherein the pseudo light source is configured to be capable of sequentially emitting light to each of the pseudo open objects.

  According to the means B-5-c, it is possible to derive an aspect that simulates that the blade member opens and closes. Therefore, it is possible to derive more realistic and versatile pseudo-blade opening modes.

Means B-6. An opening covering means for covering the front of the blade member in the open position;
A game machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-5, comprising at least one of a closed cover means for covering the front of the blade member in the closed position.

  According to the means B-6, since the blade members in the closed position and the open position are concealed, it can be made difficult to grasp which of the open position and the closed position the blade member is in. In particular, with regard to the means B-4, when the position of the blade member and the position of the pseudo blade member do not correspond to each other, the function and effect of the present means are further exhibited. In addition, like the above-mentioned means B-4-k, progress of the game ball which moves a game area in the field which the front is covered with the disclosure covering means among the game areas, or the part adjacent to the lower stream side of the field. It is good also as providing the course change means which changes direction. That is, for example, even in the configuration in which the pseudo blade member such as the above-mentioned means B-4-k is not provided, the course change is made in the present means B-6 which makes it difficult to know whether the blade member is in the open position. By providing the means, basically the same function and effect as the means B-4-k can be obtained.

  C. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the firing means enters the start winning means provided on the game board, a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a hit state is performed, and the variable display means performs the lottery The variable display for teaching the result of is performed (for example, refer to JP-A-2006-271480).

  Further, as a start winning means, there is provided an opening / closing start winning means which is capable of entering the game ball only when winning in a predetermined open lottery, and the game ball enters the start winning means It is known to add tonation to game play by setting an easy-to-do state and a hard-to-enter state. However, even in the opening and closing start winning means, it only opens and closes according to the result of the open lottery, and the behavior of itself is monotonous. Furthermore, the game ball that has reached the opening and closing start winning means can enter if the opening and closing start winning means is in the open state, and can not enter if it is in the closed state. The behavior of the game ball moving around the periphery of the means is relatively monotonous.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of a starting winning combination and improving the interest. .

Means C-1. Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and to which a game ball fired by the launch means is guided;
Starting winning means capable of entering game balls moving in the game area;
Start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the start winning means;
Main control means for generating a special gaming state based on the result of the success or failure lottery while performing a success or failure lottery whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the start winning detection means A gaming machine comprising
A guidance means (provided at the entrance of the start winning means or the guiding means for guiding the game balls to the starting winning means) so as to separate the distance through which the gaming ball can pass between the gaming area and the gaming board in the gaming area Is configured to be displaceable between the functional position covering the front of the gaming ball guided to the front and the standby position for exposing the starting winning means or the guiding means forward, at least in part being transparent A game machine characterized by comprising movable covering means.

  According to the means C-1, when the movable covering means is in the functional position, whether or not the game ball has entered the starting winning means, although the movable covering means has transparency, or The visibility is relatively reduced as to whether the ball is guided by the guiding means. In particular, when the movable covering means is in operation or immediately after the operation, the line of sight of the player is drawn to the movable covering means, which tends to be stronger. Therefore, it may be possible that a situation occurs in which the player loses an eye for a moment even after watching the game ball, or that the player is likely to try to grasp the movement of the game ball by another method. It is possible to obtain an opportunity to add (such as where to play the game ball, as a result, teaching and suggesting what will happen, etc., with another display means, etc.). As a result, with regard to entering the start winning means of the game ball (start winning), it is possible to generate more dramatic development and effects, and it is possible to improve interest and the like.

  Incidentally, the movable covering means of the means C-1 is, for example, constituted by the pseudo-vane member 431 in the above-described main embodiment, and the general part is constituted by the front decoration portion 403.

  Means C-2. The direction of movement of the game ball moving in the game area at the specific cover area whose front is covered by the movable cover means in the functional position among the game areas, or at a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the specific cover area. The gaming machine according to the means C-1, characterized in that there is provided a course change means for changing the

  For example, even if the game ball enters a specific covered area covered forward by the movable covering means in the functional position, it enters the start winning means provided in the specific covered area or is guided by the guiding means If not, the game ball naturally flows down the game area as it is and is discharged to the outside of the specific covered area. At this time, when the track where the gaming ball has entered the specific covering area and the track after the gaming ball has been discharged from the specific covering area extend substantially in a straight line, the gaming ball that has entered the covering area just before the start winning Without entering the means, it will be immediately identified (identified) as having been discharged from the specific coated area.

  In this point, as in the means C-2, by providing the course change means at the specific coating area or a position adjacent to or downstream of the specific coating area, the movement of the game ball after entering the specific coating area It becomes difficult to keep track of Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence between the gaming ball that has entered the specific covering area and the gaming ball that has jumped out of the specific covering area to a location that is easily visible outward, and the gaming sphere enters the start winning means, It is possible to create more situations in which the guidance means may or may not be guided. In this way, by providing the movable covering means, it is possible to prevent the situation where the game ball will be directly grasped as to whether or not the game ball has won the start prize, even if it is unclear whether the game ball has won the start prize. Such an effect can be made more effective in the case of performing an effect to teach and suggest what happened to the gaming ball that has entered the specific covering area.

Means C-3-a. The game area is provided at a distance allowing game balls to pass between the game board and the game board, and is provided with a front covering means covering at least the front of the start winning means,
The pre-covering means is provided adjacent to or in proximity to the movable covering means (in a front view) (provided that it can not be displaced relative to the game board), and at least partially transparent. Equipped with a general part,
The gaming machine according to the means C-2, characterized in that the course change means is provided for a general covered area covered with the general part in the front of the gaming area.

  According to the means C-3-a, it becomes more difficult to grasp the behavior of the gaming ball in the covering area (general covering area and specific covering area) behind the pre-covering means, and the gaming ball entering the covering area and the covering area It is possible to make it difficult to understand the correspondence relationship with the ejected game balls. Therefore, it is possible to create more situations where the gaming ball entering the covered area may or may not enter the starting winning means. Note that "the front covering means may be attached to the game board".

  Means C-3-b. The gaming machine according to means C-3-a, wherein the pre-covering means is configured to cover the front of at least a part of the movable covering means.

  According to the means C-3-b, it is possible to combine the pre-covering means and the movable covering means in a more complicated manner to derive more various effects. Also, concealing the link mechanism part of the movable covering means, concealing the movable covering means in a predetermined state (position), supporting the movable covering means, guiding the displacement of the movable covering means Can.

Means C-4-a. In the covered area (generally covered area) of which the front is covered by the front covering means in the gaming area, a pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
A gaming machine according to the means C-3, characterized in that it is possible to derive a pseudo winning mode as if the detection of the start winning detection means was performed based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means.

  According to the means C-4-a, the pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the start winning means in the covered area covered with the front covering means at the front. That is, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not the game ball has entered the start winning means is relatively lowered by providing the pre-covering means, the pre-covering means is based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means. Deriving a pseudo prize mode that the game ball entering the covered area on the back side may enter the start winning means (for example, for detecting the pseudo prize detection means installed in the covered area as well as the start winning means) On the basis of the above, the same reaction as in the case where the detection of the start winning detection means is performed is derived, and when derived, it is suggested that the reaction is due to the detection of the start winning detection means, etc.) Can. Therefore, as an action of the game ball for the starting winning means, in addition to "entered" and "not entered", a pattern "may be entered" can be added, and a presentation opportunity and The types of effects can be increased, and diversification of effects can be achieved. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of providing a pre-covering means and making it difficult to determine whether or not the game ball enters the start winning means (representation of whether the game ball enters the start winning means). And can improve the interest.

  Furthermore, corresponding to the above-mentioned means C-3, "the course change means is provided with pseudo prize guidance means for guiding the game ball moving on the covered area (generally covered area) to the pseudo prize detection means It is good also as ". In this case, the game ball can be made to easily reach the pseudo prize detection means. For example, although the pseudo prize detection means is provided, the game ball must be installed at a position where it does not pass very much due to the installation space. It can avoid the situation that it hardly functions. Furthermore, after the game ball enters the covered area, the time lag until the game ball is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the start winning means becomes longer, and the game ball enters the covered area; The effect of making the correspondence with the gaming ball discharged from the covered area unclear is more prominent.

Means C-4-b. When the detection of the start winning combination detection means is performed, a means for detecting entering balls corresponding to the detection (for example, a hold icon) corresponding to the detection is provided, and the means for detecting entering balls is provided.
When the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is performed, the display of the ball entering detection corresponding display means, the pseudo ball entering detection correspondence display of an aspect different from the ball entering detection correspondence display imitating the ball entry detection correspondence display ( The game machine according to C-4-a, characterized in that the pseudo holding icon) is configured to be able to be derived.

  According to the means C-4-b, even if the start winning means is not directly viewed, the game ball enters the start winning means by visually recognizing the entering detection corresponding display means, and the right to receive the lottery It is possible to grasp (or rather easy to grasp) that Therefore, even if it becomes somewhat difficult to see how the game ball enters the start winning detection means, it is possible to firmly confirm with the entry detection corresponding display means whether the ball has entered or not. Can give a sense of security to

  In addition, in the configuration where the ball entry detection corresponding display is displayed when the game ball enters the start winning means, it is difficult to see the ball entering the start prize means of the game ball by the movable covering means, etc. Also, when the entry detection correspondence display is not displayed, it is immediately grasped that the game ball has not entered the start winning means. In this respect, by making it possible to display the pseudo entering detection correspondence display, it is possible to know the result as to whether or not the game ball entered the starting winning means even at the timing when the entering detection correspondence display is displayed. It can be extended, and can be rendered as to which of the ball entry detection correspondence display or the pseudo entry detection correspondence display. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the start winning means more interesting.

  It should be noted that “when the start winning detection means is detected in the state where the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is displayed, the entry detection correspondence display is displayed instead of the pseudo entering detection correspondence display. It may be configured to be derivable. In this case, it is possible to make the visual recognition mode of the area in which the entering detection correspondence display and the pseudo entry detection correspondence display are displayed relatively clear. In addition, "the pseudo entering detection correspondence display may be erased after being displayed for a predetermined time". That is, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is displayed indefinitely and the role of the pseudo entering detection correspondence display becomes difficult to understand.

  Means C-4-c. When the detection of the start winning detection means is performed, the same as the pseudo entering detection correspondence display (pseudo holding icon) before deriving the entering detection correspondence display (the full holding icon) corresponding to the detection. The gaming machine according to the means C-4-b, which is configured to be able to derive a precursor display (temporary hold icon) that is an aspect.

  According to the means C-4-c, at the stage when the pseudo entering detection indication or the precursor indication is displayed, the entry detection indication is displayed while securing the enjoyment of whether or not the indication changes to the entry detection indication. And the pseudo entering detection correspondence display can be clarified (to make it easy to understand that the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is not the entrance detection correspondence display). In other words, if the ball entry detection correspondence display and the pseudo entry detection correspondence display are different, the player enters the false entry if the appearance is the same or the aspect is indistinguishable. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a feeling of distrust or the like may be felt by assuming that the display for ball detection correspondence is the display for detection of entering balls to the last.

  Means C-4-d. A detection history storage unit capable of storing detection history (time of each detection) of the start winning detection unit and detection history (time of each detection) of the pseudo winning detection unit is provided, and storage of the detection history storage unit A game machine according to any one of the means C-4-a to C-4-c, which is configured to be able to output information.

  According to the means C-4-d, the player recognizes that the game ball has entered the start winning means by recognizing the pseudo winning mode (for example, the player detects the false ball entering) If a problem occurs due to misinterpreting the correspondence display as the entry detection correspondence display, etc., data can be reliably obtained when explaining the circumstances etc. (For example, it can be displayed by a variable display means etc., Hall computer And the problem that the above-mentioned trouble is broken can be avoided.

Means C-4-e. A sub control unit capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control unit;
The gaming machine according to any of the means C-4-a to C-4-d, wherein the pseudo winning detection means is electrically connected to the sub control means.

  According to the means C-4-e, the control load on the main control means can be reduced or the main control means can be reduced by reducing the number of information input to the main control means and the number of configurations for inputting information to the main control means as much as possible. It is possible to suppress the fraud to the control means.

Means C-4-f. There are a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is effective as a trigger for the acceptance lottery, and an invalid state.
In the state where the detection by the start winning detection means corresponding to the predetermined start winning means among the start winning means corresponding to the movable covering means (the front covered by the front covering means) is effective, the pseudo winning Detection of the detection means is enabled,
In any of the means C-4-a to C-4-e, the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is invalidated in a state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is invalid. Gaming machine.

  According to the means C-4-f, the pseudo entering detection indication is displayed in the absence of a habit in which the entry detection indication is displayed, thereby clearly indicating that the indication is the false entry detection indication. It is possible to avoid the situation of being recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a decrease in interest is caused due to the apparent false entry detection correspondence display being derived indiscriminately.

Means C-5. A winning effect sound corresponding to the detection of the start winning detection means,
And sound sound generating means capable of generating a confusion sound effect similar to the winning sound effect,
The sound effect generating means is
Generating the winning effect sound or the confusion winning sound effect based on the detection of the start winning detection means,
A gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-4, wherein the confusion winning effect sound is generated based on the detection of the pseudo prize detection means.

  According to the means C-5, it is possible to confirm the entrance of the gaming ball to the starting winning means by the sound effect even if the starting winning means is not directly viewed, and to make the game progress more smoothly it can. In addition, the confusion winnings effect sound is generated based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means, and the confusion winnings sound effect is generated even on the basis of the detection of the starting winning detection means, so that the game ball enters the starting winning means It may be possible to make the rendition of something more realistic.

Means C-6-a. The guide means is an openable / closable start winning arrangement configured to be changeable between an open state in which a game ball moving the gaming area can enter and a closed state in which the ball can not enter or difficult to enter. An open position provided corresponding to the opening and closing start winning means which is a means and guiding a game ball moving to the side of the opening and closing start winning means to the opening and closing start winning means, and the opening and closing start winning means The open / close start winning means is placed in the open state and the closed state by displacing between the closed position restricting the movement of the gaming ball moving laterally to the open / close start winning means side. Configured as a changing vane member,
In any of the means C-1 to C-5, the movable covering means is configured to cover the front of the blade member in the open position by being brought into the functional position. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means C-6-a, by means of the movable covering means, it can be obscured whether or not the blade member of the open / close start winning means is in the open position. Note that "the side portion of the movable covering means in the functional position on the standby position side is located closer to the closed position side than the surface on the closed position side of the blade member in the open position" It is good also as ". Further, "the gaming ball guided to the blade member in the open position may be configured to be covered forward by the movable covering means in the functional position". In this case, it can be made more unclear whether or not the gaming ball has been guided by the wing members.

  Incidentally, "the front covering means (general part) has a first object display unit having a shape of a first object, corresponding to the means C-3, and the movable covering means has a shape of a second object. And the movable covering means is brought into the functional position, whereby the second object and the first object are brought into a complete display state in which the third object is shaped, and the movable covering means is By setting the standby position, all or most of the second object may be hidden behind the first object.

  In this case, a first object display unit is provided for the front covering means (general part), and a second object in which the third object is curved together with the first object when the movable covering means becomes the functional position. By focusing the line of sight on the third object, etc. operating with the displacement of the movable covering means, while reducing the visibility of the back side of the front covering means, or by providing a second object display unit for displaying Can reduce the player's interest in the game ball entering the game. Therefore, the effect of suppressing the deterioration of the impression caused by the decrease in the ease of entering the gaming ball into any one of the start winning means is further exhibited.

  D. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the firing means enters the start winning means provided on the game board, a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a hit state is performed, and the variable display means performs the lottery The variable display for teaching the result of is performed (for example, refer to JP-A-2006-271480).

  Further, in recent years, at a stage before the variable display is performed, an effect (so-called, pre-reading effect, hold effect) may be performed to suggest the content of the variable display. However, such suggestive effects are also becoming more common, and the effect of improving interest is decreasing.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can further improve the fun with regard to the start winning.

Means D-1. Launching means for launching game balls;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and to which a game ball fired by the launch means is guided;
Starting winning means capable of entering game balls moving in the game area;
Start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the start winning means;
Main control means for generating a special gaming state based on the result of the success or failure lottery while performing a success or failure lottery whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the detection of the start winning detection means A gaming machine comprising
The game area is provided at a distance allowing game balls to pass between the game board and the game board, and is provided with a front covering means covering at least the front of the start winning means,
In the covered area of the gaming area covered by the front covering means in the front, pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the covered area is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to derive a pseudo winning mode as if the detection of the start winning detection means was performed based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means.

  According to the means D-1, in the covered area covered with the front covering means at the front, the pseudo winning detection means is provided together with the start winning means. That is, in the configuration in which the visibility of whether or not the game ball has entered the start winning means is relatively lowered by providing the pre-covering means, the pre-covering means is based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means. Deriving a pseudo prize mode that the game ball entering the covered area on the back side may enter the start winning means (for example, for detecting the pseudo prize detection means installed in the covered area as well as the start winning means) On the basis of the above, the same reaction as in the case where the detection of the start winning detection means is performed is derived, and when derived, it is suggested that the reaction is due to the detection of the start winning detection means, etc.) Can. Therefore, as an action of the game ball for the starting winning means, in addition to "entered" and "not entered", a pattern "may be entered" can be added, and a presentation opportunity and The types of effects can be increased, and diversification of effects can be achieved. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of providing a pre-covering means and making it difficult to determine whether or not the game ball enters the start winning means (representation of whether the game ball enters the start winning means). And can improve the interest.

  The start winning means may be one or plural. In addition, "pre-covering means may be attached to the game board". Further, as the pseudo winning mode, a display mode in a predetermined display means, a sound mode by an audio output means, a light emission mode by a predetermined light emitting means, a combination thereof, and the like can be mentioned.

Means D-2. When the detection of the start winning detection means is performed, a ball-entering-detection corresponding display means capable of deriving a ball-entering-detection-corresponding display corresponding to the detection is provided.
When the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is performed, in the ball entering detection corresponding display means, the pseudo ball entering detection corresponding display different from the ball entering detection corresponding display imitating the ball entering detection corresponding display It is comprised so that derivation | leading-out is possible, The game machine of D-1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  In the configuration where the entry detection correspondence display is displayed if the game ball enters the start winning means, even if it is difficult to see the appearance of entering the start prize means of the game ball by the pre-covering means, etc., When the ball entry detection corresponding display is not displayed, it is grasped that the game ball has not entered the start winning means directly. In this respect, as in the means D-2, by making it possible to display the pseudo entering detection corresponding display, at the timing when the entering detection corresponding display is displayed, is the gaming ball still entering the start winning means? It is possible to extend the understanding of the result as to whether or not it is possible to perform, for example, which one of the ball entry detection corresponding display and the pseudo ball entry detection correspondence display. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect of whether or not the game ball has entered the start winning means more interesting. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the value of the effect of whether or not the game ball enters the start winning means, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  Means D-3. When the detection of the start winning combination detection means is performed, it is possible to derive a precursor display that is in the same manner as the pseudo entering detection correspondence display before the entry detection correspondence display corresponding to the detection is derived. The gaming machine according to the means D-2 characterized in that

  According to the means D-3, at the stage when the pseudo entering detection correspondence display or the precursor display is displayed, the entry detection correspondence display while securing the enjoyment of whether or not this changes to the entry detection correspondence display, It is possible to clarify the difference of the aspect from the pseudo entering detection correspondence display (to make it easy to understand that the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is not the entry detection correspondence display). In other words, if the ball entry detection correspondence display and the pseudo entry detection correspondence display are different, the player enters the false entry if the appearance is the same or the aspect is indistinguishable. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a feeling of distrust or the like may be felt by assuming that the display for ball detection correspondence is the display for detection of entering balls to the last.

Means D-4. Variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
The variable display means is provided with a display control means for variably displaying the identification information, and after a predetermined time, for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the acceptance lottery.
An information acquisition unit that acquires information used for the acceptance lottery when the start-up winning detection unit performs detection;
And a hold storage unit capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
When the detection of the start winning detection means is performed during the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means, the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is a variable display of the identification information being executed. The configuration to be performed later,
A means for determining the ball-insertion-detection corresponding display of the ball-insertion-detection corresponding display means is determined based on the information acquired by the information acquiring means stored in the hold storage means. The gaming machine according to 3.

  According to the means D-4, it is possible to perform a more versatile effect using the ball entry detection correspondence display and the pseudo ball entry detection correspondence display. For example, when a pseudo-entering detection corresponding display of a predetermined type is derived based on the detection of the start winning detection means, if it changes to the entrance detection corresponding display, an expectation to the occurrence of the special gaming state Suggestions can be made, such as an increase in degree. "In the state where the number of pieces of information acquired by the information acquisition means stored in the suspension storage means has reached the upper limit, even when detection by the pseudo prize detection means is performed, It is also possible not to derive the detection correspondence display.

  Means D-5. When the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is displayed, the additional indication different from the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is displayed in such a manner that at least a part of the pseudo entry detection correspondence display overlaps in front of the display. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-2 to D-4 characterized in that

  According to the means D-5, the mode of the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is not determined at least in part, the aspect of the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is not determined, and hence the pseudo It is possible to strongly give the impression that there is a possibility of further change in the ball entry detection correspondence display. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player confuses the false entering detection correspondence display and the entering presence detection correspondence display, and misunderstand the false entry detection correspondence display with the entry detection correspondence display. Problems that may occur in (for example, processing that can be performed when entering detection detection correspondence display is performed by misinterpreting this as false detection detection correspondence display is performed. Can prevent the occurrence of such troubles as not being executed. Note that “the additional display is derived also to the precursor display”, “in the case where the ball entry detection corresponding display is derived instead of the precursor display, the corresponding to the pseudo ball entering detection corresponding display And the additional display displayed may be deleted.

  Means D-6. A detection history storage unit capable of storing the detection history (time of each detection) of the start winning detection unit and the detection history (time of each detection) of the pseudo winning detection unit is provided, and the storage information of the detection history storage unit A game machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-5, which is configured to be able to output.

  According to the means D-6, the player recognizes that the game ball has entered the start winning means by recognizing the pseudo winning mode (for example, the player is displayed for detecting the false ball entering detection) In the event that a problem occurs, for example, by mistaken for the ball entry detection correspondence display, data at the time of explaining the circumstances etc. can be reliably obtained (for example, it can be displayed by variable display means etc. Can be avoided, and the situation in which the trouble is broken can be avoided.

Means D-7. A sub control unit capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-6, wherein the pseudo winning detection means is electrically connected to the sub control means.

  According to the means D-7, the control load on the main control means can be reduced or the main control means can be reduced by minimizing the number of information input to the main control means and the configuration for inputting information to the main control means. It is possible to curb fraud and so on.

  Means D-8. In the covered area covered forward by the front covering means in the gaming area, or in a position adjacent to or close to the downstream side of the covered area, course change means for changing the advancing direction of the game ball is provided. A game machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-7, characterized in that:

  For example, even if the game ball enters the covered area, if it is not possible to enter the start winning means, the game area flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside of the covered area. At this time, when the track where the gaming ball has entered the covering area and the track after the gaming ball has been discharged from the covering area extend substantially in a straight line, the gaming ball that entered the covering area just before the first start winning Without entering the means and the second starting winning means, it will be immediately grasped as being discharged from the coated area.

  In this respect, as in the means D-8, by providing the course changing means in the covering area, the traveling direction of the gaming ball changes in the covering area, and the advancing speed of the gaming ball is delayed. It becomes difficult to track the whereabouts of the game ball after entering the area. Therefore, it becomes difficult to understand the correspondence relationship between the game ball entering the covered area and the game ball jumping out of the covered area to a position easily visible outward, and the game ball may enter the start winning means You can create more situations where you may not have entered the ball.

  Means D-9. The gaming machine according to the means D-8, wherein the course changing means includes a pseudo winning guidance means for guiding a gaming ball moving in the covered area to the pseudo winning detection means.

  According to the means D-9, it is possible to easily bring the game ball to the pseudo prize detection means. For example, although the pseudo prize detection means is provided, at a position where the game ball does not pass so much due to the installation space. It is possible to avoid the situation where it has to be installed and hardly functions. Furthermore, after the game ball enters the covered area, the time lag until the game ball is discharged to the outside of the covered area without entering the start winning means becomes longer, and the game ball enters the covered area; The effect of making the correspondence with the gaming ball discharged from the covered area unclear is more prominent.

Means D-10. There are a state in which the detection by the start winning detection means is effective as a trigger for the acceptance lottery, and an invalid state.
In the state where the detection by the start winning detection means corresponding to the predetermined start winning means among the start winning means covered forward by the front covering means, the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is validated.
The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-9, wherein the detection of the pseudo winning detection means is invalidated in a state where the detection by the predetermined start winning detection means is invalid.

  According to the means D-10, it is clearly recognized that the pseudo entering detection correspondence display is displayed by displaying the false entry detection correspondence display in the absence of a habit in which the entry detection correspondence display is displayed. It is possible to avoid situations such as Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a decrease in interest is caused due to the apparent false entry detection correspondence display being derived indiscriminately.

Means E-1. In the gaming machine according to any one of the above means A to D,
A payout means (payout device 358) for paying out gaming balls;
A ball tray (upper tray 19 or lower tray 15) capable of storing gaming balls at a position where the player can contact the player;
And a dispensing passage for communicating between the dispensing means and the bowl.
The delivery passage is
A first passage extending in a meandering direction in the left-right direction (or in the front-rear direction);
A second passage provided to connect between a first position of the first passage and a second position downstream of the first position of the first passage;
Between a first guiding state provided at the connecting portion between the first passage and the second passage, for guiding the gaming ball to the first passage, and a second guiding state for guiding the gaming ball to the second passage A dispensing time adjusting means having switching means switchable in
More than the first time required when gaming balls paid out by the payout means are paid out to the ball tray via the first passage,
A game machine characterized in that a second time required for a game ball paid out by the payout means to be paid out to the ball tray via the second passage is set shorter.

  According to the means E-1, it is possible to change the timing at which the game balls are paid out from the payout means to the ball receiving tray. Therefore, whether or not the game ball entering the covered area on the back side of the front covering means enters the start winning means (for example, pseudo entering ball) depending on the presence or absence of the game balls paid out to the ball receiving tray (prize ball) It is possible to suppress a situation in which the detection correspondence display is grasped before it is taught whether or not the ball entry detection correspondence display is displayed. In addition, it is possible to produce effects by adjusting the payout timing of the game balls. For example, based on a predetermined operation of the player, the payout passage can be switched to the second passage side, and the gaming ball can be paid out to the ball tray at a timing earlier than normal. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation and the game and to improve the interest.

  The time required for the game balls paid out by the payout means to be paid out to the ball tray via the payout passage varies depending on the distance, angle, shape (course) and the like of the payout passage.

Means E-2. Equipped with operation means (effect button 125, cross button 126, etc.) operable by the player;
The gaming machine according to the means E-1, characterized in that the switching means is switched from the first guidance state to the second guidance state based on an operation of the operation means.

Means E-3. Variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information;
The variable display means is provided with a display control means for variably displaying the identification information, and after a predetermined time, for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the acceptance lottery.
An information acquisition means for acquiring information used for the acceptance lottery when the first start winning detection means and the second start win detection means are detected;
And a hold storage unit capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information acquired by the information acquisition unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit,
When the detection of the first start winning detection means and the second start winning detection means is performed during the variable display of identification information in the variable display means, the change display of the identification information corresponding to the detection is A configuration to be performed after the variable display of the identification information being executed,
In the state where the information acquired by the information acquisition means is not stored in the hold storage means, the switching means is maintained in the first guidance state, as described in the means E-1 or E-2. Of gaming machines.

  According to the means E-3, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player stops the game and leaves the seat before the game ball is paid out to the ball tray.

  Below, the basic composition of the various game machines to which each said means is applied is shown.

  a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed embodiment, “the operation means (game ball emission handle) operated by the player, and the emission means (emission motor etc.) for releasing the game ball based on the operation of the operation means A ball game machine having a game area in which the game balls are guided and ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation opening, etc.) disposed in the game area can be mentioned.

  b. The gaming machine in each of the above-described means is a ball game machine having a gaming area extending substantially in the vertical direction. As a more detailed embodiment, “the operation means (game ball emission handle) operated by the player, and the emission means (emission motor etc.) for releasing the game ball based on the operation of the operation means Game balls are guided, and a predetermined game area (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface etc.) extending along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, A ball game machine having a variable winning device, an operation opening, etc.) and configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area.

  c. The gaming machine in each of the above means, or each of the ballistic gaming machines, is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

  10: Pachinko machine, 32: variable winning device, 33a: first start winning device, 33b: second starting winning device, 34: through gate, 42: decorative symbol display device, 43L: first special display device, 43R: first 2 special display device, 261 ... main controller, 262 ... sub controller.

Claims (2)

A game area in which game balls fired by a predetermined launch means are guided;
First start winning means capable of entering game balls in the game area;
The game area is provided separately from the first start winning means in the game area, and it is possible to switch between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or unable to enter the ball and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than the closed state. 2 Start winning means,
First start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the first start winning means;
Second start winning detection means for detecting a game ball entering the second start winning means;
Based on the detection of the first start winning detection means or the second start winning detection means, perform a lottery of whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player, based on the result of the lottery Main control means for generating the special game state;
Special symbol display means for performing final display of the special symbol in a mode based on the lottery result of the acceptance lottery after the variation display of the predetermined special symbol is performed;
Special symbol display control means for controlling the special symbol display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
While having a second finalized signal output means for externally outputting a second finalized signal indicating that a variable display associated with the entry of the gaming ball to the second starting winning means has been finalized ,
Triggered by entering the game ball to the first start winning means or the second start winning means, a high entering ball that the game ball can enter the second start winning means more easily than a predetermined low entering state It has ball entry state switching means that can be switched to the state,
The second finalized signal output means includes, as the second finalized signal, a low final entering second finalized signal indicating that the variable display has been established in the low entering state, and a variable display in the high entering state. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to externally output a high entry-time second decision signal indicating that the game is decided. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images